This text discusses the internal structure and the evolution of stars.

It
emphasises the basic physics governing stellar structure and the basic
ideas on which our understanding of stellar structure is founded. The
book also provides a comprehensive discussion of stellar evolution.
Careful comparison is made between theory and observation, and the
author has thus provided a lucid and balanced introductory text for the
student.

Volume 1 in this series by Erika Bohm-Vitense: Basic stellar observations

and data, introduces the basic elements of fundamental astronomy and
astrophysics. Volume 2: Stellar atmospheres, conveys the physical ideas
and laws used in the study of the outer layers of a star. The present
volume is thefinalone in this short series of books which together provide
a modern, complete and authoritative account of our present knowledge
of the stars.

Each of the three books is self-contained and can be used as an indepen-

dent textbook. The author is Professor of Astronomy at the University of
Washington, Seattle, and has not only taught but has also published many
original papers in this subject. Her clear and readable style should make
all three books a first choice for undergraduate and beginning graduate
students taking courses in astronomy and particularly in stellar astro-
physics.
Introduction to stellar astrophysics

Volume 3
Stellar structure and evolution
Introduction to Stellar Astrophysics:

Volume 1
Basic stellar observations and data
ISBN 0 521 34402 6 (hardback)
ISBN 0 521 34869 2 (paperback)

Volume 2
Stellar atmospheres
ISBN 0 521 34403 4 (hardback)
ISBN 0 521 34870 6 (paperback)

Volume 3
Stellar structure and evolution
ISBN 0 521 34404 2 (hardback)
ISBN 0 521 34871 4 (paperback)
Introduction to
stellar astrophysics
Volume 3
Stellar structure and evolution

Erika Bohm-Vitense
University of Washington

CAMBRIDGE
UNIVERSITY PRESS
PUBLISHED BY THE PRESS SYNDICATE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE
The Pitt Building, Trumpington Street, Cambridge CB2 1RP, United Kingdom

CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge CB2 2RU, United Kingdom
40 West 20th Street, New York, NY 10011-4211, USA
10 Stamford Road, Oakleigh, Melbourne 3166, Australia

© Cambridge University Press 1992

This book is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception and to the provisions

of relevant collective licensing agreements, no reproduction of any part may
take place without the written permission of Cambridge University Press.

First published 1992

Reprinted 1993, 1997

Typeset in ll/14pt Times New Roman

A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library

Library of Congress Cataloguing in Publication data

Bohm-Vitense, E.
Introduction to stellar astrophysics
Includes bibliographical references and indexes.
Contents: v. 1. Basic stellar observations and data - v. 2. Stellar
atmospheres - v. 3. Stellar structure and evolution.
1. Stars. 2. Astrophysics. I. Title
QB801.B64 1989 523.8 88-20310

ISBN 0 521 34404 2 hardback

ISBN 0 521 34871 4 paperback

Transferred to digital printing 2004

 Contents

Preface xiii
1 Introduction 1
1.1 Color magnitude diagrams 1
1.2 Stellar luminosities 11
1.3 Effective temperatures of stars 13
1.4 Stellar masses 14
1.5 The mass-luminosity relation 16
1.6 Spectral classification 18
1.7 The chemical composition of stars 20

2 Hydrostatic equilibrium 21
2.1 The hydrostatic equilibrium equation 21
2.2 Consequences of hydrostatic equilibrium 24
2.3 Relation between thermal and gravitational energy: the
virial theorem 25
2.4 Consequences of the virial theorem 29

3 Thermal equilibrium 32
3.1 Definition and consequences of thermal equilibrium 32
3.2 Radiative energy transport and temperature gradient 35
3.3 A first approximation for the mass-luminosity relation 38
3.4 Energy transport by heat conduction 39

4 The opacities 42
4.1 Bound-free and free-free absorption coefficients 42
4.2 Electron scattering 48
4.3 The line absorption coefficients 48

5 Convective instability 51
5.1 General discussion 51
5.2 The Schwarzschild criterion for convective instabilitv 51

Vll
viii Contents
5.3 The adiabatic temperature gradient 53
5.4 Reasons for convective instabilities 56

6 Theory of convective energy transport 61

6.1 Basic equations for convective energy transport 61
6.2 Mixing length theory of convective energy transport 64
6.3 Choice of characteristic travel length / 67
6.4 Energy exchange between rising or falling gas and
surroundings 69
6.5 Temperature gradient with convection 71
6.6 Temperature stratification with convection in stellar
interiors 74
6.7 Convective overshoot 76
6.8 Convective versus radiative energy transport 77

7 Depths of the outer convection zones 79

7.1 General discussion 79
7.2 Dependence of convection zone depths on Teff 81
7.3 Dependence of convection zone depths on chemical
abundances 83
7.4 The lithium problem 84

8 Energy generation in stars 86

8.1 Available energy sources 86
8.2 Nuclear energy sources 87
8.3 The tunnel effect 89
8.4 The proton-proton chain 93
8.5 The carbon-nitrogen cycle 95
8.6 The triple-alpha reaction 96
8.7 Element production in stars 97
8.8 Comparison of different energy generation mechanisms 98
8.9 Equilibrium abundances 100
8.10 Age determination for star clusters 102

9 Basic stellar structure equations 106

9.1 The temperature gradient 106
9.2 The pressure gradient 107
9.3 The boundary conditions 108
9.4 Dimensionless structure equations 109

10 Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium 113

10.1 The dependence of stellar parameters on mass 113
 Contents ix

10.2 Dependence of stellar parameters on the mean atomic

weight, or evolution of mixed stars 117
10.3 Changes of main sequence position for decreasing heavy
element abundances 121
10.4 Homologous contracting stars in radiative equilibrium 126
11 Influence of convection zones on stellar structure 130
11.1 Changes in radius, luminosity and effective temperature 130
11.2 The Hayashi line 132
11.3 Physical interpretation of the Hayashi line 136
11.4 Stars on the cool side of the Hayashi line 139
12 Calculation of stellar models 141
12.1 Schwarzschild's method 141
12.2 Henyey's method 142
12.3 Stellar evolution 151
13 Models for main sequence stars 155
13.1 Solar models 155
13.2 The solar neutrino problem 158
13.3 Hot star models 164
13.4 Semi-convection 168
13.5 Structure of main sequence A stars 169
13.6 The peculiar A stars 170
14 Evolution of low mass stars 172
14.1 Evolution along the subgiant branch 172
14.2 Advanced stages of low mass stellar evolution 176
14.3 Degeneracy 177
14.4 Equation of state for complete degeneracy 182
14.5 Onset of helium burning, the helium flash 186
14.6 Post core helium burning evolution 189
14.7 Planetary nebulae 192
15 Evolution of massive stars 197
15.1 Evolution along the giant branch 197
15.2 Blue loop excursions 198
15.3 Dependence of evolution on interior mixing 200
15.4 Evolution after helium core burning 202
15.5 The carbon flash 203
15.6 Evolution of massive stars beyond the blue loops 203
15.7 Type II supernovae 203
x Contents
16 Late stages of stellar evolution 206
16.1 Completely degenerate stars, white dwarfs 206
16.2 Neutron stars 211

17 Observational tests of stellar evolution theory 213

17.1 Color magnitude diagrams for globular clusters 213
17.2 Color magnitude diagrams of young clusters 216
17.3 Observed masses of white dwarfs 217
17.4 Supernovae, neutron stars and black holes 220

18 Pulsating stars 222

18.1 Period-density relation 222
18.2 Evolutionary state of Cepheids 227
18.3 Analysis of pendulum oscillations 228
18.4 Adiabatic pulsations 229
18.5 Excitation of pulsations by the K mechanism 231
18.6 Excitation by nuclear energy generation? 235
18.7 Limits of pulsation amplitudes 236
18.8 The edges of the instability strip 237

19 The Cepheid mass problem 238

19.1 Importance of Cepheid mass determinations 238
19.2 The period-luminosity relation 238
19.3 Evolutionary masses 239
19.4 Pulsational masses 239
19.5 Baade-Wesselink masses 240
19.6 Bump masses and beat masses 242
19.7 Dynamical masses 243

20 Star formation 245

20.1 Introduction 245
20.2 Jeans' criterion for gravitational instability 246
20.3 Adiabatic contraction or expansion of a homogeneous
cloud 248
20.4 Non-adiabatic expansion and contraction of optically thin
clouds 251
20.5 Optically thick clouds and protostars 256
20.6 Fragmentation 257
20.7 Fragmentation limits 260
20.8 Influence of magnetic fields 261
 Contents xi

20.9 Position of protostars in the color magnitude diagram,

Hayashi theory 262
20.10 The initial mass function 262
20.11 Inhomogeneous collapse of protostars 264
20.12 Conclusion 265

Appendix: Radiative energy transport in stars 266

Problems 273

References 280

Index 283
 Preface

In Volume 3 of Introduction to Stellar Astrophysics we will discuss the

internal structure and the evolution of stars.
Many astronomers feel that stellar structure and evolution is now
completely understood and that further studies will not contribute essen-
tial knowledge. It is felt that much more is to be gained by the study of
extragalactic objects, particularly the study of cosmology. So why write
this series of textbooks on stellar astrophysics?
We would like to emphasize that 97 per cent of the luminous matter in
our Galaxy and in most other galaxies is in stars. Unless we understand
thoroughly the light emission of the stars, as well as their evolution and
their contribution to the chemical evolution of the galaxies, we cannot
correctly interpret the light we receive from external galaxies. Without this
knowledge our cosmological derivations will be without a solid foundation
and might well be wrong. The ages currently derived for globular clusters
are larger than the age of the universe derived from cosmological expan-
sion. Which is wrong, the Hubble constant or the ages of the globular
clusters? We only want to point out that there are still open problems
which might well indicate that we are still missing some important physical
processes in our stellar evolution theory. It is important to emphasize
these problems so that we keep thinking about them instead of ignoring
them. We might waste a lot of effort and money if we build a cosmological
structure on uncertain foundations.
The light we receive from external galaxies has contributions from stars
of all ages and masses and possibly very different chemical abundances.
We need to study and understand all these different kinds of stars if we
want to understand external galaxies.
We feel that we need a short and comprehensive summary of our
knowledge about stellar evolution. Much new insight has been gained in
the past few decades. In addition, we want to point out that there are still
many interesting open questions in the field of stellar structure and
Xlll
xiv Preface

evolution: for example, we still do not know accurately what the masses of
the Cepheids are. How can we be sure that the period luminosity relation is
the same for Cepheids in other galaxies as we observe it in our neighbor-
hood if we are not sure yet that we understand their structure? How can we
use supernovae in other galaxies as distance indicators, if we do not
understand the dependence of their brightness on mass or the original
chemical abundances of the progenitors? Unless we understand the
evolution of the presupernovae and the processes which lead to the
explosions, we cannot be sure about the intrinsic brightnesses of the
supernovae.
Much interesting physics is still to be learned from studying the internal
structure of stars. Nowhere in the laboratory can we study such high
density matter as in white dwarfs or neutron stars.
In many parts of this volume we shall follow the excellent discussions in
the book by M. Schwarzschild (1958) on stellar structure and evolution.
Other good books on the topic of stellar structure were published in the
1950s and 1960s, giving many more details than we will be able to give
here. We feel however that since that time much progress has been made
in the field and an updated textbook is needed.
In the present volume we try to emphasize the basic physics governing
the structure of the stars and the basic ideas on which our understanding of
stellar structure is based.
As in the other volumes of this series, we can only discuss the basic
principles and leave out the details, sometimes even at the expense of
accuracy. We hope to communicate the basic understanding on which
further specialized studies can build.
We also want to emphasize the comparison with observations which
may support our understanding of stellar evolution or which may show
that we still have something to learn.
The book is meant to be a textbook for senior and first-year graduate
students in astronomy or physics. We tried to make it understandable for
anybody with a basic physics and mathematics education.
We also tried to make this volume understandable for readers who are
not familiar with Volumes 1 and 2 of this series. For those readers we give a
short introduction which summarizes some basic definitions and facts
about stars. Readers who are familiar with the earlier volumes may skip
the introduction.
As in the previous volumes, we do not give references for every
statement, but rather refer the readers to some of the other textbooks
which give the older references. We only give references for the most
 Preface xv
recent results which are not yet listed in existing textbooks, and for specific
data used from other publications.
There are a number of more specialized and more detailed books
available. We list a number of these books in the bibliography for
those readers who want to learn more about the field than can be presented
here.
I am very grateful to Drs K. H. Bohm, W. Brunish, V. Haxton, R.
Kippenhahn and J. Naiden for a critical reading of several chapters of this
book and for many helpful suggestions.
I am especially indebted to W. Brunish and Ch. Proffitt for supplying a
large amount of data and plots which were used for this book.
 1
Introduction

1.1 Color magnitude diagrams

7.7.7 Apparent magnitudes of stars
In the first volume of this series we discussed how we can measure
the brightnesses of stars, expressed in magnitudes. For a given wavelength
band we compare the amount of energy which we receive above the
Earth's atmosphere and compare this essentially with the amount that we
receive from Vega, also above the Earth's atmosphere. If in this wave-
length band the star is brighter than Vega, then its magnitude is smaller
than that of Vega. If jr/is the amount of energy we receive per cm2 s from a
given star, then the magnitude differences are defined by
m v (l) - m v (2) = -2.5(log/(l) - log/(2)) (1.1)
where (1) refers to star 1 and (2) to star 2. The magnitudes designated by
lower case m describe the apparent magnitudes which refer to the energy
received here but corrected for the absorption by the Earth's atmosphere
(see Volume 1). The subscript V in equation (1.1) indicates measurements
in the visual band, i.e. in the wavelength band to which our eyes are
sensitive. We can also measure the energy received for star 2 in other
wavelength bands (for instance in the blue), compare these with the
energy received for star 1 in the same (for instance, blue) wavelength
bands, and hence obtain magnitudes for these other wavelength bands.
We can thus determine magnitudes in the blue, or in the ultraviolet, etc.
We still need to define the magnitudes for star 1, the standard star, for
which we use Vega. By definition, all apparent magnitudes, i.e. all lower
case m magnitudes for Vega, are essentially zero.
(Strictly speaking, the zero point for the apparent magnitude scale is
fixed by the north polar sequence of stars or by the standard star sequence
of Johnson and Morgan (1953), but for all practical purposes we can say
that the zero point is fixed by Vega. We may make an error in the
1
2 Introduction
magnitudes by 0.01 or 0.02, which is about the measuring uncertainty
anyway.)
This definition that for Vega m = 0 for all wavelengths does not mean
that the fluxes received from Vega for different wavelengths are all the
same; they are not (see Fig. 1.1).

7.7.2 The colors

The stars do not all have the same relative energy distribution as
Vega. There are stars which have more flux in the visual spectral region
than Vega. Their visual magnitude (V) is therefore smaller than that of
Vega. These same stars may have lessfluxthan Vega in the ultraviolet (U)
or blue spectral regions (B). In these wavelength bands their magnitudes
are larger than those of Vega. The magnitudes of a given star may
therefore be different in different wavelength bands. The difference

7.7

Solar type star

4.0 4.1
\ogA
Fig. 1.1. The energy distributions of a star like Vega and ot a star similar to the sun. If
the solar type star is assumed to have the same apparent brightness in the blue (B)
spectral region as the star similar to Vega then it has more light in the visual (V) than the
Vega type star. The raB - rav = B - V of the solar type star is larger than for Vega, i.e.
its B - V > 0. It looks more red.
 Color magnitude diagrams 3
between, for instance, the visual and the blue magnitudes of a given star
then tells us something about the energy distribution in the star as
compared to the energy distribution for Vega. Stars which have relatively
more energy in the visual than in the blue as compared to Vega look more
'red' than Vega. For such stars the difference raB — ravis positive (see Fig.
1.1). The difference between the blue and the visual magnitudes is
abbreviated by B - V. The difference is called the B — V color. Positive
values of B - Vrojpanthe star is more 'red' than Vega, negative values of
B - V mean the star is more 'blue'. We can define different colors
depending on which magnitudes we are comparing. The U - B color
compares the magnitude in the ultraviolet and in the blue.
Often the apparent magnitudes m v , raB and rriu are abbreviated by V, B
and U respectively.

1.1.3 Interstellar reddening

When studying the intrinsic colors and magnitudes of stars we also
have to take into account that the interstellar medium between us and the
stars may absorb some of the star light. In fact, it is the interstellar dust
which absorbs and scatters light in the continuum. It absorbs and scatters
more light in the blue and ultraviolet spectral region than in the visual.
This changes the colors. The change in color is called the color excess.
On average the color excess increases with increasing distance of the star
if it is in the galactic plane. Since there is no or very little dust in the
galactic halo there is very little additional reddening for stars further out in
the galactic halo. In the galactic disk the average change in the B - V
color, or the color excess in B - V, is E(B — V) = 0.30 per kilo-
parsec and Arav = Ay ~ 1 magnitude per kiloparsec. Usually the ratio
Ay/E(B — V) ~ 3.2. The color excess in the B - V colors is larger than in
the U - B colors. We find generally £(U - B)/£(B - V) - 0.72. The
apparent magnitudes, corrected for interstellar reddening, are designated
by a subscript 0, i.e. mBVo, mBo, mUo etc., and the colors by (B - V)o and
(U-B)o.

1.1.4 The absolute magnitudes of the stars

The amount of energy we receive above the Earth's atmosphere
decreases inversely with the square of the distance of the star. If we know
the distance of the star we can calculate the apparent magnitude the star
would have if it were at a distance of 10 parsec. These magnitudes are
called the absolute magnitudes and are designated by a capital M. We can
4 Introduction
again determine M v , MB, My etc., depending on the wavelength band we
are considering. We can easily convince ourselves that the colors deter-
mined from the absolute magnitudes are the same as those determined
from the apparent magnitudes, i.e.
mBo - mVo = MB - Mv = Bo - Vo = (B - V)o (1.2)
Vega is at a distance of 8 parsec (pc). If Vega were at a distance of 10 pc it
would be fainter. This means its magnitude would be larger than its actual
apparent magnitude. The absolute magnitude of Vega is M v = 0.5.
Absolute magnitudes tell us something about the intrinsic brightnesses
of stars because we compare the brightnesses they would have if they were
all at the same distance. For nearby stars the distances d can be determined
by means of trigonometric parallaxes, as we discussed in the previous
volumes. The relation between apparent and absolute magnitudes is given
by
m V ( ) - M v = 51ogd(pc)-5 (1.3)
where d is the distance measured in parsec (at a distance of 1 parsec, the
angular orbital radius of the Earth around the Sun is 1 arcsec). The value
of mVo - My is called the distance modulus.

7.7.5 The color magnitude diagram of nearby stars

If we have determined colors and absolute magnitudes of stars, we
can plot their positions in a so-called color magnitude diagram, also called
a Hertzsprung Russell diagram. (The true Hertzsprung Russell (HR)
diagram is actually a spectral type magnitude diagram.) In the color
magnitude diagram the absolute magnitudes of the stars are plotted as the
ordinate and the colors - usually the B - V colors - as the abscissa. For
nearby stars (E(B — V) ~ 0) for which we can measure trigonometric
parallaxes, we obtain Fig. 1.2. We find that most stars cluster along a line,
the so-called main sequence. These stars are also called dwarf stars. We
also find a few stars which are intrinsically much fainter than main
sequence stars. These stars are called white dwarfs in order to distinguish
them from the 'dwarfs' and also because the first stars discovered in this
class were rather bluish or white. Since then, some faint stars with rather
reddish colors have been discovered. The name 'white dwarfs' is therefore
not always appropriate, but it is nevertheless used for all faint stars of this
class in order to distinguish them from the main sequence dwarfs. Since
we know several of these faint stars in our neighborhood in spite of the
 Color magnitude diagrams 5
difficulty of discovering them, because of their faintness, we must con-
clude that they are rather frequent, but at larger distances we cannot
detect them.
We also see a few stars in our neighborhood which are brighter than
main sequence stars, because they are much larger. These stars are
therefore called giants.

1.1.6 Galactic or open clusters

There is of course no reason why we should only compare the
intrinsic brightnesses of stars at a distance of 10 pc; we could just as well
compare them at any other distance - even an unknown distance -

-as
0
i
i

•
8
•

• •
3

f
• a
1 •• • •

s
•

6
• f I :

•
8 —
4
_

10

II

18
*
•

13
1
If

oz
•

as
i •-+-
B-V
Fig. 1.2. In the color magnitude diagram the absolute magnitudes for nearby stars with
distances known from trigonometric parallaxes are plotted as a function of their colors.
Most of the stars fall along a sequence called the main sequence. A few stars are much
fainter than the main sequence stars also called dwarfs. These very faint stars are called
white dwarfs. We also see some stars brighter than the main sequence stars. These are
called giants. From Arp (1958).
6 Introduction
provided only that we are sure that the stars are all at the same distance.
Such groups of stars are seen in the so-called star clusters. In Fig. 1.3 we
show the double star cluster h and ^Persei. The Pleiades star cluster can be
seen with the naked eye but is much clearer with a pair of binoculars.
These stars are clumped together in the sky and obviously belong together,
though some background stars are mixed in with true cluster stars. True
cluster stars can be distinguished by their space motion - they must all have
approximately the same velocity, because otherwise they would not have
stayed together for any length of time. If stars are within a cluster and have
the same velocities in direction and speed, we can be quite certain that they
are all at the same distance. We can plot color magnitude diagrams for
these stars, but we have to plot apparent magnitudes because we do not
know their absolute magnitudes. If these stars behave the same way as
nearby stars, we would still expect the same kind of diagram because all
the magnitudes are fainter by the same constant value, namely,

•
• ••
•
i
•

i
•
• •* •>* •
•4 -
» •
•
°A * *
W
•• • .
• ••:• i
•
•
• *
IP,
k •A

8^•
*

-•
• • • • .

* *«
• . . . . »* \*

•
•
. ^

•-

•
**
• ; > ,

• •• •
f . % •
• •
* • ** •
* t ! k* . • •

• ».

•
** 8;
• * \ *

•
. *

• » •
•
•

. • • • •

•• •

Fig. 1.3. A photograph of the double star cluster h and % Persei in the constellation of
Perseus. From Burnham (1978a).
 Color magnitude diagrams
mVo — My = 5 log d — 5, where d is the same for all stars. In Figs. 1.4 and
1.5 we show the color magnitude diagrams for the h and % Persei clusters
and for another star cluster, the Praesepe cluster. We can clearly identify
the main sequences in these diagrams. In the h and % Persei clusters we
1 1 1 1 1 I
-8
tGNII'UDE

-6
# •* •• *
-4 •

Z
-2 -
UJ
H •• •
0 •
•
BSOl

*••• • [ DOUBLE CLUSTER J

2
<

4 i i
-0.4 0 OA OB 12 16
COLOR INDEX

Fig. 1.4. The color magnitude diagram for h and % Persei star cluster. A distance
modulus of mVo - M v = 11.8 was assumed and rav - mV() = 1.6. From Burnham
(1978b).

1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6

B-V
Fig. 1.5. The color apparent magnitude (ra v = V) diagram for the stars in the open
cluster Praesepe. The stars above the main sequence are probably binaries, and
therefore appear brighter. From Arp (1958).
8 Introduction
find a few stars which are still brighter than the giants as compared to the
main sequence stars. These very bright stars are called the supergiants.
The giants and supergiants do not form a very tight sequence as do the
main sequence stars. For a given (B — V) o they show a much larger spread
in magnitudes than we find for the main sequence.

1.1.7 Globular clusters

For star clusters similar to those discussed so far which are located
in the galactic plane - the so-called open clusters or galactic clusters - we
find color magnitude diagrams which look rather similar. There is,
however, another group of clusters, the so-called globular clusters. These
contain many more stars than open clusters. Many of these globular
clusters lie high above the galactic plane. These clusters are characterized
by very different color magnitude diagrams. In Fig. 1.6 we show a

• •
t • * * •
• • * *
* • « • *

... ts r
••• * • • •- v * .
.*. * *
• ***\ * .*.
.4 H : • *vV;i
• *

i '•

• : - • .
4* "**• ** • *

•, •••.:.-.
* :. + • ••
• • • • *• • * * * ' * - ^
. . - . ^ ' • ;
• *• * - • * •

. . • . - ^ . . -
* • •

: • 1
• « • i
• . * ^
\ . * . ..^
• • • • • • •

• •• * • / ' • • %
• . • •• .% • *
*• • •
•
• • •
: ; • i
\y * • * •
• * • * * •

i •
* •
* * * •

% • *

• * • • • • •
• *

/g. 7.6. A photograph of the globular cluster 47 Tucanae. From Burnham (1978c).
 Color magnitude diagrams 9
photograph of the globular cluster NGC 104, also called 47 Tucanae or 47
Tuc and in Figs. 1.7 and 1.8 the color magnitude diagrams for 47 Tuc and
the globular cluster, called M92, are shown. The globular clusters are all
very distant, so all the stars are rather faint. These observations were made
only recently and go to very faint magnitudes in comparison for instance
with Fig. 1.4. The heavily populated main sequence is clearly recogniz-
able, but only for M v > 4 in M92 and for m v = V > 17 in 47 Tuc. In many
globular cluster diagrams we find two branches which go almost horizon-
tally through the diagram. The lower branch is only short, while the upper
horizontal branch may extend to quite blue colors and may even turn
downward at the blue end (see Fig. 1.8). This upper, extended, horizontal
branch is actually called the horizontal branch. The lower, stubby, nearly
horizontal branch is called the subgiant branch because it is brighter than

12 Asymptotic .
giant branch • . . >***

14 Horizontal . .Ctflf • J
branch .#
• ^

Red giants
16
Subgiants ...,ri

18

20

47 TUC
22

24

0.2 0.6 1.0 1.4 1.8

B-V
Fig. 1.7. The color apparent magnitude diagram for 47 Tucanae. The new
measurements go down to stars as faint as 23rd magnitude, though for the faint stars the
scatter becomes large. The main sequence and the giant and subgiant branches are
surprisingly sharp, showing that there are very few or no binaries in this globular cluster.
The red stub of the horizontal branch is seen at V ~ 14 and B - V ~ 0.8. The asymptotic
giant branch (see Chapter 14) is seen above the horizontal branch. From Hesser et al.
(1987).
10 Introduction
the main sequence but in comparison with the main sequence stars of
similar B — V colors not quite as bright as the giant sequence. In addition,
we see on the red side an almost vertical sequence. This sequence is called
the red giant branch.
One of the main aims of this book is to understand why the color
magnitude diagrams of these two types of cluster, galactic or open clusters
and globular clusters, look so different. In fact, the difference in appear-
ance is mainly due to differences in the ages of the clusters.

Fig. 1.8. The color absolute magnitude diagram for the globular cluster M92 (cluster 92
in the Messier catalog of nebulous objects). The new observations for M92, like those
for 47 Tuc, go to very faint magnitudes. For M92 the main sequence is now clearly
recognizable. In addition the subgiant, red giant and horizontal branches are clearly
seen. Also seen is the so-called asymptotic branch, for (B — V)o ~ 0.6 above the
horizontal branch. The thin lines shown are the theoretical isochrones, i.e. the location
where stars are expected to be seen at a given time. From Hesser et al. (1987).
 Stellar luminosities 11
1.2 Stellar luminosities
So far we have talked only about the brightnesses of stars as
observed in certain wavelength bands. For the study of stellar structures it
is more important to study the total amount of energy radiated by the star
per unit of time. Hot stars emit most of their energy at ultraviolet
wavelengths, but ultraviolet radiation is totally absorbed in the Earth's
atmosphere and can therefore be observed only from satellites. In Fig. 1.9

10 -
I -^

9 -

j
8 -

N.
Tiff = 20 000 K
= 4.0
BV = -0.2

O\
7 -
|| reff = 5770 K ^
M logs = 4.44
6 - A/1 I' B V = 0.62

-
5 -

4 -

3 -

2 -
912 A /
5000 A 6000 A
/ 1 II 1 1
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
logX

Fig. 1.9. The energy distribution for a star with B — V = — 0.2. Most of the energy is
emitted in the ultraviolet which cannot be observed from ground but only from
satellites. Some energy is emitted at X < 912 A. These short wavelengths are strongly
absorbed by interstellar gas. The energy distribution for a star with B — V = 0.62 is also
shown. For such stars relatively little energy is emitted in the invisible ultraviolet and
infrared spectral regions.
12 Introduction
we show the overall energy distribution of a star with (B - V) o = -0.2, a
very blue star. The wavelength range observed through the V filter is
indicated. For such hot stars (and there are even hotter ones), a fairly large
fraction of energy is emitted in the wavelength region X < 912 A, which is
observable only for a very few nearby stars in favorable positions in the sky
because radiation at such short wavelengths is generally absorbed by the
interstellar medium. The energy distribution in this wavelength region has
not yet been well measured for any hot, i.e. very blue, main sequence star.
The energy distribution shown in Fig. 1.9 is obtained from theoretical
calculations.
In the same diagram we also show the energy distribution for a solar type
star. It has its maximum close to the center of the V band. For such stars a
relatively small amount of energy is emitted in the ultraviolet and infrared.
In Fig. 1.10 we show the energy distribution for an M4 giant with
(B — V)o =1.5. For such a star most of the energy is emitted at infrared
wavelengths, which can be observed from the ground at certain 'windows',
i.e., at certain wavelengths in which the Earth's atmosphere is reasonably
transparent, but only with special infrared receivers. Our eyes are not
sensitive to these wavelengths.
The total amount of energy emitted per second by a star is called its
luminosity L. It is measured by the so-called bolometric magnitudes, m bol
or M bol . Again, we have
M bol (l) - Mbol(2) = -2.5(logL(l) - logL(2)) (1.4)

- 5

3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10 000

Fig. 1.10. The energy distribution for an M4 giant with B - V = 1.5. Most of the energy
is emitted at infrared wavelengths. Notice the change of scale at 5500 A. From Straizys
and Sviderskiene (1972).
 Effective temperatures of stars 13
where (1) refers to star 1 and (2) to star 2. The differences between
bolometric and visual magnitudes are called the bolometric corrections
BC,
(1.5)
Many astronomers use a different sign in equation (1.5). With the + sign
the BC then have to be negative. In any case, bolometric magnitudes are
generally smaller than the visual magnitudes because there is more energy
in all wavelengths than in a special wavelength band. Equation (1.4) does
not completely define the bolometric magnitudes unless we define the
bolometric magnitude of star 1. Unfortunately, the zero point is not
determined in the same way for the bolometric magnitudes. The apparent
bolometric magnitude for Vega is not zero!
As we saw above, hot stars emit a large amount of energy in the invisible
ultraviolet. They have large bolometric corrections. The cool red stars
have a large amount of energy in the infrared and they also have large
bolometric corrections. The bolometric corrections have a minimum for
stars with (B — V) o — 0.35. For main sequence stars with (B — V)o = 0.35
the bolometric corrections are defined to be zero. With this definition the
bolometric magnitude scale is fixed. Using equation 1.5, we find for the
sun that £C(sun) = 0.07 and for Vega that 5C(Vega) « 0.3. Knowing the
distance of the sun we find M Vo = 4.82 and M b o l o = 4.75.

1.3 Effective temperatures of stars

If we have determined the angular radius of a star, as discussed in
Volume 1 of this series, we can determine the amount of energy leaving the
stellar surface per cm2 s into all directions, called the surface flux, JIF. We
have

4JIR2JIF=L or JZF = L
9 (1.6)

The luminosity of a star can be measured from the flux jtf arriving above
the Earth's atmosphere per cm2 s. The total luminosity is given by jr/times
the surface of the sphere with radius d around the star, where d is the
distance of the star,
L = 7tf'4jtd2 (1.7)
With equation (1.6) we find
L = jtf- And2 = JIF-AJIR2 (1.8)
14 Introduction
which yields

(1-9)

where Rid is the angular radius of the star if the angle is measured in
radians. The angular radius can be measured for some very bright and
several large nearby stars (see Volume 1).
We know that for an ideal light source in complete thermodynamic
equilibrium (i.e., for a black body; see Volume 1), the amount of energy
emitted per cm2 s into all directions is
jrF(black body) = oT4 (1.10)
where T is the temperature of the black body and a is the Stefan-
Boltzmann constant, a = 5.67 x 10~5 erg deg~4 cm"2 s"1. If we compare
the stellar surface flux JIF with the radiation of a black body we can define
the so-called effective temperature Teff of the star by writing
jrF(star) = oT4eff (1.11)
Teff is then a measure of the surface flux of the star. It is the temperature
a black body would need to have in order to radiate the same amount of
energy per cm2 s as the star. In Volume 2 we also saw that Teff is the
temperature in the atmosphere of the star at a depth f = §, where the
optical depth r is defined as
df= Kdt (1.12)
and where K is an average absorption coefficient, averaged over all
wavelengths with the Rosseland weighting function (see Chapter 8 of
Volume 2). For the sun f = f corresponds to a depth of about 100 km
below the Sun's 'surface'.
For the sun we find jifo = 1.38 x 106 erg cm"2 s"1 and m b o i o =
-26.85. For JIFQ we derive 7iF(sun) = 6.3 x 1010 erg cm"2 s"1 and
Teff(sun) = 5800 K.

1.4 Stellar masses

In Volume 1 we saw that stellar masses can be determined for
binary stars. Using the fact that such binary systems are in stable orbits
around each other, so that at any moment the gravitational and centrifugal
forces are in equilibrium, we can derive that
 Stellar masses 15
P2 An2 1
(a1 + a2)3~~G~(M1 + M2) ' '

Here a1 and a2 are the semi-major axes of the orbits of stars 1 and 2 around
their center of gravity (see Fig. 1.11); M1 and M2 are the masses of stars 1
and 2; P is the orbital period; G is the gravitational constant. In order to
determine both masses we need to measure the ratio of the orbital
velocities v of both stars or the ratio of the semi-major axes. We have

^l = Ml or ^ = Ml (! 14 )
v2 M1 a2 M1

The orbital velocities can be determined from the Doppler shifts of

spectral lines. For a light source moving away from us, the wavelengths X
of the light are shifted by

(115)
T-"
X c
where c is the velocity of light. The radial velocity vr is the component of
the velocity along the line of sight (see Fig. 1.12). For spectral lines of

Star 2 (£« — •• • +*—-—f)) Star 1

Fig. 1.11. For binary stars both companions orbit the center of gravity. The semi-major
axis for star 1 is al9 that of star 2 is a2.

vr (Radial velocity)

-• v (True velocity)

vp (Proper motion)

Observer

Fig. 1.12. The Doppler shift measures the velocity component along the line of sight,
the so-called radial velocity.
16 Introduction
Table 1.1. Data for main sequence stars

(B - V)o My log L/LQ Teff M/Mo

-0.33 -5.7 42 000 (40)

-0.32 -5.0 -8.3 5.2 37 000 23
-0.30 -4.0 -6.8 4.6 30 500 16
-0.25 -2.9 -5.2 4.0 24 000 10
-0.20 -1.5 -4.3 3.6 17 700 7
-0.15 -0.9 -2.1 2.7 14 000 4.5
-0.10 -0.3 -0.9 2.2 11800 3.6
-0.05 0.3 -0.0 1.9 10 500 3.1
0.00 0.9 0.7 1.6 9500 2.7
0.10 1.5 1.5 1.3 8500 2.3
0.20 2.2 2.2 1.0 7900 1.9
0.30 2.7 2.7 0.8 7350 1.6
0.40 3.3 3.3 0.6 6800 1.4
0.50 3.9 3.9 0.3 6300 1.25
0.60 4.5 4.4 0.1 5900 1.03
0.70 5.2 5.1 -0.1 5540 0.91
0.80 5.8 5.6 -0.3 5330 0.83
0.90 6.3 6.0 -0.5 5090 0.77
1.00 6.7 6.3 -0.6 4840 0.72
1.10 7.2 6.6 -0.7 4590 0.67
1.20 7.5 6.9 -0.8 4350 0.62
1.30 7.9 7.1 -0.9 4100 0.56
1.40 8.8 7.5 -1.1 3850 0.50

known laboratory wavelengths (see Section 1.6), the shifts AA can be

measured and thus the radial velocity can be measured. From the radial
velocities we can derive the orbital velocities only if we know the
inclination of the orbital plane with respect to the line of sight. This
inclination, described by the angle i between the normal to the orbital
plane and the line of sight, can be determined for eclipsing binaries, where
the angle / must be close to 90° (or we would not see eclipses), and for
visual binaries when the apparent orbit of one star around the other can be
measured.
In Table 1.1 we have collected B - V colors, absolute magnitudes,
luminosities, effective temperatures and masses as observed for main
sequence stars.

1.5 The mass-luminosity relation

Using the data of Table 1.1, the relation between stellar luminosit-
ies and stellar masses is plotted in Fig. 1.13. We know that most stars form
 Mass-luminosity relation 17
a one-dimensional manifold, as indicated by their clustering along the
main sequence in the HR diagram. The structure of these stars must be
determined by one parameter. The same fact is shown in Fig. 1.13. For a
given mass the luminosity is generally nearly the same. The exceptions are
the white dwarfs. Nearly all other stars follow the so-called mass-
luminosity relation. The surprising fact is that most giants (except the red
giants) and supergiants also follow nearly the same mass-luminosity
relation as seen for main sequence stars.
In the double logarithmic plot of Fig. 1.13 the points for the stars almost
follow a straight line, which means they follow a relation

-1

log M/MQ
Fig. 1.13. The relation between stellar luminosities and stellar masses for binaries with
well determined masses. The different symbols refer to different kinds of binaries. From
Popper (1980).
18 Introduction
L^M? (1.16)
where /3 ~ 3.8 on average.

1.6 Spectral classification

If the stellar energy distribution is measured in very small wave-
length bands, AX < 1 A, we obtain stellar spectra. They show many narrow
wavelength bands with reduced fluxes, the so-called spectral lines. These
are due to absorption by atoms and ions in the surface layers of the star,
called the stellar atmosphere. Each ion or atom absorbs a characteristic set
of lines unique to that particle. From the observed line systems the
absorbing particles and elements can be identified, and the element
abundances can be determined (see Volume 2). The stellar spectra can be
arranged in a sequence according to the lines that are seen. This spectral
sequence coincides with the B — V color sequence. The spectra showing
the strongest hydrogen lines are called AO stars. These are stars like Vega
and have B — V — 0. Stars somewhat more blue, i.e. 0 > B — V > 0.2 are
called B stars. The B stars show somewhat weaker hydrogen lines but also
show weak helium lines. Even smaller B — V values are found for the so-
called O stars. They have weak hydrogen lines, weaker than the B stars,
also weak lines of helium, but also ionized helium lines. They are the
hottest stars. The O and B stars are called early type stars, because they are
at the top of the spectral sequence. Within each spectral class there are
subclasses, for instance, BO, Bl, . . ., B9. The BO, Bl, B2, B3 stars are
called early B stars; B7, B8, B9 are late B stars. Stars with
0 ^ B - V ^ 0.29 are A stars. Vega is an AO star, i.e. an early A star. In
addition to the strong hydrogen lines, very weak lines of heavy element
ions are seen.
Stars with 0.3 < B - V ^ 0.58 are called F stars. Their hydrogen lines
are weaker than those for the A stars. Many lines of heavy element ions are
seen and these are much stronger than in A stars. For 0.6<B — V < 1 . 0
we find the so-called G stars. The Sun is a G2 star. The hydrogen lines
become still weaker for these stars, while the lines of heavy element ions
increase in strength. Lines of heavy atoms become visible. For
1 . 0 < B - V < 1 . 4 w e find the so-called K stars with weaker lines of heavy
ions but increasing line strength for the atomic lines. Their hydrogen lines
are very weak. For the red M stars lines of heavy atoms are mainly seen in
addition to the molecular bands. Fig. 1.14 shows the sequence of stellar
spectra.
 Mass-luminosity relation 19

W Lac 03
T SCO 80
7/ Or/ 87
y On BB
Tf Aur 83
85
& Per 88
ccPeg 8$

S 3389

Fig. 1.14. The sequence of stellar spectra. From Unsold (1955).

20 Introduction
1.7 The chemical composition of stars
What are stars made of? In the preceding section we saw that in
stellar spectra we see absorption lines whose wavelengths agree with those
observed in the laboratory for hydrogen, helium, and many other heavier
elements. We therefore know that all these elements must be present in
the stars. The question is, what are the relative abundances of these
elements? In Volume 2 we discussed how the abundances can be deter-
mined. We suspect that the strength of the lines is an indication of the
abundance of the corresponding element. It is true that the abundances
can be determined from line strengths, but the line strengths also depend
on temperatures, pressure and turbulence in the stellar atmospheres,
which therefore have to be determined together with the abundances. It
turns out that hydrogen, for which we see the strongest lines in the A, B
and F stars, is the most abundant element in stars. Ninety-one per cent of
all heavy particles are hydrogen atoms or ions. About 9 per cent are helium
atoms or ions. Helium is very abundant even though we see only weak
helium or helium ion lines in the B and O stars. This is due to the special
structure of the energy level diagram of helium. It seems then that there is
nothing left for the heavier elements which we also see. Indeed the
abundance of all the heavier elements together by number of particles is
only about 0.1 per cent.
The abundance ratios are different if we ask about the fraction by mass.
The helium nucleus is four times as massive as hydrogen. The heavier
nuclei are, of course, even more massive. Carbon has an atomic weight of
12, nitrogen 14, oxygen 16, etc. Iron has an atomic weight of 56. Therefore
by mass hydrogen constitutes only about 70 per cent and helium 28 per
cent. The mass fraction of hydrogen is usually designated by X and that of
helium by Y. We therefore generally have ^ = 0 . 7 and Y = 0.28. The
heavier elements together contribute about 2 per cent to the mass. Their
abundance by mass fraction is designated by Z, where Z — 0.02 for the
sun. Even though the heavy elements are very rare in stars it turns out that
they are very important for temperature stratification inside the stars, as
we shall see.
 Hydrostatic equilibrium

2.1 The hydrostatic equilibrium equation

What information can we use to determine the interior structure of

the stars? All we see is a faint dot of light from which we have to deduce
everything. We saw in Volume 2 that the light we receive from main
sequence stars comes from a surface layer which has a thickness of the
order of 100 to 1000 km, while the radii of main sequence stars are of the
order of 105 to 107 km. Any light emitted in the interior of the stars is
absorbed and re-emitted in the star, very often before it gets close enough
to the surface to escape without being absorbed again. For the sun it
actually takes a photon 107 years to get from the interior to the surface,
even though for a radius of 700 000 km a photon would need only
2.5 seconds to get out in a straight line. There is only one kind of radiation
that can pass straight through the stars - these are the neutrinos whose
absorption cross-sections are so small that the chances of being absorbed
on the way out are essentially zero. Of course, the same property makes it
very difficult to observe them because they hardly interact with any
material on Earth either. We shall return to this problem later. Except for
neutrinos we have no radiation telling us directly about the stellar interior.
We have, however, a few basic observations which can inform us indirectly
about stellar structure.
For most stars, we observe that neither their brightness nor their color
changes measurably in centuries. This basic observation tells us essentially
everything about the stellar interior. If the color does not change it tells us
that the surface temperature, or Teff, does not change. If the light output,
i.e. the luminosity L = 4jzR2oTlff, does not change, we know that the
radius R remains constant for constant TQff.
These two facts that 7\>(i and R do not change in time permit us to
determine the whole interior structure of the star, as we shall see. Let us
first look at the constant radius.
21
22 Hydrostatic equilibrium
We know that the large interior mass of the star exhibits a large
gravitational force on the external layers, trying to pull them inwards. If
these layers do not fall inwards there must be an opposing force preventing
them from doing so. This force apparently is the same one which prevents
the Earth's atmosphere from collapsing, namely the pressure force. In the
following we consider the forces working on a column of cross-section
1 cm2 and of height Ah (see Fig. 2.1). In the direction of decreasing height
h, i.e. inwards, we have to consider the gravitational force Fg = mg, with g
being the gravitational acceleration and m being the mass in the volume
under consideration. The mass m equals pAV, where p is the density and
AV is the volume element which for a cross-section of 1 cm2 is
A/z x 1 cm2 = Ah cm3. The gravitational force Fg is then
= pgAh (2.1)
In addition, we have to consider the pressure at the height h + A/z, i.e.
P{h + A/z), which is isotropic, but here we consider only the forces on the
given volume of gas on which the gas pressure at the height h + Ah exerts a
downward push. This downward force is P(h + Ah). In the opposite
direction, pushing upwards from the bottom, is only the pressure at height
/z, i.e. P(h). Since the volume of gas remains stationary, the opposing
forces must be in equilibrium, which means
P(h) = pgAh + P(h + Ah) (2.2)

or
(P(h + Ah) - P(h))/Ah = -pg (2.3)

P(h + A/?)

P(h)

Fig. 2.1. In hydrostatic equilibrium the pressure force dP/dh and the gravitational force
Fg working on a volume of gas must balance.
 Hydrostatic equilibrium equation 23
In the limit A ^ O w e have
dP/dh = -pg or grad P= -pg (2.4)
Equation (2.4) is called the hydrostatic equilibrium equation. It expresses
the equilibrium between gravitational and pressure forces.
For spherical symmetry we have dP/dr = —pg.
In the general case other forces may also have to be considered, for
instance centrifugal forces for rotating stars or electromagnetic forces in
magnetic stars.
We can easily estimate that centrifugal forces have to be taken into
account in the surface layers of stars with equatorial velocities of several
hundred kms" 1 as observed for many hot stars, i.e. for stars with
Teff > 8000 K. In deeper layers (smaller radii) the centrifugal forces
decrease for rigid body rotation. It appears in this case that they do not
influence markedly the overall structure of stars.
Magnetic forces may become important for magnetic fields of several
thousand gauss as observed in the magnetic peculiar stars, i.e. stars with
spectral types Ap or Bp (see Volume 1). For high density stars like white
dwarfs or neutron stars only much higher field strengths are of any
importance. Magnetic forces are, however, zero for a pure dipole field for
which curl H = 0. Only for deviations from a dipole field may magnetic
forces become non-negligible.
In the following discussion we will consider only gravitational and gas
pressure forces unless we specifically mention other forces. This will be
adequate for most stars, except for very massive and very luminous stars,
for which radiation pressure becomes very important.
From the fact that the vast majority of stars do not shrink or expand we
concluded that hydrostatic equilibrium must hold in the stars, as it does in
the Earth's atmosphere. Suppose hydrostatic equilibrium did not strictly
hold - how fast should we see any effect of the imbalance between pressure
and gravitational forces? Maybe it would take so long for the star to change
its size that we would not be able to see it. Suppose the equilibrium
between pressure and gravitational forces were violated by 10 per cent, so
that 10 per cent of the gravitational force is not balanced by the pressure
force. This means it would actually be
dP
— =-gp +

Ten per cent of the gravitational force could then pull the material
inwards. For a gravitational acceleration of g o = 2.7 x 104 cm s~2 the net
24 Hydrostatic equilibrium
acceleration would then be g(net) = 2.7 x 103 cms" 2 . After 1000 seconds,
or roughly 15 minutes, the velocity of the material would be
100 s
g(net) df = 2.7 x 106 cm s"1 = 27 km s"1.

The path length s, which the matter would have fallen after 1000 seconds,
would be s = ^g(net)^2 = 1.35 x 109 cm, or 13 500 km. This is a change of
nearly 2 per cent of a solar radius within 15 minutes. Such a radius change
would become visible very soon. Since we do not see any radius change of
most stars after centuries of observation we can be sure that hydrostatic
equilibrium must be satisfied to a very high degree of accuracy.

2.2 Consequences of hydrostatic equilibrium

In this section we shall see the conclusions we can draw from the
fact that stars must be in hydrostatic equilibrium. First, we will estimate
the gas pressure Pg in the center of the sun.
The hydrostatic equation tells us that the pressure in the center of the
sun must balance the weight of the overlying material, which is given by
the weight of the column of cross-section 1 cm2 and height 7? (see Fig. 2.2).
With an average density of p = 1 g cm" 3 this weight is
weight = Pg(center) = Pgc ~ pgR (2.5)

Fig. 2.2. In hydrostatic equilibrium the pressure in the center of the star working on
1 cm2 must balance the weight of the overlying column of cross-section 1 cm2containing
amass m = pR.
 Virial theorem 25
or Pgc « 4 x 10 dyn cm" , if we use go = 2go = 2 x 2.7 x 10* cm s" 2
15 2

which is twice the gravitational acceleration at the solar surface. This

indicates a pressure which is at least a billion times greater than that in the
Earth's atmosphere.
We now use the equation of state for an ideal gas to obtain an estimate
for the central temperature, Tc, of the sun. The equation of state for an
ideal gas gives us the relation between Pg, T and p, namely
Pg = RgTplfi (2.6)
where Rg is the gas constant, p the density and ju the average atomic
weight. Rg = 8.315 x 10 7 [cgs]. Using this equation for the center and
making the rough estimate that the central density is about twice the
average density, we derive from the central pressure Pgc the temperature
in the center Tc = 1.4 X 107 K, where we have used^ = 0.6 in the center
where the material is completely ionized.
Sophisticated model calculations yield Tasini) = 1.5 x 10 7 K. Those
same model calculations give Pgc = 1017 dyn cm" 2 for the sun, i.e. more
than one power of 10 larger than we estimated. The excellent agreement
for the central temperatures is therefore somewhat accidental. Our
estimate of the central pressure was too low because we used an average
gravitational acceleration, which was not the appropriate value. A larger
value would have been better. Since we also used a value that was far too
low for the central density in estimating the temperature, the errors
cancelled. (You might call this the principle of consistent sloppiness which
still gives you good results. You have to do it right though!)
The main point is that we can derive the value for the central temperature
by using only the equation of hydrostatic equilibrium. We have not yet said
anything about energy generation or energy transport. We have only used
the observed radius of the sun, which is about 700000 km, and the mass
which is 2 x 1033 g.
The second point is the fact that the central temperatures may be high
enough to make nuclear reactions possible.

2.3 Relation between thermal and gravitational energy:

the virial theorem
2.3.1 Thermal energy
We saw in the last section that for a given mass M and radius R a
certain temperature in the interior is required by hydrostatic equilibrium.
If the temperature were lower the pressure would not be high enough to
26 Hydrostatic equilibrium
balance the gravitational forces and the star would collapse. If the
temperature were higher the pressure would be too great and the star
would expand. With the temperature in the star being governed by the
hydrostatic equilibrium condition we can compute the thermal energy in
the star, if M and R are given. The gravitational energy released during the
formation of the star can also be calculated. It is instructive to study the
relation between thermal and gravitational energy of a star in hydrostatic
equilibrium.
Thermal energy is contained in the gas in the form of kinetic energy
£kin = \kT per particle, where k = 1.38 x 10"16 erg per degree is the
Boltzmann constant.
In addition, energy has to be supplied to ionize the material, which is
essentially completely ionized for temperatures of several million degrees.
It can, however, easily be estimated that the needed ionization energy is
much less than the kinetic energy.
The thermal energy per particle is then given by Ekin = \mv2. For three
degrees of freedom (i.e. motion in three dimensions) this is

where m = jumH is the average mass of the particles in the gas and m H is the
mass of the hydrogen atom. With n = pint = the number of particles per
cm 3 we find for the thermal kinetic energy per cm 3

thermal = " * \kT (2.8)

For each mass shell at distance r from the center and volume dV = Aitr 2 dr
it is

(2.9)
and the total energy for the whole star comes out to be

thermal = T | *T •* •W dr (2.10)
z
Jo
Making use of the relation for the gas pressure
Pg = nkT
we can express the thermal energy as

^ ^ r (2.11)
 Virial theorem 27
The pressure Pg can be determined from integration of the hydrostatic
equation

dr

where Mr is the mass inside of the sphere with radius r and G is the
gravitational constant.
We multiply equation (2.12) by Aitr3 and integrate by parts from r — 0 to
r = R and obtain

, iR GMr A 3* iR GMr A 2 J ^ ^,
3
dr=- p —-^ 4jrr dr = -\ p - ^ ^ d r (2.13)
o & Jo rz Jo r
Integration of the left-hand side by parts gives
[R CR
[Pg •4jzr3]§ - 3Pg - Aiir2 dr = - 3Pg •W 2
dr (2.14)
Jo Jo

The first term on the left-hand side equals zero because at r = /?, i.e. at the
surface of the star, the pressure Pg = 0, and r 3 = 0 for r = 0. Equation
(2.13) then reads

R
3PAjtr2 dr = - T p ^ - r
Anr2 dr (2.15)
o Jo r
Comparing this with equation (2.11) we see that the left-hand side is
twice the thermal energy. We thus find that

-iR ~GMrAm2dr (2.16)

This relation follows quite generally from the hydrostatic equation without
our knowing what Pg(r), p(r), and Mr(r) are.

2.3.2 Gravitational energy

For the interpretation of the right-hand side of equation (2.15) let
us now look at the gravitational energy release during the formation of a
star. Considering a starting mass Mr with a radius r at the place of star
28 Hydrostatic equilibrium
formation and a mass element Am = pAjxr2 dr falling on Mr from infinity
down to the radius r (see Fig. 2.3) the gravitational energy release is

r
= force ds

which means with the gravitational acceleration g(s) = GMr/s2

A£ G = g(s) Am ds
J oo

[r GMr A 2 , ,
= —^— p4jir dr ds
Joo S

= I
f GMr-I]r 2.
p4jrrdr
.

r (2.17)

Integration over all mass elements building up the star yields

2
dr (2.18)

Am = p 4nr2dr
^Am = p 4irr26r
/

Fig. 2.3. A mass element Am = pAjtr2 dr falls down along the pass s from infinity to the
stellar core with mass Mr and radius r.
 Consequences of virial theorem 29
This expression for the gravitational energy release equals the right-
hand side of equation (2.15). In this way we derive the virial theorem,
namely

^thermal = ~\EG (2.19)

Since we did not make any approximation or assumptions (except for

^thermal = ^kin) > this equation holds exactly for any Pg(r)9 T(r), Mr(r) as long
as the star is in hydrostatic equilibrium, and as long as we have an ideal gas.

2.4 Consequences of the virial theorem

Equation (2.19) has very important consequences. For instance,
let us look at the early stages of stellar evolution. When the star starts to
contract it releases gravitational energy which is transformed into thermal
energy and the star heats up. It reaches hydrostatic equilibrium when one
half of the released gravitational energy is stored as thermal energy. If
more than one half of the gravitational energy were stored as thermal
energy the star would be too hot in the interior, the pressure would then be
too high, the pressure forces would be larger than the gravitational forces
and the star would have to expand again. Due to the expansion and the
consumption of gravitational energy the star would cool off until equilib-
rium is again reached. We see that before the star can contract further it
has to lose some of its thermal energy by radiation at the surface. If no
other energy source than gravitational energy is available, the tempera-
ture would decrease, the star can then continue to collapse, heating up in
the process. After each infinitesimal step of collapse the star has to wait
until it has radiated away half of the released gravitational energy before it
can continue to contract. With increasing gravitational energy release
during contraction, i.e. with decreasing radius thermal has to increase in
order to balance the increasing gravitational forces, the star continues to
heat up while the radiative energy loss at the surface tries to cool it off.
How long does it take the star to contract to its main sequence size?
Long enough to allow the excess heat to leave the star. If the heat transport
from the inside out is mainly by radiation then the star has to wait until the
radiation has found its way out from the interior. How long does this take?
We have seen, for instance, that the sun loses each second an amount of
energy given by its luminosity, L = 4 x lO^ergs" 1 . The total gravi-
tational energy release of the sun is given by (2.18). For a star with
constant density we derive with Mr = ^Jtr3p that
30 Hydrostatic equilibrium

dr = -p^G (2.20)

Inserting the values for the solar mass and solar radius MQ = 2 x 1033 g
and Rn = 7 x 1010 cm we find

00
7 x 1010
One half of this had to be lost by radiation while the Sun contracted.
Assuming that it was shining at the same rate as it is now, we find for the
contraction time
1.2 x 10,48
t= 1014s
4 x 1033
or 107 years. It must have taken the sun approximately 10 million years to
contract. This contraction time for stars is generally called the Kelvin-
Helmholtz time.
We can look at this problem from a very different angle.
The energy is liberated mainly in the stellar interior with the large mass
concentration. The energy then has to get out by means of photons
traveling to the surface. Let us look at the example of the sun, which has a
radius of 700000 km = 7 x 1010cm. If the photons could escape freely
they would reach the surface in 2.5 seconds. Actually, they are absorbed
after a very short distance, namely one photon mean free path Ap. The
absorbing electron stays in an excited energy level for about 10~8 seconds
and then re-emits the photon in an arbitrary direction. Soon the photon is
re-absorbed, then re-emitted again, etc., proceeding in a random walk
process until itfinallygets to the surface (see Fig. 2.4). How long does this
take on average? We first must know the mean free path. As a rough

Fig. 2.4. The photon proceeds in a random walk process to the stellar surface. After it
has traveled on average a distance As of one mean free path Ap it is absorbed and
reemitted in an arbitrary direction. After z absorption and reemission processes it has on
average traveled in a given direction x a distance Ax = Vz •Ap.
 Consequences ofvirial theorem 31
estimate we find the mean free path to be about 0.5 cm: The absorption
cross-section per particle is roughly 2 x 10~ 24cm2, which means in a
column with 1 cm2 cross-section, 5 x 1023 particles cover the whole
column cross-section of 1 cm2. The average density p for the Sun is
p ~ lgcrn" 3 . This means on average there are 1024 particles per cm3
(ju ~ 0.6 for ionized material). The projected cross-sections of a column of
length 0.5 cm of these particles is 1 cm2. This means that after the photon
has proceeded 0.5 cm it has certainly experienced one absorption process.
It can proceed just 0.5 cm before being absorbed, or the mean free path
A = 0.5 cm. The question then is: how often is the photon absorbed and re-
emitted before it reaches the surface?
In Fig. 2.4 we show a short stretch of a random walk process. Statistics
tell us that on average the distance Ax travelled in one direction is given by
Ax = Vz^p (2.21)
where z is the number of absorption and re-emission processes. The
photon reaches the surface for Ax = R = 7 x 1010 cm. In order for the
photon to escape we require
or Vz = R/Xp = 1.4 x 1011 or z-2xlO22
Each re-emission process takes about 10~8 s, which means with 2 x 1022
absorption and re-emission processes the travel time for the photon is
about 2 x 1014 s or roughly 107 years (1 year is about 3 x 107 seconds).
The photons need 107 years to reach the surface. This time determines
the contraction times of the stars. For more massive stars wefindthat MIR
is approximately constant. (Actually, it increases somewhat for increasing
mass.) With this we find pocR~2 and Ap oc p~l oc R2 if the average
absorption cross-section is approximately independent of temperature.
We would then find Vz oc R/Xp oc R'1 or the contraction time t oc z oc R~2.
If R ~ 10 RQ the contraction time would be 100 times shorter than that for
the sun. For more massive stars the contraction times are shorter because
the average density is lower and the photons can escape faster even though
the radii are larger.
 Thermal equilibrium

3.1 Definition and consequences of thermal equilibrium

As we discussed in Chapter 2, we cannot directly see the stellar

interior. We see only photons which are emitted very close to the surface
of the star and which therefore can tell us only about the surface layers.
But the mere fact that we see the star tells us that the star is losing energy
by means of radiation. On the other hand, we also see that apparent
magnitude, color, r eff , etc., of stars generally do not change in time. This
tells us that, in spite of losing energy at the surface, the stars do not cool
off. The stars must be in so-called thermal equilibrium. If you have a cup of
coffee which loses energy by radiation, it cools unless you keep heating it.
If the star's temperature does not change in time, the surface layers must
be heated from below, which means that the same amount of energy must
be supplied to the surface layer each second as is taken out each second by
radiation.
If this were not the case, how soon would we expect to see any changes?
Could we expect to observe it? In other words, how fast would the stellar
atmosphere cool?
From the sun we receive photons emitted from a layer of about 100 km
thickness (see Volume 2). The gas pressure Pg in this layer is about 0.1 of
the pressure in the Earth's atmosphere, namely, Pg = nkT=105
dyn cm" 2 , where k = 1.38 x 10~16 erg deg" 1 is the Boltzmann constant, T
the temperature and n the number of particles per cm3. From this we
calculate that n is about 1017 particles per cm3. The number of particles
in a column of 1 cm2 cross-section and 100 km height is then
107cm x 1017cm~3 = 1024 particles per cm2. With an average tempera-
ture of 6000 K in the layer, the energy per particle is roughly
\kT= 1.5 x (1.38 x 10~16) x (6x 103) - 10~12 erg. In the column of
1 cm2 cross-section from which the photons escape we have an energy
content of E = 10" 12 x 1024 erg = 1012 erg (see Fig. 3.1). The energy loss
32
 Definition and consequence 33

per cm2 s is given by the surface flux JZF = JIFG ~ 6 x 1010 erg cm 2 s 1 .
This means that if the sun keeps shining at this rate the total energy content
of the atmosphere would be emitted in t ~ E/jtF— 15 seconds. We cer-
tainly should see changes in the temperature and radiation.
We can then conclude that the heating of the surface layers from below
must keep pace with the cooling. It must supply as much energy as is lost at
the surface. As the surface flux remains constant, so must the rate of
heating. The layer below the surface which supplies the heating cannot
change either; it cannot cool or it could not keep up the heat supply. This
means it also must be heated by a constant rate, and the same must hold for
the next deeper layer, etc. Of course, the deeper we go the longer is the
time after which we would see changes if they occurred, because it takes
the photons longer before they get to the surface. We would see changes in
the heat transport in the interior of the sun only after 107 years.
For most stars we do not see any changes in the surface flux. We must
therefore conclude that the energy loss at the surface is replaced from
below. In a plane parallel layer this means dFldz = 0, where z is the depth
below the surface (Fig. 3.2). In spherical geometry this means (see Fig.
3.3)
d dL
— (rjiF) = 0 or generally div F = 0 or — = 0 (3.1)
dr dr
if there is no energy generation; JIF always indicates the total energy flux
per cm2 s. Here r is the distance from the center and L is the luminosity of

n = number of particles per cm3

Fig. 3.1. For each 1 cm2 of surface area the amount of energy loss per second is JTF. This
energy is taken out of a column of the atmosphere with 1 cm2 cross-section and height h,
in which the number of particles is nh, and in which the total amount of energy is
E = ikTnh.
34 Thermal equilibrium
the star, i.e. L = 4jzR27tF, where R is the radius of the star; JtF is then
increasing with depth proportional to r~2. At the surface the energy
transport must generally be by radiation, i.e. JTF = JTFT, where Fr is the
radiative energy flux - otherwise, matter would have to escape from the
star (only a minute fraction of stellar energy loss is due to stellar winds). In
the deeper layers of the stars the energy transport can be by other means
also, i.e. F = Fr + • ••. As we saw in Volume 2 convective energy flux, Fc,
may have to be considered. The energy flux due to heat conduction, F cd ,
can become important only if the mean free path of ions and atoms
becomes very large. In special cases, such as in the white dwarfs, we have
to consider this possibility.

t, f A ,t ,t
h F F h F F

1 ( \ i

t, A , f,t ,t
F F F F F F

1
| 1
F F F F F F

1 t, t A ,t ,t ,t
F F F F F F
1

1 t, t A ,t ,t I

Fig. 3.2. In thermal equilibrium and plane parallel geometry the same amount of energy
flux must go through each horizontal layer in every depth.

Fig. 3.3. For spherical geometry the same amount of energy must go through each
spherical shell. The flux Fmust increase proportional to r~2.
 Radiative energy transport and temperature 35
Equation (3.1) is a necessary (and sufficient) condition if the tempera-
ture is to remain constant through the star provided there is no energy
source in a given layer. We call this the condition of thermal equilibrium.
In the special case when the energy transport is only by radiation we call it
radiative equilibrium. In this latter case equation (3.1) becomes

|;(^r) = 0 (3.2)

This is the equation for radiative equilibrium, provided that no energy

generation takes place. If energy is generated in a layer then this additional
energy has to be transported out so the layer is not heated by the additional
energy supply. The energy flux must therefore increase by the amount of
energy which is generated, i.e.
div 7iF = ep (3.3)
or for spherical symmetry

^ (3.4)
dr
where e is the energy generated per gram of material per second and p is
the density; Ep is the energy generated per cm3 s. Equation (3.3) deter-
mines the depth dependence of the energy flux. The thermal energy flux
determines the temperature stratification, as we saw in Volume 2. The
heat flow always goes in the direction of decreasing temperature. The
steeper the temperature gradient, the larger the heat flux. A prescribed
heat flow JIF can only be achieved with one temperature gradient. In the
following we shall briefly discuss the relation between the energy flux and
the temperature gradient, especially the relation between the radiative
energy flux JTFT and the temperature gradient.

3.2 Radiative energy transport and temperature gradient

In Volume 2 we derived the relation between the radiative energy
flux 7iFr and the temperature gradient dT/dr. As for any heat energy
transport we expect a larger heat flux for a steeper temperature gradient.
We also expect a smaller energy flux if the transport is made difficult. For
heat transport by radiation, i.e. by photons, heat transport becomes
difficult if the photons are frequently absorbed and re-emitted, in other
words if the mean free path for photons becomes very small. This, of
course, happens when the absorption coefficient becomes large.
36 Thermal equilibrium
An accurate derivation of the relation between radiative flux and
temperature gradient for the plane parallel case is given in Volume 2. In
Appendix A we summarize the derivation for the spherically symmetric
case in stellar interiors.
Qualitatively we can see the relation between radiative flux and tem-
perature gradient in deep layers when we consider the radiative energy
flowing through a cross-section of 1 cm2in a horizontal layer (see Fig. 3.4).
In a given layer at depth z0 we find photons propagating outwards which
have been emitted at different depths z but on average originated at a layer
where z = z0 + |Ap below depth z0 (if they were all propagated radially
outwards they would come from z = zo + Ap). The amount of energy
emitted at this layer is given by the Planck function 7iFu = JIB — oT4
(a = Stefan-Boltzmann constant). (For justification see Appendix A.)
The amount of energy propagating outwards is therefore given by
jtB(z0 + |Ap). Propagating downwards are the photons which on average
have been emitted at z = z0 - |Ap. The energy propagating downward
through lcm 2 at z0 is given by jiFd = JIB(ZQ — §Ap). The net energy
transport outward through 1 cm2 at z0, the JZFT(ZQ) is given by the
difference JZFU — jrFd. We now consider a linear depth dependence of the
Planck function B,
&B
B\ and

= B(.
Biz)
s
/

^Fr = Fd

B(z0 -!v

i i 1

Fig. 3.4. At depth z0 the photons going outwards originate on average at depth z 0 4- |A p .
Those going downwards come on average from a depth z0 - |A p . The net radiative flux
F r is given by Fr = Fu- Fd.
 Radiative energy transport and temperature 37
We then find

\ J I \ D I D UZ

How large is the mean free path of photons? Each atom has an
absorption cross-section #cat = K per atom (dimension cm2). If there are n
atoms per cm3 the total cross-section of these atoms is «K at = K per cm3,
abbreviated by Kcm (dimension cm" 1 ). If we consider a column of length /
for which the whole cross-section is covered by the projection of the
photon-absorbing atoms then the photon will certainly be absorbed when
passing through this column of length /. The length / is given by / = 1/Kcm
and is the mean free path Ap. Inserting Ap = 1/KCIT1 into equation (3.5) we
find

Fr = Fu-Fd = *J_^ = i^l (3.6)

where we have introduced the new variable r, called the optical depth. It is
dr = Kcm dz.
With B = OT4/JZ we find
3
Fr = - ^ T — ^ (3.7)
77 3 K cm dZ
which gives the relation between the temperature gradient and the radiat-
ive flux. (Fris considered to be positive when directed outwards.)
Equation (3.7) can be solved to give the temperature gradient for any
given value of FT. We find with d/dz = —(d/dr)
dT= JZFT 3 Kcm
(3.8)
dr a 16 T3
The total radiative energy transport through a spherical shell with radius r
is given by Lr = 4jtr2 •jzFr. We therefore can also write

= (39)
dr 4jtr216 oT3 K
' J

This determines the temperature stratification for a given radiative

energy transport. For radiative equilibrium we find of course Lr = L, the
luminosity at radius r, which means
dr L 3 Kcm
(3.10)
dr Aitr2 16 oT3
38 Thermal equilibrium
3.3 A first approximation for the mass-luminosity relation
It is quite instructive to see that with the help of the hydrostatic and
radiative heat transport equations we can already understand qualitatively
the observed mass-luminosity relation (see Chapter 1)
LocMm with 3<ra<4 (3.11)
even without any knowledge about the origin of the energy needed to
maintain L. The mere fact that most stars are stable tells us that such a
relation must exist. The argument goes as follows: generally we can say
that on average the density p must be proportional to the mass divided by
the volume of the star, i.e.

Hydrostatic equilibrium requires

dPg GMT
-p= -gp= ~^rP (3-13)
dr r
which can be roughly approximated by
Pg GMM M2
o r
~—o—Q Pg^—r (3.14)
R R2 R3 g
R4 K J

Making use of the equation of state Pg = RgTp/ju we find for the tempera-
tures
_ Pg M2R3 M .....
roc-^oc———oc — (3.15)
p R4 M R V }

Inserting this into equation (3.10) and solving for the luminosity, we derive
for radiative equilibrium, i.e. L = L r , that

L oc -R2T^ ^ — = -—^R 2 (3.16)

dr Kcm Kgp dr
Here we have replaced K per cm, Kcm, by K per gram of material, Kg, i. e. the
absorption coefficient for a column of length s = lip which contains 1 gram
of material. Since a column with 1 cm 2 cross-section and length 1 cm
contains p grams of material, Kcm must then be Kgp. The absorption
coefficient Kg is less dependent on pressure and density than K ^ because
one gram of material always contains nearly the same number of particles,
ft, which can absorb light. Changes of n can only be due to changing
 Energy transport by heat conduction 39
degrees of ionization. Therefore, it is often better to use Kg in these
discussions. Making here the rough approximation that Kg is always the
same, we find, using equations (3.12) and (3.15),

Loc—_ -R2 (3.17)

3 2 V J
R MR
where we have replaced dT/dr by —TJR. Equation (3.17) then yields
L*M3 (3.18)
This is the mass-luminosity relation corresponding to the observed
relation (3.11). Here we derived m = 3 if Kg is independent of Pg and T and
P — Pg. Our calculations tell us that the temperature in the interior is
determined by hydrostatic equilibrium as we saw earlier, and that this also
determines the luminosity. With the temperature at the surface being close
to zero the average temperature gradient dT/dr ~ — TJR is given. Once K
is known, the radiative heat transport determines how much energy is
transported to the surface, and this is of course the luminosity. As is seen
from equation (3.16) the larger the central temperature and the smaller
the K, i.e. the easier the heat transport, the larger will be the luminosity.

3.4 Energy transport by heat conduction

If in a given gas we have a temperature gradient, then particles
from the high temperature region with their high thermal energies and
high thermal velocities fly into the lower temperature region carrying
kinetic energy into it. At the same time lower energy particles with lower
velocities fly from the low temperature region into the higher temperature
gas, but these particles carry less energy into the higher temperature layers
than those moving in the opposite direction, the difference depending on
the temperature gradient. There is therefore a net energy transport from
the higher temperature gas to the lower temperature gas. The amount of
energy transport is directly proportional to the temperature gradient.
Therefore, we can say that the thermal motions of the particles lead to a
conductive energy flux JiFcd which is given by

^ c d = - ^ (3.19)
dr
where rj is the heat conduction coefficient. The negative sign indicates that
the heat flux goes in the direction of decreasing temperature.
40 Thermal equilibrium
The total heat flux is then
i 16 _ 3 d r dr
= — oTJ — - TJ — (3.20)
Kcm 3 dr dr
or
L 3 1
dr 3 \Kcm 16a T ) dr 3 U c m Khc
where Khc = ^oT3/rj.
This means we can express the conductive flux Fcd in analogy to the
radiative energy flux by means of

JiFcd=-—^oT 3^ (3.22)
Khc 3 dr
and the total flux JZF as
1 16 _ 3 dr
JZF= — — oT*— (3.23)
K 3 dr
with

K-=T~+;T (324)

We can thus take heat conduction into account by including it in the

definition of K which has to be calculated as the harmonic mean of the
radiative absorption coefficient Kcm and the 'conductive absorption coef-
ficient' Khc. If the heat conduction is large, i.e. if rj is large, then Khc is very
much smaller than Kcm and K is determined by heat conduction. If rj is small
then Khc is large and Khc can be neglected with respect to K~^. K is then
equal to Kcm. rj is large if the mean free path of the particles is large such
that the higher energy particles canflyfar into the lower temperature
range. The mean free path Af for particle collisions in a gas is given by

X^±- (3.25)
Qn
where n is the number of particles per cm 3 and Q is the collisional
cross-section. (Af is again the length of a column over which the sum of all
cross-sections, i.e. nQ, for a column of 1 cm 2 cross-section, covers the
whole column cross-section.) In the outer layers of the sun n ~ 1017 cm" 3 .
For collisions between neutral particles we can very roughly estimate that
 Energy transport by heat conduction 41
the collisional cross-section is of the order of the atomic cross-section, i.e.
about 1(T16 cm2. We then find Af = (1(T16 x 1017)"1 cm = 0.1 cm. For
charged particles like the electrons the cross-section becomes larger and
the mean free path becomes still smaller.
In Chapter 2 we saw that the mean free path for photons, namely K~^ , in
the solar atmosphere is of the order of 107 cm or larger and may be a factor
of 10 to 100 times smaller or larger in other atmospheres. Heat transport
by photons is therefore generally much more efficient than heat transport
by heat conduction. Exceptions are gases with low particle densities and
high temperatures, as in the solar corona, where the mean free path for
collisions becomes very large. At the same time, the photon density
becomes very low in the corona as compared to oT4. Radiative energy
transport therefore is very small in the corona. In these high temperature
regions heat conduction becomes important. Another exception is a very
high density gas, when the electrons are packed so densely that the Pauli
principle becomes important (see Section 14.3); the mean free path of the
electrons can then become so large that heat conduction is the main
mechanism of energy transport.
 The opacities

4.1 Bound-free and free-free absorption coefficients

If we want to use equation (3.7) to calculate the temperature
gradient we have to determine the absorption coefficient K.
We discussed in Volume 2 different absorption processes. In Fig. 4.1 we
show a schematic energy level diagram for an atom or ion. Absorption in
spectral lines takes place if an electron, bound in an atom with a number of
discrete energy levels, makes a transition from one bound energy level to
another bound energy level. The energy difference between these two
levels equals the energy hv of the absorbed photon. The transitions

Free electrons

hv2A
hv
3A hu23 x2

Xexc<3>

n= 1

Fig. 4.1. A schematic energy level diagram corresponding to the hydrogen atom. The
excitation energy above the ground level, Xexc(n)> *s given by ^ion — % n. Here ^ion is the
energy needed to remove an electron in the ground level from the atom. For hydrogen
atoms Xn = XioJn2 and Xc*M) = Zion " Xn = Xion(l " n2). For the electron to make a
transition from the energy level with main quantum number n = 2 to the level with n = 3
the absorbed photon must have an energy hv23 = Xi ~ X3- This leads to an absorption of
a given frequency, i.e. to line absorption.

42
 Bound-free and free-free coefficients 43

between these discrete energy states are called bound-bound transitions

because both energy states refer to electrons that are bound to an atom or
ion. Such transition leads to absorption in essentially one frequency, the
frequency of a particular spectral line. In this section we will discuss the
absorption coefficients in the continuum of frequencies extending over all
frequencies. Such a continuous absorption can only occur when either the
energy state from which the absorption starts or thefinalenergy state is not
quantized, such that the electron can have a continuum of energy states as
initial state or that it may go into a continuum of energy states after the
absorption (see Fig. 4.2). Such a continuum of energy states exists only for
free electrons. We therefore find continuous absorption only if the final
energy level or the starting energy level or both correspond to a free
electron. If only the final value is unbound the transitions are called
bound-free transitions; if both levels are unbound the transitions are called
free-free transitions.

4.1.1 The bound-free absorption coefficients

The bound-free transitions correspond to an ionization process: a
bound electron transfers from the bound state into a free state. The inverse
bound-bound bound-free

hv = ^jmv\

Excitation
energy

Fig. 4.2. For an absorption process in a continuum of frequencies the electron either has
to be in a continuous set of energy levels or it has to transfer into a continuous set of
energy levels. Kinetic energies constitute a continuum of energy levels. For an
absorption process in a continuum of frequencies the electron must therefore be a free
flying electron or it has to become a free electron in the absorption process. In the latter
case the electron must be removed from the atom. The atom is ionized. The frequency
of the absorbed photon is given by hv = %n + \mv2, if the electron is removed from the
level with main quantum number n. \mv2 is the kinetic energy of the electron after the
ionization (absorption) process. Such transitions from bound levels are called bound-
free transitions. A free flying electron with kinetic energy ^tnv\ ca.n also absorb a photon
of energy hv and obtain a higher kinetic energy \mv\. The energy of the absorbed
photon is given by hv = \mv\ - \mv\. It can have a continuous set of values.
44 The opacities
process coupled with the emission of a photon is a recombination process.
From Fig. 4.2 it is obvious that for such a bound-free transition from a
given level with quantum number n a minimum energy of hv =
Zion ~ Xexc(n) = Xn is required to remove the electron from the atom. Here
#ion is the energy necessary to move an electron in the ground level into the
continuum. This is called the ionization energy. Xexc(n) is the energy
difference between the energy level with quantum number n and the
ground level. For the hydrogen atom, for instance, with an ionization
energy #ion = 13.6 eV the bound-free absorption from the level with n = 2
can only occur if the energy of the photon is larger than
Xn = X\oJn2 — 3.4 eV. This means the wavelength of the absorbed photon
has to be shorter than that corresponding to hv = 3.4 eV, i.e. shorter than
3647 A.
Such bound-free transitions are possible for all atoms or ions which still
have an electron bound to them. (We cannot have bound-free transitions
from a proton.) In order to calculate the total bound-free absorption
coefficient we first have to calculate the absorption coefficient for each
bound level in each kind of atom or ion as a function of frequency, then
total all the contributions at each frequency. Generally this absorption
coefficient is wavelength dependent. We therefore have to decide which
absorption coefficient we have to use in equation (3.7) if we want to
calculate the temperature stratification. Since the temperature gradient is
determined by the amount of radiative flux which can be transported
through a given horizontal layer, the most important wavelength band is
the one in which most of the flux is transported. This wavelength band is
determined by the wavelengths in which most of the energy is emitted.
With FT oc K~1(dB/dz) (equation (3.7)) this means mainly by the wave-
length for the maximum of the Planck function and by the minimum of K
since FT ^ K" 1 . For higher temperatures the maximum of the Planck
function shifts to shorter wavelengths. Requiring that

we find the value of K to use is the so-called Rosseland mean value K R

which is given by (see also Appendix A.5)
 Bound-free and free-free coefficients 45
where B^ is the Planck function, namely
_ 2hc2 1
x 5
X ehcakT-l

and (see also Volume 2)

T^d^-r4 (4.3)

The Rosseland mean absorption coefficient is usually called the opacity.

In order to be correct we have to calculate the free-free absorption
coefficients, the bound-free absorption coefficients and the line absorption
coefficients for all X and add those for each X before taking the Rosseland
mean of all these absorption coefficients. This will have to be done for all
temperatures and pressures. The results of such computations have been
published in the form of figures and tables. In Fig. 4.4 we show the
opacities as a function of temperature for some densities, according to Cox
and Tabor (1976). The opacities decrease with increasing temperature
approximately as K <X T~d with 3.5 > <5 ^ 2.0. They increase with increas-
ing density approximately as K °C p° 5 . In the following discussion we will
try to understand the general behavior of K as a function of T. This will
make it easier to understand the main features of stellar structure and their
dependence on the stellar mass and chemical composition.
The bound-free absorption coefficient per hydrogen atom in the level
with main quantum number n is given by

3V3 ch n v
Here g is the so-called Gaunt factor - a quantum mechanical correction
factor to the absorption coefficients calculated otherwise in a classical way
and making use of the correspondence principle (Gaunt was thefirstone to
compute g). e is the elementary charge, m the mass of the electron, h
Planck's constant and v the frequency of the absorbed photon. Z' is the
effective charge of the nucleus attracting the absorbing electron; Z' is 1 for
the hydrogen atom. The absorption coefficient, except for the g factor, can
be calculated classically by calculating the emission of an electron with a
given impact parameter p which is accelerated in the Coulomb force field
of the proton. A Fourier analysis and summation over all p gives the
frequency dependence. (See for instance Finkelnburg and Peters, 1957.) It
turns out that for hydrogen the quantum mechanical correction factor g for
46 The opacities
the bound-free transitions is never larger than a few per cent. For other
atoms and ions we can use expression (4.2) as an approximation if we
calculate the factor Z ' 4 appropriately as the 'effective' charge of the
nucleus, which is partially shielded by the remaining electrons. For atoms
or ions other than hydrogen the correction factors g can be fairly large and
in most cases are not even known. In stellar interiors, where hydrogen is
completely ionized, only the heavy elements still have electrons able to
absorb photons. The heavy elements are therefore very important for the
absorption coefficient. Fortunately the 'hydrogen' like approximation
given in equation (4.4) becomes more valid when the outer electrons are
removed from the atoms. For the remaining highly ionized ions the energy
level diagrams become more similar to the one for the hydrogen atom,
except that the ionization energies are much larger, roughly proportional
to Z' 2 . Of the more abundant elements mainly iron has still a rather

Electron scattering

logT

Conduction by
degenerate electrons

+-4 +6

Fig. 4.3. In the temperature density diagram the regions are indicated for which the
different absorption or scattering processes are important. Also shown are the high
density regions for which heat conduction becomes important. The dashed line shows
the approximate relation between temperature and density for the solar interior.
Adapted from Schwarzschild (1958a).
 Bound-free and free-free coefficients 47
complicated energy level diagram because even at temperatures of around
a few million degrees it still has many bound electrons.
From equation (4.4) we see that the absorption coefficients for higher
frequencies, i.e. for shorter wavelengths, generally decrease as v~3. We
also know that for higher temperatures the maximum of the Planck
function shifts to shorter wavelengths. From Wien's law we know that
l m a x r = const. = 0.289 cm degree" 1 , where Amax is the wavelength for
which the Planck function for the temperature T has a maximum, i.e.
vmax oc T. For the determination of the average KR the wavelengths with
the largest flux are the most important. This means that KR is mainly
determined by /<(Amax) °c r~ ax °c T~3 according to (4.4). We may there-
fore expect a decrease in the opacity for higher temperatures as KR ^ T~3
due to the factor v~3 in K. Of course, changes in Z' and in the number of
ions which can contribute to the absorption also have to be considered. For
the final bound-free absorption coefficient at a given frequency v we must
sum up all the contributions from different energy levels for a given ion or
atom and then sum up all the contributions from different ions or atoms.
The final bound-free absorption coefficient is given by

Kv,cm = ) > Nnabi(n) (4.5)

ions n

where Nn are the numbers of ions per cm3 in a given quantum state with
quantum number n, which can be calculated from the Saha equation and
the Boltzmann formula. We have to total the contributions of all energy
levels for all ions of all elements.
In order to obtain qualitative insight, for the summation over all the
contributions we can make some simplifying assumptions. For increasing
temperatures more and more electrons will be removed from the atoms.
We therefore encounter higher and higher stages of ionization for increas-
ing temperatures and Z' increases with increasing T, giving a slight
increase in K with T. The degree of ionization is described by the Saha
equation which appears to introduce a factor of T~3l2ne into the kR
(ne = electron density). However, the change from one state of ionization
to the next one may not be so important.
The electrons come mainly from the ionization of hydrogen and helium.
We get twice as many electrons per unit of mass from hydrogen as
from helium. Therefore ne oc p(2X + Y) = p(l + X) since X+ Y « 1,
with X and Y being the mass fractions of the hydrogen and helium
abundances.
48 The opacities

Taking into account all these effects Kramers estimated that the Rosse-
land mean K per gram of material for bound-free transitions depends on p
and Tas KR °C pT~3 5. As pointed out above the main decrease in KR with
increasing T is due to the shift of the radiative flux to shorter wavelengths
where KX is smaller, decreasing as v~3. Free-free transitions have to be
considered in addition to the bound-free transitions. Their contribution
has to be added at each frequency.
For temperatures of several million degrees in stellar interiors hydrogen
and helium are completely ionized and also the heavy elements have lost
most of their electrons. The free-free transitions then become very
important. They are mainly due to transitions in the Coulomb field of the
hydrogen and helium nuclei because they are so much more abundant than
the heavy elements. The free-free absorption coefficient is therefore
independent of the heavy element abundances. The dependence on p and
T turns out, however, to be approximately the same as for bound-free
transitions, namely KR ^ p •T~3 5 .

4.2 Electron scattering

We saw in Volume 2 that the scattering coefficient due to scattering
on free electrons is independent of wavelength. The number of free
electrons per gram also does not change with increasing temperature
because almost all electrons come from hydrogen and helium, which are
completely ionized for temperatures about 100000 K. For mainly ionized
material the electron scattering coefficient per gram does not therefore
depend on density and temperature.
In Fig. 4.3 we illustrate the regions in the temperature density diagram
where the different absorption or scattering processes are most important.

4.3 The line absorption coefficients

For a complete description of all the important absorption coef-
ficients in stellar interiors we still have to include the contribution from the
line absorption coefficients. Since the Rosseland mean absorption coef-
ficient is a harmonic mean of all the KS, small wavelength bands with large
values of KV, as we see them in the spectral lines, are generally not
expected to have a large influence on the K unless they are so numerous
that they cover a large fraction of all wavelengths. Pressure broadening of
spectral lines becomes important for the high pressures in stellar interiors
 Line absorption coefficients 49
because it extends the wavelength coverage of the spectral lines. In the
deep interior the highly ionized ions have energy levels which more and
more resemble those of hydrogen, which means they have only a few
energy levels with a relatively small number of line transitions. It turns out,
however, that in the temperature range around a few hundred thousand to

\ \ \ \

N
•\ \ \

P
x 0.01
• 0.1
+ 1.0

5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5

Fig. 4.4. The Rosseland mean absorption coefficient as a function of temperature T and
density p according to Cox and Tabor (1976). A hydrogen abundance of 70 per cent by
mass and a helium abundance of 28 per cent by mass was assumed with 2 per cent of
heavy elements. For comparison some curves are shown with Kg = CpT~35 for different
values of p, with C = 1.8 x 1024 to match the point for p = 0.01 cm~3 and T= 106K. A
line KgT oc p° 5j~2 5 j s a i s o shown, which matches the numerical values better for p ^ 0.1.
50 The opacities
a million degrees the heavy ions, like those of iron, still have a fairly large
number of electrons in their outer shells creating a rather complicated
energy level diagram with many line transitions. In this temperature
region the line absorption coefficients are therefore still important. In Fig.
4.4 we compare the results of numerical calculations by Cox and Tabor
(1976) with Kramers' estimate. An approximation KR = Kg °c p°-5rf~2-5
seems to be better than Kramers'.
 Convective instability

5.1 General discussion

So far we have talked about energy transport by radiation only. We
may also have energy transport by mass motions. If these occur hot
material may rise to the top, where it cools and then falls down as cold
material. The net energy transport is given by the difference of the upward
transported energy and the amount which is transported back down. Such
mass motions are also called convection. Our first question is: when and
where do these mass motions exist, or in other words where do we find
instability to convection? When will a gas bubble which is accidentally
displaced upwards continue to move upwards and when will a gas bubble
which is accidentally displaced downwards continue to move downwards?
Due to the buoyancy force a volume of gas will be carried upwards if its
density is lower than the density of the surroundings and it will fall
downwards if its density is larger than that of the surroundings.
From our daily experience we know that convection occurs at places of
large temperature gradients, for instance over a hot asphalt street in the
sunshine in the summer, or over a radiator in the winter. The hot air over
the hot asphalt, heated by the absorption of solar radiation, has a lower
density than the overlying or surrounding air. As soon as the hot air starts
rising by an infinitesimal amount, it gets into cooler and thereto* e higher
density surroundings and keeps rising due to the buoyancy force like a hot
air balloon in the cooler surrounding air. This always occurs if a rising gas
bubble is hotter than its surroundings.

5.2 The Schwarzschild criterion for convective instability

When does a rising gas bubble obtain a higher temperature than
the surrounding gas which is at rest? In Fig. 5.1 we demonstrate the
situation. We have schematically plotted the temperature as a function of
51
52 Convective instability
depth in the star. Suppose a gas bubble rises accidentally by a small
distance in height. It gets into a layer with a lower gas pressure Pg and
therefore it expands. Without any energy exchange with its surroundings it
expands and cools adiabatically. If during this rise and adiabatic expansion
the change in temperature is smaller than in the surroundings the gas
bubble remains hotter than the surroundings. The expansion of the gas
bubble, adjusting to the pressure of the surroundings, happens very fast,
namely with the speed of sound. We can therefore assume that the
pressure in the gas bubble and in the surroundings is the same (this is not
quite true close to the boundaries of the convectively unstable zone) and
therefore the higher temperature gas bubble will have a lower density than
the surrounding gas. The buoyancy force will therefore accelerate it
upwards. As seen in Fig. 5.1 this always occurs if the adiabatic change of
temperature during expansion is smaller than the change of temperature
with gas pressure in the surroundings. The condition for continuing
motion, i.e. for convective instability, is then

(5.1)
dz) ad dzL

T(z)

Fig. 5.1. The average relation r(z) sur or T(Pg)sur for a stellar atmosphere is shown
schematically. Also shown is the T(z) ad relation for a rising or falling gas volume which
for pressure equilibrium changes its temperature adiabatically when it rises and expands
(cools) or falls and is compressed (with increasing T). If the temperature stratification
T(z) in the surrounding gas is steeper than for the adiabatic temperature stratification
followed by the rising or falling gas, the rising gas will obtain a higher temperature and
lower density than the surroundings and will be pushed up further by the buoyancy
force, while the falling gas obtains a lower temperature and therefore higher density
than the surroundings and keeps falling. The atmosphere is unstable to convection.
 Adiabatic temperature gradient 53

where ad stands for 'adiabatic' and sur stands for 'surroundings'. After
replacing
&T u dT dPz
— by -
dz dPg dz
we can also say

- )

because dPg/dz is the same on both sides of the equation and is always
positive. We easily see from Fig. 5.1 that under those conditions a falling
gas bubble remains cooler than its surroundings and for equal pressure has
therefore a higher density than the surroundings and keeps falling. For a
layer in radiative equilibrium, convective instability then occurs if

—) <(-) (5-3)
dPgUd \dPgJ radiative

or

) ( £ £ ) =Vr>d (5.4)
yad \dln/y rad
if we multiply equation (5.2) by PgIT.
This is the Schwarzschild criterion for convective instability. In its
derivation we have implicitly assumed that the mean molecular weight// is
the same in the rising bubble and in the surroundings. If this is not the case
we have to take this into account when comparing the density in the bubble
with that in the surrounding gas. If the deeper layers have a higher mean
atomic weight, perhaps due to a higher abundance of helium, the density
of the rising gas is increased and the convective instability decreased (see
Fig. 5.2).

5.3 The adiabatic temperature gradient

In order to judge whether a given layer in a star is unstable against
convection we have to compare the radiative equilibrium temperature
gradient, given by equation (3.8), with the adiabatic temperature gradi-
ent. We therefore have to compute this adiabatic temperature gradient
54 Convective instability
(see also Volume 2). By definition an adiabatic temperature and pressure
change means a change with no heat exchange A<2 with the surroundings,
i.e.,

(5.5)

with

(5.6)

where dE is the internal energy, dE = CvdT. Here Cv is the specific heat

at constant volume (i.e. dV = 0). For an ideal gas we have
POV = ROT (5.7)

Rg is the gas constant, if we consider 1 mol of gas. V is then the volume for
1 mol, i.e. V = ju/p. If the pressure is kept constant during heating the gas
expands and has to do work against the outside pressure. This additional
energy has to be supplied when heating the gas at constant pressure. The
specific heat at constant pressure Cp per mol is therefore larger than Cv per
mol. Differentiating equation (5.7) and making use of (5.6) (see also
Volume 2) one finds

Cy — Rg (5.8)

Rising bubble

- • Falling bubble

Fig. 5.2. ju is schematically shown as a function of depth in a hypothetical star. If in the

interior the average atomic weight JU increases with depth a rising bubble carries with it a
higher/* from the deeper layers. It therefore has a higher p than for the case with a
depth independent//. A falling bubble carries with it a lower// which reduces its density.
A positive d/u/dz makes convection more difficult.
 Adiabatic temperature gradient 55
For adiabatic changes for which dQ = 0 we then derive, introducing
y = CpICv, that

or P=pJ^] and 7 p 5 g^
Po! P go W P
With this relation we can now easily determine V ad. For an ideal gas we
obtain

dlnP g / a d y y
For a monatomic gas the internal energy per particle is generally \kT, if
only the kinetic energy needs to be considered, and for a mol it is
E = \RgT. According to equation (5.8) Cp = Cv + Rg and we have
Cp = ^Rg and y = CpICv = f (5.11)
With (5.5) we therefore find
v
ad = | / i = 1 = 0.4 (5.12)
for a monatomic gas for which Cv = \Rg.
Equation (5.10) tells us that Vad becomes very small if y approaches 1.
Since

it approaches 1 if Cv becomes very large. This happens if a large amount of

energy is needed to heat the gas. In that case Vad becomes small and
convection can set in. We find such conditions for temperatures and
pressures for which an abundant element like hydrogen or helium starts to
ionize. A large amount of energy is needed to remove an electron from a
hydrogen or helium atom; this energy is not available to increase the
temperature. Therefore large amounts of energy are needed to heat the
gas by one degree and at the same time supply the necessary ionization
energy and Vad becomes small.
Hydrogen starts to ionize for temperatures around 6000 to 7000 K. For
temperatures higher than this we therefore find small values of Vad until
the temperatures become so high that all the hydrogen is ionized. At such
temperatures Vad increases again. However, Vad becomes small again for
temperatures around 20 000 to 50 000 K when helium ionizes once and
twice. In Fig. 5.3 we show the contour lines for Vad according to Unsold
(1948).
56 Convective instability
5.4 Reasons for convective instabilities
5.4.1 Convective instability due to a steep increase in the absorption
coefficient
In order to find out where we have convection zones in stars we
have to compare the radiative temperature gradient Vrad (see equation
(3.8)) and the adiabatic temperature gradient Vad and see under which
conditions we find

'ad (5.14)

This can be the case either because Vrad becomes very large or because Vad
becomes very small.
Let usfirstlook at the radiative temperature gradient Vrad and see under
which conditions it can become very large. From equation (3.8) and
making use of

dlnP g
dz RgT H

3,S

Fig. 5.3. The contour lines for Vad are shown in a temperature pressure diagram. Vad
has a minimum for temperatures and pressures for which hydrogen or helium ionize. For
the calculations the energy in the radiation field has been neglected. Above the line
Sr/kN = 1 the energy in the radiation field should have been considered. In this region
Vad is actually smaller than calculated here. From Unsold (1948), p. 231.
 Reasons for convective instabilities 57
where His the isothermal scale height (see Section 6.3.1), we find
3jiFKcmH_3jt F Pg
rad 4 4 g {
16 oT 16 oT g '

with Kcm = Kgp (see Chapter 3). Of course, for radiative equilibrium
F Fi
= -
The radiative gradient becomes very large if either the flux F becomes
very large for a given Tor if KgPg becomes very large. In Volume 2 we saw
that generally at a given optical depth Pgoc K " 1 ; therefore for depth
independent Kg the product PgKg is not expected to vary much. Suppose Kg
is small at the surface. Then at the optical depth r = 1 for instance Pg will
be large because r = 1 corresponds to a rather deep layer in the atmos-
phere. If on the other hand for r > 1 the Kg increases steeply, then we still
have a large Pg because of the small Kg close to the surface. With a large Kg
for r ^ 1 the product PgKg can then become very large. It is the depth
dependence of #cg which is important for the value of V rad . This can be
clearly seen if we now calculate V rad for a special case in which we
approximate the depth dependence of Kg by (see also Volume 2)
Kg = K0Pbg(Z) (5.16)
A steep increase in Kg with depth is found for large values of b.
We calculate the pressure gradient from the hydrostatic equilibrium
equation

or separating the variables

PbgdPg = ^dr (5.17)

After integration between r = 0 and r, for which Pg = 0 and Pg = Pg(r)

respectively, we obtain

= r-2- or P ^ + i ( r ) = (& + l ) r - ^ (5.18)

Equations (5.17) and (5.18) yield

dlnPg_ 1 dPg_ g 1 _ g KO
b +1
dr Pg dr K0P g K0(b + l)rg (b ' '
58 Convective instability
We now calculate V rad . We had derived previously (equation (3.6)) that
4 &B

The integration of this relation from r = 0 to r yields for

Fr = F= constant, i.e. for radiative equilibrium in the plane parallel case,
B(x) = \Fx + Bo - \Fx (5.20)
for large x when Bo = B(x = 0) « B(x).
With

B = -T4 (5.21)
jt

we find
dB\ = dB/dT\ = joT^(dT\
dr/rad " dT\drj rad ~ n T \drj rad

,5.22)
UL u t
/rad \ /rad

using equation (5.20), or

^ =H J_ = l (5.23)
dr j r a d \drj r a d 3FT 4r
As
/ H l n T\ / H i n 7A /Hln P
(5.24)
dlnPg/rad \ dr / r a d / dr

we now have to divide equation (5.23) by (d In Pg/dr) from the hydrostatic

equation (see equation (5.19)), and obtain for r » 1
1 (5 25)
' - f /f r /i nhh ^r T -
4r/ (6 + l ) r 4
Only for b ^ 0.6 do we find V rad ^ 0.40. If Vad = 0.40, i.e. if y = f, we
will find convective instability for b > 0.6, which sets a lower limit on the
increase in K for convective instability but not on the absolute value of Kg
determined by K 0 . For the surface layers V rad does not depend on KQ . For
constant Kg we find V rad = 0.25 no matter how large K0 is.
For constant Kg we need Vad < 0.25 for convective instability.
 Reasons for convective instabilities 59
In the temperature region where the hydrogen starts to ionize, i.e.
around 6000 to 7000 K, the absorption coefficient increases very steeply
for two reasons:
1. In the surface layers of cool stars the H~ ions do most of the
continuous absorption. Due to the beginning of hydrogen ionization the
number of free electrons increases and many more H~ ions are formed,
therefore the H~ absorption coefficient increases steeply.
2. The temperature is high enough to excite the higher energy
levels in the hydrogen atoms, which means we find a large number of
electrons in the second and third energy levels, the Baimer and Paschen
levels, of the hydrogen atom, which can then contribute to the continuous
absorption coefficient for X < 8200 A. This gives a very steep increase in
the hydrogen absorption coefficient in the wavelength region in which we
find most of the radiative flux. In this upper part of the hydrogen ionization
zone therefore Kg increases very steeply and Vrad can exceed 1000.

5.4.2 Convective instability due to large energy flux F

We alsofindconvective instability when the energyfluxF becomes
very large. This can happen in the interiors of massive stars. In these stars
the central temperatures are so high that the CNO cycle (see section 8.5) is
the main energy source. We know that the CNO cycle is very temperature
sensitive; the energy generation is approximately proportional to T16. This
means that the energy generation is strongly concentrated towards the
center of the stars where the temperatures are highest. The total lumino-
sity is generated in a very small sphere with radius r\ around the center. If
we now calculate the energy flux F from JIF = LIAnr\ we find a very large
value for F because r1 is so small. In the center of massive stars we
therefore alsofindconvective instability due to the large value for F. As we
pointed out this is due to the strong temperature dependence of the CNO
cycle. We therefore find these core convection zones only in stars where
the CNO cycle is important for the energy generation, that is in hot stars.

5.4.3 Convective instability due to small values of the adiabatic

gradient Vad
We discussed above that the adiabatic temperature gradient be-
comes very small in the temperature regions where an abundant element
like hydrogen or helium ionizes, i.e. in the hydrogen and helium ionization
zones. In Section 5.4.1 we saw that these are also the regions where the
60 Convective instability
continuous K increases steeply and where we therefore find convective
instability. In the hydrogen ionization region the Vad becomes small and
Vrad becomes very large which enhances the convective instability (see Fig.
5.3). The small values of Vad extend the convection zones but they do not
create new ones in this temperature region. The instability ceases when the
hydrogen and helium ionizations are essentially complete.

5.4.4 Convective instability due to molecular dissociation

For completeness we should mention that small values of Vad are
also found in stellar atmospheric regions where the hydrogen molecule
starts to dissociate. In these regions a large amount of energy is needed to
increase the temperature by 1 degree because for increasing temperatures
more molecules dissociate and use energy in this way which is then not
available for an increase in kinetic energy, i.e. for an increase in tempera-
ture. The specific heat Cv is then very large and Vad is small, leading to a
high atmospheric convection zone in cool stars.

5.4.5 Summary
In hot stars, r e f f >9000K, we find core convection zones but
envelopes in radiative equilibrium, because hydrogen is already ionized in
the surface layers. Helium ionization still leads to convective instability
but with negligible energy transport. The densities in this ionization zone
are too low.
In cool stars, r e f f <7600K, we find thin surface layers in radiative
equilibrium, below which so-called hydrogen convection zones are found
which are very thin if Teff > 7000 K.
For reff < 7000 K, hydrogen convection zones are found for layers with
7"^6000K with adjacent helium convection zones. Below this outer
convection zone we again find radiative equilibrium zones down to the
center of the star, except for very cool stars for which the hydrogen and
helium convection zones are very extended and may for main sequence
stars perhaps reach down to the center of the stars.
For very cool stars, i.e. M stars, we may also find surface convection
zones due to the dissociation of hydrogen molecules. These unstable zones
are separated from the hydrogen convection zones by regions in radiative
equilibrium. Because of the low densities in these layers near the surface,
convective energy transport is not expected to be important in these cool
star surface convection zones.
 Theory of convective energy
transport

6.1 Basic equations for convective energy transport

If we find convective instability in a given layer of a star we also
have to consider energy transport by convection. If part of the energy is
transported by convection, less energy needs to be transported by radi-
ation; jzFr is then decreased and according to equation (3.8) the tempera-
ture gradient needs to be less steep than in radiative equilibrium. The total
energy transport of course has to be the same as in the case without
convection, otherwise we could not have thermal equilibrium. We there-
fore require that

R2
jtFr + JZFC = JZF = oT tff —=• (6.1)
r
where R is the stellar radius and r is the radius of the layer for which we
want to calculate the flux. Fc is the convective flux.
In order to calculate the temperature gradient necessary to transport the
required amount of radiative flux Fr we must determine the amount of
convective energy flux Fc.
The net convective energy transport is given by the difference of the
energy transported upwards and the amount transported back down
again. We look at two columns in a given layer of the star (see Fig. 6.1): in
one column the gas is moving upwards, in the other the gas is moving
downwards. All variables referring to the column with upward (down-
ward) moving gas have the subscript u (d). The cross-sections for the
columns are then au and od respectively. The velocities are v, the densities
p, and the temperatures T. We now consider the energy flux through a
cross-section of the two columns. Each second a column of length v moves
through this cross section. The amount of material moving upwards is
given by puvuau and the amount moving downwards by Pd^d^d- I n the
upward moving column the heat content per gram is given by eu = cpTu,
61
62 Theory of convective energy transport
and for the downward moving column ed = cpTd, where we have assumed
equal pressure in the columns. Here cp is the specific heat for constant
pressure per gram of material. For the net energy transport through
cru + od we find if ou = od = 1 cm2

PuVucpTu + i P u ^ u - (PdVdCpTd + \pdvdv2d) = 2JZFC (6.2)

where 7iFc is the convective energy transport through 1 cm2. (We are
actually looking at a cross-section of 2 cm2 here, hence the factor 2 on the
right-hand side.)
We now have to consider the mass transport. There obviously cannot be
any net mass transport in any one direction, because otherwise the star
would dissolve or collect all the mass in the interior which would violate
hydrostatic equilibrium. We must require that the net mass transport is
zero, which means

which for pu « pd yields vu = vd (6.3)

provided that the cross-sections for the upward and downward moving
material are the same, otherwise puvuou = Pd^d^d- From equation (6.3)
we find that the net transport of kinetic energy is zero. There is as much
kinetic energy carried upwards as is carried back down. (If ou ¥^ od the
velocities may be different and the kinetic energy transport may not be
zero. In any case the kinetic energies are subtracted from each other. Only
a small fraction contributes to the net energy flux.)

1/
Fig. 6.1. Through a column with cross-section ou a stream of gas isflowingupwards,
carrying an energyfluxOUJIFU. Through another column with cross-section crdgas is
flowing back down, carrying an energy flux ojiF&
 Basic equations 63
Making use of equation (6.3) we derive for the net convective energy
flux (see also Volume 2) the expression
JZFC = \pvcp{Tu - Td) « pvcpAT (6.4)
which gives us the energy transport per second through 1 cm2 by means of
mass motion, generally called convective energy transport. AT = Tu —
Ts= Ts— r d , such that Tu — Td = 2 AT (see Fig. 6.2). Ts is the average
temperature of the surroundings.
Clearly the assumption of equal density and equal pressure in the two
columns, while permitting temperature differences, is somewhat incon-
sistent, but introducing Ap would introduce second-order terms in the heat
transport, which we neglect.
For unequal densities the energy transport of kinetic energy would not
exactly cancel; however, the remaining difference would generally be very
small in comparison with the heat transport term except possibly close to
the boundaries of the convection zones, where the gas pressures in the two
columns and the cross-sections a may be different. In equation (6.4) we
find Fc °c Tu — Td ~ 2AT. This means the positive energy transport up-
wards and the negative energy transport downwards add up in the net heat

- As- -As-

Fig. 6.2. In a given layer at depth zx we find gas traveling upwards as well as downwards
with a temperature Tu or Td respectively. Ts is the average temperature at depth zx. For
equal traveling distances Az for the gas the difference Tu — Td = 2AT, with AT = Tu — Ts
and also AT = Ts — Td. The subscript bu stands for gas bubble.
64 Theory of convective energy transport
energy transport upwards. The negative energy transport downwards has
the same effect as the positive energy transport upwards.
The convective flux is then generally given by
JIFC = (6.5)
The question remains how to calculate AT and the velocity v. If we look
at all the different rising and falling columns in a given layer at depth zx we
find many different values for AT and v, depending on how far the gas has
already traveled (see Fig. 6.3). What we are interested in is the overall
energy transport, which means we need to know the average AT and v at a
given depth which depend on the average traveling distance which these
gas columns or bubbles, crossing a given horizontal layer, have been
traveling. We shall call the average traveling distance for a gas bubble
prior to mixing with the surroundings /. This distance is frequently called
the mixing length when it is assumed that this distance is determined by the
mixing of the rising and falling gas.

6.2 Mixing length theory of convective energy transport

In order to determine AT and v we now have to follow a given
volume of gas, which we call a bubble, on its way upwards or downwards
along the path s. We choose an upwards moving bubble which experiences

Fig. 6.3. In a given horizontal layer at depth z1 we find gas columns traveling upwards or
downwards which have originated at different layers and have traveled different
distances s. They have different values of AT and v.
 Mixing length theory 65
a temperature gradient (d77dz) bu , while z stands for depth. From Fig. 6.3
we see that AT(s) is determined by the difference between (d77dz) bu and
the average temperature gradient in the surroundings d77dz. If s describes
the distance which the bubble has traveled we find
dT
AT(s) = ^ -^-ldT) s (6.6)
Ldz \dz/ bu J
As soon as the bubble develops a AT with respect to its surroundings there
will be some energy exchange which decreases AT. The actual (d77dz)bu
will therefore be larger than the adiabatic gradient. We have

/ ad

Due to the positive AT the rising bubble experiences a buoyancy force

/ b . It is equal to the difference in gravitational force working on the bubble
and on the surroundings. The force per cm3 is

/ b = Apg and the acceleration a is a — —g = — (6.8)

P P
Here g is the gravitational acceleration, pointing in the direction of z.
If we assume pressure equilibrium between the bubble and the sur-
rounding gas we find for the difference in density between the bubble and
the surrounding gas

for APg = 0 and assuming that the mean molecular weight is the same in
the bubble as in the surrounding gas. Even for the same chemical
composition this may not be the case if the degree of ionization changes
due to the temperature and density change. Taking this into account we
find

Ap= AT+A^Aln J j d l n ^ L A l n r

p T n \ dlnT,

where
d In JU
~ dlnT
66 Theory of convective energy transport
Considering for simplicity the case of constant ju, i.e. Q = 1, we can
express the buoyancy force as

'" T'S'"^i <6U)

With the kinetic energy Ekin = \pv2 being equal to / force ds we find

-v2=lS — g ds and v2 = 2 f — g ds (6.12)

9 T T
Z L 7
JO JO
According to equation (6.7) we have then

s(k = -^ r y (6.13)

This yields

)
/ bu
If we now compute the total flux through a given horizontal layer, we
have to average over all bubbles crossing this layer. They have different
travel distances s. With the average total travel distance for the bubbles
being /, the average travel distance for the gas crossing at a given
horizontal layer is 1/2 (see Fig. 6.3) and the expression for the convective
energy transport finally becomes

JZFC = pcp.

[dz [dzjj 2
r d r _ / d r \ i3/2
[dz \d~z)h
(6.15)
T5U \2

If we take into account the possibility of changing ionization we find

AT IdT
dz
 Choice of characteristic travel length 67

Here we have used

\dT_(dT\
AT [dz [dzjj I _ <g\c\T (dT\ 1)1/2 /
— — and v = \ — \ — - (6.17)
T T 2 [T[dz [dzJJl 2

— the — and JZFC both increase.

dz \dz)bu\ T

6.3 Choice of characteristic travel length /

6.5.7 The pressure scale height
We expect the characteristic travel length / to be comparable to the
pressure scale height H. It is determined by the hydrostatic equation

^=~gp (6.18)
dr
where

<619)
S
and g is the gravitational acceleration.
Assuming again P ~ Pg and inserting (6.19) and (6.18) we find after
dividing by Pg

V J
Pg dr dr 7?gT

By integrating this differential equation wefindthe pressure stratification:

|^dr (6.21)

where F^Q is the gas pressure at r = r0 and P g l is the gas pressure at radius
rx. In order to integrate this equation we need to know T(r) and g(r). For
the moment we assume for simplicity a layer in which T = const. = T and
68 Theory of convective energy transport
g = const. = g, i.e. we calculate the gas pressure for an isothermal atmos-
phere. The integrand on the right-hand side of equation (6.21) is then
constant and we find

lnPgl - lnPg0 = In - f = - f M ^ - r0) (6.22)

\fgoJ K gl
Taking the exponential for both sides we derive

Pgi = Pgo exp -JjTf(ri ~ ro) \ = pgo e x P ~Vl H \ (6*23)

with

H=§£ (6.24)

For rx — ro = H the pressure Pg changes by a factor of e. H is therefore

called the isothermal pressure scale height. We can easily verify that this is
also the isothermal density scale height. With temperature gradients the
pressure and density scale heights will be different, but H still gives a good
approximation if we use an average T.

6.3.2 Relation between pressure scale height and characteristic length I

If originally in a convective layer the cross-sections of the rising
and falling gas columns were equal then after one pressure scale height H
the rising gas must have expanded by a factor of e, if it remains in pressure
equilibrium with the surroundings. This means after a distance compar-
able to H there is no room left for the falling gas (see Fig. 6.4). On the
other hand we must require that through every horizontal layer the same
amount of material must fall down as is moving upwards. There is only one
solution to the problem, namely that not all the material starting to rise can
keep going; part of it must be dragged down again by the falling material.
In any given layer a large fraction of the falling material must have been
taken out of the rising columns only a short time earlier. We therefore
estimate that / cannot be much larger than H. In practical applications
generally only the isothermal scale height is used. In this approximation
the density and the pressure scale heights are of course identical. The
actual value of IIH to be used can be determined by the comparison of real
stars with stellar models calculated by assuming different values for the
 Energy exchange 69
characteristic length. The larger the characteristic length, the more
efficient is the convective energy transport, as seen from equation (6.15).

6.4 Energy exchange between rising or falling gas and surroundings

In order to calculate the convective energy transport we still have
to determine the temperature gradient for the rising or falling bubbles; this
is steeper than the adiabatic one because of the energy exchange with the
surroundings. This energy exchange depends on the size of the gas
bubbles. The larger the bubble, the more difficult it is for the photons to
escape. We have to use an average size which we can only guess.
Observations of solar granulation (see Volume 2) suggest sizes which are
of the order of one pressure scale height. For lack of better knowledge we
use this value, or the value of /.
Generally we can say that the ratio of the energy gain of the rising gas,
with respect to the surroundings, to the energy loss (to the surroundings) is
given by
dT_/dT\
_ energy gain during lifetime _ cppATmax _ dz \dz/ b u
energy loss during lifetime cppAT'
)
ad
(6.25)

Fig. 6.4. In a layer at depth zl half the area is covered by rising bubbles and half by
falling gas. The rising bubbles expand. They cover larger and larger areas. If in the layer
at depth z2 their cross-section has expanded by a factor of 2, no areas would be left for
the falling gas. The volume of the rising gas expands by a factor of e over one scale
height. The cross-section expands by a factor of 2 over a distance of about one density
scale height. Most of the upwards traveling gas has to be diverted into the downward
stream over this distance. The characteristic traveling distance / is therefore expected to
be of the order of one scale height.
70 Theory of convective energy transport
where Ar max is the maximum temperature difference actually achieved
between bubble and surroundings after it has traveled the distance /, and
AT' is the change in temperature due to the energy exchange (see Fig.
6.5).
In order to calculate F we have to compute the energy loss which is due
mainly to radiative energy exchange. We call F(radial) the radiativefluxthat
is streaming out of the surface of the bubble in all directions. For large
bubbles the energy loss per second is then ^/^diai) * surface area of the
bubble and

surface area of the bubble •- (6.26)

drr v
xr is the radial optical depth through the bubble in any direction, xr = KcmI.
IIv is the lifetime of the bubble.
The total energy gain of the bubble is given by

volume (6.27)

Fig. 6.5. The temperature stratification in an atmosphere with the temperature gradient
dT/dz. The stratification with the adiabatic temperature gradient (d77dz)ad and the
actual temperature change of the bubble (dT/dz)bu. Without energy exchange the bubble
would follow the adiabatic temperature change. Due to energy exchange its temperature
is decreased by AT' and the energy content per cm3 reduced by cppAT.
 Temperature gradient 71
We thus find

T = const. V P ^ W W / - volume-, = ^ y
oT •AT •surface •/
More energy is lost for smaller velocities, i.e. longer lifetimes.
The value of the constant depends on the geometry of the bubble and on
the temperature stratification in the bubble. Bohm-Vitense (1958) esti-
mated Fo to be

It is a function of T and Pg and can be evaluated locally.

Equations (6.1), (6.4), (6.17), (6.18) and (6.25) constitute a set of
equations from which the five unknowns d77dz, (d77dz)bu, v, FT9 and Fc
can be determined. Methods for the solution of these equations have been
discussed by Bohm-Vitense (1953) and by Kippenhahn, Weigert and
Hofmeister (1967). Here we will not go into details, but instead discuss
only the results for some limiting cases: when the energy exchange is very
small, i.e. F « 1, and when the energy exchange is very large, i.e. F » 1.

6.5 Temperature gradient with convection

6.5.7 General expressions for V and Vbu
We defined the radiative temperature gradient (d77dz)rad as the
gradient which has to be present for radiative equilibrium, i.e. for Fr = F.
This temperature gradient is given by equation (3.8) if we replace FT by
F = oTeff in the case of a plane parallel atmosphere and d/dz = — d/dr.
Making use of the hydrostatic equation

<dz£ * !H (6.30)
we found for Vrad (see equation (5.21))

In case of spherical symmetry we have JZFT = oTA&n(R2lr2) and the gravi-

tational acceleration is g = go(R2/r2) as long as the mass Mr~M and
where g0 is the surface gravity. The factors r2 cancel and we still find the
same expression for Vrad.
72 Theory of convective energy transport
For Vad we found (see equation (5.10)) for constant y

(6-32)
y ad
For CpICv = fy we find Vad = 0.40.
Vbu is the corresponding logarithmic temperature gradient for the rising
bubble. (Notice that the V are all positive providing Pgincreases inwards.)
We can rewrite the equations for AT,v and the temperature gradient in
terms of these logarithmic gradients.
The condition of thermal equilibrium requires that the sum of all energy
fluxes has to be independent of depth. In the case of radiative and
convective energy flux this means in the plane parallel case.

F = Fr + Fc = const. = - T4cff (6.33)

t

or

Fr = F-Fc = - (6.34)
n
The relation between the temperature gradient and the radiative flux
remains unchanged (see Chapter 3, equation (3.6))
4dfi = al6 J_dl5r
3 dr n 3 Kcm dz

Division by d In Pg/dz = 11H and solving for d In 77d In Pg yields

^ L = V =n F t L^. (6.36)
dlnP g 16 oT4 v
'
The temperature gradient V is proportional to the radiative flux F r . With
convection irFr < TTF and therefore the temperature gradient becomes
smaller than for radiative equilibrium, i.e. V < V r a d . With
FT — F — Fc — (o/jz)Te f{ — Fc w e find

V = (aTtff - JTFC) ^ s ? (6.37)

V
' I60T4 y
'
from which we derive

V = V r 1 + ^7 b u (6.38)
 Temperature gradient 73

after replacing 7iFc by the expression given in equation (6.5). Here

P ~ const. •F. The constant depends on the constant in F (equation 6.28)).
After some algebra one finds with yS = §F

|r)v ad
bu ( }
- i + r<i + i n
These equations contain the unknown velocity because F = Tov and
/? oc F. We therefore cannot solve these equations straightforwardly,
because v in turn depends on V and Vbu.
For the special cases of very large or very small energy exchange
between the bubbles and the surroundings we can, however, make Taylor
expansions and derive simple expressions for V, i.e. for the temperature
gradient, which we need to determine.

6.5.2 The temperature gradient for large energy exchange

Large energy exchange means F « 1 and inefficient convection. In
this case one obtains by means of Taylor expansions that
V = Vrad - |F 2 (V rad - Vad) (6.40)
and

(6.41)

All quantities on the right-hand side of equation (6.40) can be calculated

locally if T and Pg are known. The temperature stratification as a function
of the gas pressure can therefore be calculated by a straightforward
integration of equation (6.40). We see that the gradient V approaches the
radiative gradient Vrad for small values of F, i.e. for large energy exchange
and very inefficient convective energy transport.

6.5.3 The temperature stratification for small energy exchange

Small energy exchange means F » 1. By a Taylor expansion in
terms of 1/F we find

(6.42)
74 Theory of convective energy transport
and

) — (V A — V A) (6 43"l
v
^ I-, V rad ad/ ^u.-T~>y
10
Again the temperature stratification can be obtained by a straight-
forward integration of equation (6.42). For very large values of F, i.e. for
very little energy exchange and very efficient convective energy transport,
the temperature stratification becomes nearly adiabatic.
Of course the actual temperature gradient can never be exactly adiaba-
tic or flatter than the adiabatic one, even for the most active convection.
Were this to happen the stellar layer would become stable against
convection. The motions would stop, the convective energy transport
would decay and the temperature gradient would increase until convection
could set in again. For very efficient convection the temperature gradient
can approach the adiabatic one and be nearly indistinguishable from it, but
it can never actually become adiabatic or flatter than that.
For intermediate values of F one has to follow the iterative procedure by
Bohm-Vitense (1953) or the method described by Kippenhahn, Weigert
and Hofmeister (1967).

6.6 Temperature stratification with convection in stellar interiors

In stellar interiors the densities are very high and we therefore
expect very efficient convective energy transport in convectively unstable
regions. For the pressure scale height we also find large values because of
high temperatures. A value / ~ H = R/10 appears to be a reasonable
estimate.
According to equation (6.16) the amount of convective energy transport
can be described by

JIFC = pcpTVg[-\ (6.44)

with
. _ dT (dT\
A g r aAd r = — - —
d^ \dz/ b u
In deep layers the gas bubbles are large and /ccm is very large because of the
high density. The gas bubbles are therefore optically very thick, the energy
exchange is minute (F » 1) and (d77dz)bu = (d77dz)ad.
 Temperature stratification in stellar interiors 75
Solving equation (6.44) for A grad Tgives us the difference between the
adiabatic gradient and the average temperature gradient. We find
(A grad T)3/2 = 7iFcT3/2/[cpPTVg(l/2)2] (6.45)
We know that the convective flux must be less than the total energy flux,
i.e. Fc < F. We can therefore say
(A grad T)m < jtFT3/2/[cpPTVg(l/2)2] (6.46)
which gives an upper limit for A grad T.
The total flux to be transported can be calculated from the observed
surface flux and the radius. It must be

if r^R/2 (6.47)

We use cp — 5Rg/2ju and JU = 0.6, and find

p 8
2 JU 2

and

« 2g(surface) ~ 104 (6.48)

For some interior point we very roughly estimate Pg ~ 1015 dyn cm 2 ,

r=107Kand

\2) 4 x 102

We then derive for solar values of Teif, R and g

(A grad T)m «= — 2 x 10 x T ^ 24 3/2

v s ;
5 x 1015 x 102 x 1018

and (A grad T)312 < 10" 14 or A grad T < 10" 10 . This has to be compared
with the average temperature gradient in the star which can be estimated
to be dT/dz - TJR - 107/10n « 10~4. A grad T is much smaller than
d77dr. We therefore find in stellar interiors

f f or f
1 0 " 6 x ^ or ^~[^P\
<10 (6.49)
dz \dz/ a d dz dz \dz/ a d
76 Theory of convective energy transport
As discussed previously the temperature gradient can never be exactly
equal to the adiabatic one, because then convection would stop, but within
our calculation accuracy the actual temperature gradient and the adiabatic
one are equal.
In the top layers of the outer convection zone the radiative energy
exchange is rather large (the optical depths of the rising and falling gas
bubbles are not very large) and the temperature stratification deviates by
only a little from the radiative equilibrium stratification. The deeper we go
into the outer convection zone, the larger the density and the characteristic
length and the more efficient is the convective energy transport. The
deviations from the radiative equilibrium stratification becomes larger and
finally the adiabatic temperature gradient is approached. The temperature
increase with depth is reduced by the convective energy transport.

6.7 Convective overshoot

In the preceding sections we saw that a rising bubble will be
accelerated by the buoyancy force as long as it has a higher temperature
than its surroundings. Generally we find that its temperature difference
with respect to the surroundings keeps increasing as long as the radiative
temperature gradient inwards is greater than the adiabatic one, i.e. as long
as the layer in the star is convectively unstable, i.e. up to the top of the
convection zone. It therefore reaches the top of the convectively unstable
zone with a positive ATand an upward velocity. Because of the positive AT
it is still accelerated when it reaches the boundary of the unstable region
and thus overshoots (see Fig. 6.6). Beyond this boundary its AT will,
however, decrease, the acceleration becomes smaller, and finally zero
when AT has decreased to zero. Only when AT becomes negative will the
bubble experience a negative acceleration and finally come to rest. We
may therefore always expect a fair amount of overshoot. The exact
amount depends on how fast the AT decreases, which depends on how
stable the overlying stable region is, and also on the efficiency of the
energy exchange between the bubble and the surroundings, which be-
comes important at the upper boundary of the outer convection zone.
The overshoot of the convective bubbles into the overlying stable region
is the reason why we see granulation in the convectively stable solar
photosphere.
The corresponding situation for the lower boundary of the convection
zone is shown schematically in Fig. 6.7.
 Convective v. radiative energy transport 77

6.8 Convective versus radiative energy transport

Without detailed calculations we can estimate the largest amount
of convective energy transport possible. As we just saw, for extremely
efficient convection the actual temperature gradient V approaches the
adiabatic one which can be small but never 0. For a given temperature
gradient the radiative energy flux is given by equation (3.7) and is
Fr oc dT/dz > (d77dz)ad. In the case of radiative equilibrium the tempera-
ture gradient is given by (d77dz)rad and JIFT = LIAnr2 = JIF. We therefore
find that

Vad
(6.50)
rad

If ^ad « Vrad then FT« F, but even then we never transport all the
energy by convection. In large fractions of the convection zone the
radiative temperature gradient is only somewhat larger than the adiabatic
one; we therefore usually still transport a large fraction of the energy by

Fig. 6.6. Shows schematically the temperature stratification T(z) of the stellar
atmosphere at the surface of the convection zone (thick solid line) and the adiabatic
temperature stratification (thin solid line). The upper boundary of the convection zone
occurs at the depth zb where d77dz = (d77dz)ad. A rising bubble may follow the path
indicated by the dashed line. At the upper boundary of the convection zone at z b the
bubble still has AT > 0 and is still being accelerated up to the depth z e, for which
AT = 0. Due to its inertia it still continues to move upwards but obtains now AT < 0 and
is braked. It finally comes to rest at a point z0 < ze, i.e. much higher than the upper
boundary of the convection zone. Energy exchange reduces the overshoot distance.
78 Theory of convective energy transport
radiation. Only in the top layers of the outer hydrogen convection zone
where Vrad » Vad do wefindthat almost all of the energy is transported by
convection. For these layers we can then give a close upper limit for the
convective velocities by writing JZFC = oT^f and making use of equations
(6.16) and (6.17) (see also Volume 2).

Lower boundary
of convection zone

Braking

-Acceleration

Fig. 6.7. Shows schematically the temperature stratification T(z) of the atmosphere at
the bottom of the convection zone (thick solid line). Also shown is the adiabatic
temperature stratification Tad (thin solid line). The lower boundary of the convection
zone occurs at the depth zb where d77dz = (d77dz)ad.
A falling bubble follows an adiabatic temperature change Tb(T) (long dashes). It
arrives at the lower boundary of the convection zone zb with a negative AT and
continues to be accelerated down to the depth ze where its AT = 0. Due to its inertia it
continues to fall but now obtains a positive A Tin the convectively stable region. Its
motion is braked and itfinallycomes to rest. A bubble falling from a larger height
follows the line Tb(t) (dotted line) and overshoots even further.
 7

Depths of the outer convection

zones

7.1 General discussion

Our next question is: how deep are the outer convection zones and
which stars have them? The answer is not simple because the depth of the
unstable region depends on the efficiency of the convective energy
transport. Qualitatively we can understand this in the following way.
In Fig. 7.1 we show schematically the radiative equilibrium temperature
stratification in the outer layers of a convectively unstable zone. As we
pointed out earlier convection sets in when hydrogen begins to ionize. For
such temperatures Vad decreases and K increases. The adiabatic tempera-
ture gradient returns to its normal value of Vad ~ 0.4 when hydrogen and
helium are completely ionized. We are then dealing again with a monato-
mic gas in which any heat energy supplied is used to increase the kinetic
energy, i.e. the temperature, of the gas. We find that for complete
ionization the absorption coefficient also decreases, because the electrons
which could absorb in the continuum are removed, at least from hydrogen
and helium. For the remaining atoms we saw that for high temperatures
the average K generally decreases for deeper layers as K °C T~25. In a
qualitative way we can therefore say that the lower boundary of the outer
convection zones occur at the layer where the ionization of the most
abundant elements is nearly complete.
The degree of ionization can be calculated from the Saha equation:
N+ 2u+ (2jtmekT)3/2 1
exp (-XioJkT) - (7.1)
— = U n
N u n
where N+ indicates the number of ionized particles and TV the number of
neutral particles. (Of course, we can write down a similar equation for
7V+ +IN+.) u+ and u are the so-called partition functions for the ion and the
atom respectively, which describe the distribution of the electrons over the
different energy levels of the ion or atom (see Volume 2; me = electron
mass).
79
80 Depths of the outer convection zones
The larger Tis, the greater is the ratio N+IN which means the greater
the degree of ionization. The larger the electron density ne, the smaller the
ratio N+/N. For larger electron densities we need higher temperatures to
reach the same degree of ionization achievable for lower n e with a lower
temperature.
From the Saha equation we can calculate the relation between tempera-
ture and pressure for which the ionization of helium is about, say, 99 per
cent complete. For increasing pressures we need higher temperatures to
achieve this degree of ionization. In Fig. 7.1 we have schematically
indicated the relation between pressure and temperature for which the
ionization of helium is 99 per cent complete.
We have also indicated the radiative equilibrium temperature stratifi-
cation which would be obtained if convective energy transport were
unimportant in spite of convective instability. At the point where this
curve intersects with the complete ionization line the temperature reaches

T T 2

99% ionized

Partly neutral

8000 ^ =

1 1 I I

Fig. 7.1. The radiative equilibrium temperature stratification TTad plotted schematically
as a function of depth z (solid line). Also shown are qualitatively the temperature
stratifications for inefficient convective energy transport, Tcl (dashed line), and for
efficient convection, Tc2 (dotted line). Hydrogen and helium are nearly completely
ionized for temperatures above a line T{(z) in the T(z) plane as indicated by the long
dashes. (For deeper values with higher Pg, larger Tare required according to the Saha
equation; see Volume 2.) The intersection of the temperature stratification with this line
shows the lower boundary of the hydrogen convection zone. For more efficient
convection fhe boundary occurs at a deeper layer.
 Dependence on Teff 81
values for which convective instability seizes. The intersection point at
depth Z/ o therefore marks the lower boundary of the convectively unstable
region. For radiative equilibrium stratification wefindthat this happens at
Pg = Pg0 and T = To. The depth of the convectively unstable region is
given by d0 if the stratification remains the same as in radiative equilib-
rium.
We now take convective energy transport into account, which decreases
the necessary radiative energy transport and therefore leads to a smaller
temperature increase with increasing depth. The temperature stratifi-
cation is then as indicated by the dashed line in Fig. 7.1. The line for
complete ionization intersects the temperature stratification line at a
higher pressure because the temperature required for ionization is now
only reached at a greater depth z/?1. For this higher pressure we also need a
somewhat higher temperature than in the case of radiative equilibrium
stratification. The depth of the convection zone is therefore given by
d1> d0. For very efficient convective energy transport the required
radiative flux is even smaller and the temperature increase is still smaller.
We may then find a temperature stratification as shown by the dotted line.
The intersection of the ionization line with the temperature stratification
line occurs at even larger depth, z /j2, and the depth of the convection zone
increases even further to d2. The largest possible depth occurs for
adiabatic temperature stratification. Thus convection extends the region of
convective instability.
The differences in depth obtained for different efficiencies of convective
energy transport are not small. When Unsold (1931) studied the depth of
the solar outer convection zone using radiative equilibrium stratification
he found a depth of 2000 km, while Biermann (1937), assuming adiabatic
temperature stratification, determined a depth of 200 000 km.
The calculated convective energy transport increases with increasing
values for the assumed characteristic length /; therefore the calculated
depth of the convection zone also increases with increasing values for /. We
could in principle determine the proper value for / if we could measure the
depth of the convection zone. We will come back to this question in
Section 7.4.

7.2 Dependence of convection zone depths on r eff

In Chapter 3 we derived Fr = ^(dB/dr) with r = JQ Kcm dz. For
stellar atmospheres with Fr = F = aT^/jt = const., we find by integration
B = \Fx + const. With B = oT4/jt we derive
82 Depths of the outer convection zones
(7.2)
with T\r = 0) ~ \Tlit (see Volume 2).
For Teff ~ 5800 K, as in the sun, hydrogen starts to ionize for
T ~ 6000 K and Pg ~ 105 dyn cm" 2. For higher gas pressures higher tem-
peratures are needed. For stars with lower Teff the temperature increases
more slowly with optical depth r as seen from equation (7.2). For the lower
temperatures the absorption coefficients Kcm are smaller; therefore a given
optical depth r and a given temperature is reached only at greater depth z
where the gas pressures are larger. For lower effective temperatures we
therefore find the onset of hydrogen ionization at deeper layers with higher
pressures. For higher pressures the convective energy transport becomes
more efficient. In Fig. 7.2 we plot schematically the temperature versus
pressure stratifications for main sequence stars of different Teff. For lower

T
^"eff 2
99% ionized 7"eff 1

t _
\
Partly neutral

^eff 1 -^ 7"eff 2

6000
yy^^

1 1 I

Fig. 7.2. Shows schematically the temperature stratifications of two stars with different
Teff, Teff (star 1) > 7eff(star 2). The solid lines show the radiative equilibrium
temperature stratifications. For the lower reff the temperature increases more slowly
with depth z. Also shown are the temperature stratifications with convective energy
transport (short dashes). We also have plotted schematically the line above which
hydrogen and helium are completely ionized (long dashes). Convective instability sets in
for T ~ 6000 K. For the hotter star this occurs at zu y, for the cooler star it occurs at a
larger depth zu 2- For star 1, with the larger Teff, convection sets in at a lower pressure
and lower density than for star 2. Convective energy transport is therefore less efficient
in star 1 than in star 2. The lower boundary of the convective zone of star 1 occurs at a
higher layer with z = zlx; that for star 2 occurs at zz 2- Star 1 has a convection zone with
depth di, while for star 2 the depth is d2 > dx.
 Dependence on chemical abundances 83

effective temperatures we find higher pressures in the convection zones

which leads to more efficient convection and smaller temperature gradi-
ents. The ionization is completed only at layers with higher temperatures
and higher pressures at larger depths. The depths of the outer convection
zones increase. For very cool main sequence stars the outer convection
zones may perhaps extend down to the center. The question is still under
debate.
For stars with higher effective temperatures we consequently find lower
pressures in the atmosphere because a given optical depth occurs at a
higher layer due to the higher atmospheric absorption coefficients. At a
given optical depth we also have higher temperatures because of the
higher Teff (see equation 7.2). The ionization of hydrogen therefore starts
higher in the atmosphere. For early F stars the convectively unstable
region may start as high as at r = 0.2. For such low pressures the
convective energy transport becomes inefficient. For TQii ~ 7600 K at
spectral type A9 or F0 the temperature stratification no longer differs from
the radiative equilibrium stratification and the convection zones become
very thin.

7.3 Dependence of convection zone depths on chemical abundances

If element abundances change, the depth of the convection zone
also changes. For higher helium abundances the pressure in the atmos-
phere increases as does the electron pressure. The ionization of helium will
therefore be completed only at a higher temperature, deeper in the
atmosphere. We expect a deeper convection zone for helium-rich stars.
For cool metal-poor stars the electron pressure in the atmospheres is
decreased and the absorption coefficient is therefore decreased. Wefindat
a given optical depth a larger gas pressure. The pressure in the outer
convection zones is also larger and convective energy transport therefore
becomes more efficient. For thin convection zones the depth increases.
For thick convection zones it appears, however, that another effect
becomes important. In Chapter 4 we discussed how for temperatures
above a few hundred thousand degrees the absorption of heavy elements is
most important. Metal-rich stars therefore have a larger K. This increase in
K increases the radiative temperature gradient and thereby increases the
convective instability. For metal-poor stars this absorption is reduced and
hence the convective instability in this region may be reduced. Spite and
Spite (1982) found that for metal-poor stars the depths of the convection
zones are smaller than for solar abundance stars.
84 Depths of the outer convection zones
1A The lithium problem
As we discussed in the previous sections the depth we derive for
the outer convection zones depends on the assumed efficiency of convec-
tive energy transport, i.e. on the value assumed for the characteristic
length /. If wefinda way to determine the depth of the convection zone we
can determine the correct value for /. This is of course important to know
because in many areas of the HR diagram the computed stellar structure
depends very sensitively on the assumed value of /. Fortunately nature has
provided us with some information about the depth of this unstable zone.
Because of the convective motions the material in the convection zone
proper is thoroughly mixed in a rather short time; for the sun it turns out to
be of the order of one month. Since the rising material has a positive AT
when it arrives at the upper boundary of the convection zone it will
overshoot beyond the upper boundary of the convection zone as discussed
in Section 6.7. At the bottom of the convection zone the same arguments
apply to the falling gas which will overshoot into the stable region below
the convection zone proper (see Fig. 6.7). The overshoot velocities are
expected to decrease probably exponentially with increasing depth, poss-
ibly with a scale of the order of a pressure scale height or less. Accurate
calculations are not available at this moment. In any case we may expect
that there is some slow mixing of the material in the convection zone with
the material below the convection zone proper. This is important when we
look at the observed abundances of lithium in stellar atmospheres. Let us
look at the example of the sun. For temperatures above 2 x 106 K the Li6
nuclei are destroyed by nuclear reactions with protons, i.e.
Li6 + H 1 -> He4 + He3
Li7 burns at somewhat higher T, namely T > 2.4 x 106 K by the reaction
Li7 + H1 -» 2He4
Clearly the lithium we see at the solar surface is not in surroundings at 2
million degrees, but if, due to convection, the whole outer regions down to
the layers with temperatures of 2 million degrees are mixed, then Li 6 is
mixed down to layers which are hot enough to destroy it. This means that if
the convection zone reaches down to such high temperature regions Li6 is
destroyed in a time which is very short in comparison with the solar age of
4.5 x 109 years. Since we do not observe any Li6 in the solar spectrum, the
convection zone must extend to layers with temperatures of 2 million
degrees. On the other hand we do observe a weak Li7 line, but the solar Li7
abundance is reduced by about a factor of 100 compared with the
 Lithium problem 85
abundance observed in meteorites and in the most Li-rich stars, the very
young T Tauri stars. It appears that the convection zone proper does not
quite reach down to the layer with a temperature of 2.4 million degrees
though some very slow, probably overshoot, mixing with surface material
still occurs, which reduces the Li 7 abundance on a time scale of 109 years.
Other mixing processes may also have to be considered.
Assuming / = H one calculates that the convection zone proper reaches
down to 2 million degrees; for / = 2Hit would extend to 3 million degrees,
which appears to be incompatible with the presence of any Li 7 in the solar
atmosphere. For / - / / w e find the right conditions: Li 6 is destroyed on a
short time scale, but only slow overshoot mixing reaches the layer where
Li 7 is destroyed.
In other stars the lithium abundances can also be studied. No Li 6 has
been detected in any of the main sequence stars, but Li 7 abundances have
been determined for many stars. Ages of stars can be determined if they
occur in clusters (see Section 8.10). For other main sequence stars ages can
be determined from the slight increase in luminosity (see Sections 14.2 and
13.1). These studies show that for all main sequence stars cooler than F0
stars the Li is destroyed on a long time scale, which seems to decrease
somewhat for cooler stars because of the increase in the depth of the
convection zone. However, we are in trouble if we want to understand the
observations for F stars, for which we calculate that convection zones do
not reach down to layers with temperatures of 2 million degrees, nor do we
expect slow overshoot mixing down to layers with 2.4 million degrees. For
these stars convective mixing cannot be the explanation for lithium
destruction. The observation by Boesgaard and Tripicco (1986) that in
some young cluster stars the surface lithium depletion is largest for stars
with spectral types around F5 presents us with another puzzle. Perhaps
rotation induced mixing or diffusion (see Volume 1) is important.
 8
Energy generation in stars

8.1 Available energy sources

So far we have only derived that, because of the observed thermal

equilibrium, the energy transport through the star must be independent of
depth as long as there is no energy generation. The energy ultimately has
to be generated somewhere in the star in order to keep up with the energy
loss at the surface and to prevent the star from further contraction. The
energy source ultimately determines the radius of the star.
Making use of the condition of hydrostatic equilibrium we estimated the
internal temperature but we do not yet know what keeps the temperature
at this level. In this chapter we will describe our present knowledge about
the energy generation which prevents the star from shrinking further.
First we will see which energy sources are possible candidates. In
Chapter 2 we talked about the gravitational energy which is released when
the stars contract. We saw that the stars must lose half of the energy
liberated by contraction before they can continue to contract. We might
therefore suspect that this could be the energy source for the stars.
The first question we have to ask is how much energy is actually needed
to keep the stars shining. Each second the sun loses an amount of energy
which is given by its luminosity, L = 3.96 x 1033 erg s"1, as we discussed in
Chapter 1. From the radioactive decay of uranium in meteorites we can
find that the age of these meteorites is about 4.5 x 109 years. We also find
signs that the solar wind has been present for about the same time. These
observations together provide convincing evidence that the sun has existed
for at least that long and that it has been shining for that long. Studies of
different layers of sedimentation in old rock layers give us information
about the climate on Earth over several billions of years; these indicate
that the climate on Earth has not been vastly different from the present
climate. From this we gather that the sun must have been shining with
about the same energy for a major fraction of the time that the Earth has
86
 Nuclear energy sources 87

existed, namely for most of 4.5 x 109 years. We may then conclude that
the Sun over its lifetime has lost an amount of energy which is roughly
given by
£ 0 = L x 4 . 5 x 109 years = 4 x 1033 erg s"1 x 4.5 x 109 x 3 x 107 s
= 5.4x 1050erg
In Chapter 2 we calculated that the gravitational energy release due to the
contraction of the Sun to its present size is
GM2 7 x 10"8 x 4 x 1066
= 4 x 1048 erg
7x
The available energy from this energy source is a factor of 100 too small to
keep the sun shining for 4.5 x 109 years. From the gravitational energy the
sun could survive for only 107 years (the Kelvin-Helmholtz time scale, as
we said earlier). Gravitational energy probably supplied the solar lumino-
sity for the very young sun but it cannot now be the solar energy source.
Let us make a rough estimate whether any chemical energy source could
supply enough energy. For the most optimistic estimate let us assume that
the sun would consist of hydrogen and oxygen in the best possible
proportions such that all solar material could be burned to water vapor. A
water molecule has a molecular weight of 18raH = 18 x 1.66 x 10~24 g =
3.5 x 10"23 g. In the burning process (2 x 1033 g)/(3.5 x 10"23 g) =
6 x 1055 molecules could then be formed. Suppose that in each formation
of a molecule an energy of the order of 10 eV = 10~ n erg is liberated. The
total energy available from such a chemical process (which fuels the best
rockets) would then be 6 x 1044 erg. This amount of energy is still a factor
of 104 smaller than the available gravitational energy, and would last only
for about 5000 years. We have to look for much more powerful energy
sources. The most powerful energy source we can think of is nuclear
energy.

8.2 Nuclear energy sources

Looking at the masses of atoms we find that an energy of about 1
per cent of the rest mass of the protons can be gained by combining
hydrogen into heavier nuclei. This can easily be seen from Table 8.1 in
which we have listed the atomic weights of some of the more important
elements. The atomic weight of hydrogen is 1.008 172, defining the atomic
weight of O16 as 16. In these mass units the atomic weight of the He4
isotope is 4.003 875, while four times the atomic weight of hydrogen is
88 Energy generation in stars
Table 8.1. Isotopic masses and mass defects

A Isotope Me 12 ) MO16) AX^H Am Am/m

1 H1 1.007 852 1.008172

4 He 4 4.002 603 4.003 875 4.032 688 0.0288 0.0071
12 C 12 12.000000 12.003 815 12.098 064 0.0942 0.0078
Q16
16 15.994 915 16.000000 16.130 752 0.1307 0.0081
20 Ne 20 19.992 440 19.998 796 20.163 440 0.1646 0.0082
56 Fe 56 55.934 934 55.952 717 56.457 632 0.5049 0.0089

4.032 688. In the process of making one He4 nucleus out of four protons,
0.0288 mass units are lost. This mass difference has been transformed into
energy according to Einstein's relation
£ = Amc2 (8.1)
The mass fraction which is transformed into energy in this process is then
0.0288/4 = 0.007, or 0.7 per cent. We know that three-quarters of the
stellar mass is hydrogen. If stars can find a way to combine all these
hydrogen atoms to helium a fraction of 0.5 per cent of the stellar mass
could be transformed into energy. If the stars could manage to combine all
their hydrogen and helium into Fe 56 nuclei then an even larger fraction of
the mass could be transformed into energy. From Table 8.1 we calculate
that the mass of 56 protons is 56.457 63 mass units while Fe56 has a mass of
55.9527. In this fusion process a mass fraction of 0.9 per cent of the stellar
mass for a pure hydrogen star could be transformed into energy, which
means 20 per cent more than by the fusion of hydrogen into helium. This
energy could be available to heat the material in the stellar nuclear
reaction zones from where the energy can then be transported to the
surface where it is lost by radiation.
Let us estimate whether this energy source is sufficient to provide the
energy needed to keep the sun shining for 5 x 109 years. The available
energy would then be
Amc2 = 0.009 x Me2 - 0.01 x (2 x 1033 g ) x ( 9 x 1020 cm2 s"2)
= 2 x 1052 erg
We calculated previously that the sun has radiated about 6 x 1050 erg
during its lifetime up until now. From the available nuclear energy sources
it could then in principle live 30 times as long as it has lived already if it
could convert all its mass into Fe by nuclear processes. Actually, the stars
leave the main sequence already when they have consumed only about 10
 Tunnel effect 89
per cent of their fuel. The sun will stay on the main sequence only for about
1010 years. No more efficient energy source than nuclear energy can be
thought of unless the sun shrank to a much smaller radius. We can estimate
how small the radius of the sun would have to become if the gravitational
energy release were to exceed the nuclear energy which is in principle
available. We then have to require that

or
7 x 10~8 x 4 x 1066
> 2 x 1052
~R

or

7 ? < ^ l x l Q
2 x 1052
This means it would have to shrink to a density
M 2 x 10233 = 0.5 x 1012 g cm 3
= 5 x 105 tonne cm 3
4xlO
Such densities can be obtained, but only in neutron stars. As a normal star
the sun has no larger energy source than its nuclear energy. The question
now is whether nuclear reactions can actually take place in stellar interiors.

8.3 The tunnel effect

In order for two nuclei to fuse they have to get very close together.
Each nucleus, /, has, however, a positive nuclear charge Zte. There are
therefore strong repulsive forces between two nuclei. In order to bring two
charged nuclei together to a small distance r against the Coulomb force
they need an energy
Z x Z 2e ( ,
•^Coulomb " V/ v° /
r
where Zxe and Z2e are the nuclear charges of the two particles involved.
For fusion the particles have to get sufficiently close to allow nuclear
forces to act, which means they have to get closer than about 10~13 cm.
With r = 10"13 cm we calculate
90 Energy generation in stars

^coulomb = ^jpfi- ~ 2 x 10"6 erg - 1000 keV

In a star the kinetic energies of the particles is the only energy available to
overcome these Coulomb barriers. The average kinetic energy of a
particle is
Ekin = \kT = | x 1.4 x 10"16 x 107 erg = 2 x 10"9 erg
for a temperature of 107 K. Obviously the particles are short by a factor
1000 of the necessary kinetic energy. We know from the Maxwell velocity
distribution that there are always particles which have larger than average
energies E but their number decreases as N(E) oc Q~ElkT. For an energy
which is roughly a factor of 1000 larger than the average energy the
number N(E) therefore decreases by a factor of roughly e" 1000 or 10~430.
How many particles are then in the solar interior with such an energy?
The total number of particles N in the Sun is approximately TV =
mass/raH = 2 x 1033/1.7 x 10"24 « 1057. The chance of finding even one
particle with a kinetic energy large enough to overcome the Coulomb
barrier is essentially zero. How then can the charged particles ever get
close enough for fusion? Quantum mechanics has shown that there is a
very small but nonzero possibility that even a particle with rather low
kinetic energy can penetrate the Coulomb barrier because of the tunnel
effect, as we will see below.
In Fig. 8.1 we have plotted qualitatively the Coulomb potential V(r) in
the neighborhood of a charged nucleus; i.e. V{r) is the energy which a
charged particle has to have in order to get to the distance r near the
nucleus. Very close to the nucleus (i.e. r < r2 ~ 10~13 cm) nuclear forces
start to attract the other nucleus. Very close to the nucleus the particle
therefore gains energy when coming closer, and the potential decreases
steeply. The particle falls into the so-called potential well. In order to
calculate quantum mechanically the probability of finding the particle at a
distance r we have to solve the Schrodinger equation for the ip function for
the oncoming particle in the potential of the nucleus.
The Schrodinger equation for \p is

=0 (8.3)

The solutions are exponentials. As long as i? kin > V(r) the exponent is
imaginary and the solution for the t/j function is a wave function with
amplitude Ao (see Fig. 8.1). In the region r <rx where V(r) > Ekin the
 Tunnel effect 91
exponent becomes negative, the character of the wave function changes to
an exponentially decreasing function with the exponent being pro-
portional to — V(V — Ekin). For r <r2 we find again Ekin > V(r) (see Fig.
8.1) and the \p function. Its derivative must match the value of the
exponential at r = r2. For r < r2 the ip function has an amplitude At which
is much smaller than AQ. The amplitude for the \p function for r<r2
determines the probability of finding the particle close to the nucleus,
which means it determines the penetration probability Pp(E) for the
particle to penetrate the Coulomb barrier, or to 'tunnel' through the
Coulomb barrier. For small values of Ekin the distance rx — r2 becomes

Fig. 8.1. Shows schematically the Coulomb potential V{r) (solid line) for one nucleus in
the neighborhood of another nucleus at r = 0. V(r) is the energy which is needed by a
particle coming from infinity to get to the distance rx working against the repulsive
Coulomb force. For distances r < r2 nuclear forces attract the approaching particle and
the potential becomes negative. This is the so-called potential well.
If the particle has a kinetic energy Ekin then according to classical theory it could not
approach closer than rx. For r > rx where Ekin > V the \p function for the particle is a
sine wave with amplitude Ao according to quantum theory. For r < rx the ip function is
an exponential function decreasing towards smaller r. At r2 it has a value At. For r < r2
we find again Ekin > V and the \p function is again a wave but now with amplitude A v
For larger Ekin the distance rx — r2 decreases and the ratio AJAQ increases.
92 Energy generation in stars

large and therefore At = xp(r2) becomes very small; the penetration

probability is then extremely small. For larger energies the penetration
probability is larger. We calculate

(8.4)
h

The Coulomb barrier increases with increasing Z1Z2e2, and therefore the
tunneling probability decreases exponentially with this term. Because of
this exponential, nuclear reactions between nuclei with low values of Z,
are the only ones which can occur at relatively low temperatures. This
means that reactions between protons seem to have the best chance.
We also see the factor 1/v in the exponent telling us that the penetration
probability becomes larger for larger velocities when the exponent be-
comes smaller. As we saw above for larger velocities, i.e. for larger kinetic
energies of the particles, the width of the potential wall becomes narrower,
the decay of the xp function less steep and the amplitude of the xp function
in the center of the Coulomb barrier remains larger, and so the penetration
probability is larger.
The chance of penetrating the Coulomb barrier alone does not yet
completely describe the probability of a nuclear reaction. Nuclei may
come close together but not react if there are other problems for the
reaction. For instance, a nuclear reaction between two protons, which
gives the smallest value for the exponent in equation (8.4), has an
extremely small chance of taking place because there is no stable helium
nucleus with two positive nuclear charges and no neutrons in it. The only
possible nucleus with mass number 2 is the deuteron, which has one proton
and one neutron. For this nucleus to form one of the two protons has to
become a neutron by emitting a positron and this has to happen while the
two protons are close together in the potential well. The decay of a proton
into a neutron and a positron is a process due to the weak interaction and is
therefore a rare event. The probability of a deuteron forming during a
collision between two protons is therefore quite small; nevertheless it does
happen even for relatively low temperatures, like 4 million degrees.
However, the reaction cross-section is so small that it can never be
observed in the laboratory. For T = 1.4 x 107 K and pX ^ 100 V g cm"3
(X = fraction or hydrogen by mass), as we have in the center of the sun,
it would take 1.4 x 1010 years = 5 x 1017 s before a given proton, which
moves around, reacts with any other proton. (This is the time after
which all protons in the center have reacted with another proton, after
 Proton-proton chain 93
which time the hydrogen in the center is exhausted. This is then the
lifetime of the sun on the main sequence.)

8.4 The proton-proton chain

It turns out that the easiest nuclear reaction is the reaction between
a deuteron and a proton. Both nuclear charges are 1, and the deuteron and
proton can directly form a stable helium nucleus with mass 3. This reaction
can happen with temperatures around 2 million degrees. For the con-
ditions in the center of the Sun it takes only 6 seconds for a deuteron to
react with a proton in the hydrogen gas. There are, however, only a few
deuteron nuclei available, so the number of these processes is very small;
they are nevertheless very important once a proton-proton reaction has
taken place and formed a deuteron.
The probability for proton-proton fusion itself does not depend on the
velocity of the particles. Since the product ZXZ2 is quite small the
probability for the tunnel effect is not very strongly dependent on tem-
perature for temperatures around 107 K. In order to calculate the number
of proton-proton reactions per cm3 s, we have to sum the contributions
from protons with different velocities, taking into account the number of
particles, N(vx), within any given velocity interval dvx as given by the
Maxwell velocity distribution

\^\vx (8.5)

Here x is the direction along the line connecting the two particles. Nis the
total number of particles per cm3. The final probability for any nuclear
reaction of the kind /, the reaction rate Rh is then given by the product of
the Maxwell velocity distribution with the penetration probability for a
given velocity and the nuclear reaction probability which is often ex-
pressed as a reaction cross-section Q. We thus have

PP(ZUZ2, vx)QdN(vx) (8.6)

vx=0

In Fig. 8.2 we show qualitatively the two probability functions dN(vx)

and Pp(vx). The function dN(vx) decreases exponentially with increasing
vx, while the penetration probability increases exponentially with v~x.
The product of these two functions has a fairly sharp peak at the velocity
vG, the so-called Gamow peak, which determines the value of the integral
in equation (8.6). Most reactions take place between particles with relative
94 Energy generation in stars
velocity vG. For many purposes we can therefore perform calculations as if
all the nuclear reactions of a given kind occur with the same velocity, v G,
the velocity at which we find the Gamow peak.
Once two protons have combined to form a deuteron, D 2 , further
reactions quickly follow. At 'low' temperature the following reactions
happen, called the PPI chain:
PPI: H 1 + H 1 - ^ D 2 + e + +v (1.4 x 1010 years)
D 2 + H 1 -> He 3 + y (6 s)
and then
He 3 + He 3 -> He4 + H 1 + H1 (106 years) (8.7a)
where the reaction times given apply to a single nucleus traversing the
solar interior with T ~ 1.4 x 106 K and p ~ 100 g cm~3 and a solar chemi-
cal composition. The v indicates the emission of a neutrino.
The reaction chain can also end in the following ways:
PPII:
Be7 + e" Li7 + v
Li7 + H 1 He4 + He4 (8.7b)
or

AN

Fig. 8.2. Shows schematically the velocity distribution for the velocity component v x
i.e. AN(vx) (solid line). Also shown schematically is the velocity dependence of the
penetration probability Pp(vx) (long dashes). The product of the two functions has a
sharp peak, the so-called Gamow peak (dotted line, not drawn to scale).
 Carbon-nitrogen cycle 95

PPIII: Be 7 + H 1 - > B 8 + y
e + 4- v
(8.8)

The relative importance of the PPI and PPII chains depends on the
relative importance of the reactions of He 3 with He3 in PPI as compared to
the reactions He 3 with He 4 in PPII. For T> 1.4 x 107 K, He3 prefers to
react with He 4 . For lower Tthe PPI chain is more important.
The PPIII ending is never very important for energy generation, but it
generates high energy neutrinos. For the temperatures in the solar interior
the PPIII chain is very temperature sensitive because it involves reactions
of nuclei with Zt = 4. The number of high energy neutrinos generated by
these reactions is therefore very temperature dependent. If we could
measure the number of these high energy neutrinos they would give us a
very sensitive thermometer for the central temperatures of the sun. We
will come back to this problem in Section 18.6, when we discuss the solar
neutrino problem.
Since the neutrinos can escape freely from the sun without interacting
with the solar material their energy is lost for the solar heating. As the
neutrinos generated in the three chains have different energies different
fractions of the total energy are lost in this way for different interior
temperatures. For the three chains the different neutrino energy losses
amount to 1.9 per cent for the PPI chain, 3.9 per cent for the PPII chain
and 27.3 per cent for the PPIII chain.

8.5 The carbon-nitrogen cycle

For higher temperatures reactions involving nuclei with somewhat
higher Zt can become important if the reaction cross-sections are espe-
cially large, as in resonance reactions. Resonance reactions occur when
the kinetic energy of the captured nucleon coincides with an excited
energy level of the combined nucleus; this makes the formation of the
combined nucleus very easy.
In the carbon cycle the following reactions constitute the main cycle:

C 12 + H 1 —> N 1 3 H h y (106 years)

C13H - e + + V (14 min)
l^ ~r r l —> N 1 4 H h y (3 x 105 years)
96 Energy generation in stars
15
N 1 4 + H ' --> O
+y (3 x 10* years)
+ 15
O - -+N + e + v
15
(82 s)
N 1 5 + H x --+C
12
+ He 4 (104 years) (8.9)
The time estimates refer to the conditions given above, corresponding
to the solar interior (T = 1.4 x 107, p ~ 100). The net effect of the whole
chain of reactions is the formation of one He 4 from four H 1, while C12 is
recovered at the end. The total number of C, N and O nuclei does not
change in the process.
As in the PP cycle different endings are possible. N15 can also react in
the following way:

N 15 - fHUC) l 6 + Y
O 16 -fHUF 17 + y
F 17 -+C ) 17 + e + + v
O n - fHUN f14 + H e 4 (8.10)
N14 then enters the main cycle at line 4. This gives some increase in the
production of He 4 but this ending is only 4 x 10~4 times as frequent as the
main cycle. The main importance of this bi-cycle is a change in the O16 and
O17 abundances (see Section 8.9 and Chapter 13).

8.6 The triple-alpha reaction

For still higher temperatures, namely T ~ 108 K, a reaction

Be8 + He 4 -> C12 + 2y 4- 7.4 MeV

can take place. For the main CNO cycle we had Z±Z2 ^ 7, now ZXZ2 = 8.
Why do we need much higher temperatures for this reaction? The problem
is that Be8 is unstable to fission. It is very short lived. So how do we get Be8
for this reaction? In the fission process energy is gained, 95 keV. This
means in order to make Be 8 from two He 4 nuclei energy has to be put in,
exactly 95 keV. This is the inverse of an ionization process where energy is
gained by recombination and energy has to be put in for the ionization. Yet
there are always a few ions around; the number of ions is increasing with
increasing temperature, according to the Saha equation. Similarly, we find
an increasing number of Be8 nuclei (in this case the combined particle)
with increasing temperature.
 Element production in stars 97
For a temperature T = 108 K the average kinetic energy \kT is around
2 x 10" 8 erg. Since 1 erg = 6.24 x 1011 eV we find \kT « 12 keV. The
energy needed for the formation of Be 8 is only about a factor of 8 higher.
Let us look at the situation for the ionization of hydrogen which for
atmospheric pressures takes place when T ~ 10 000 K. At this tempera-
ture the average kinetic energy \kT is about 2 x 10~ 12 erg, or just about
1 eV. The ionization energy for hydrogen is 13.6 eV, yet the hydrogen is
ionized. Therefore with a recombination energy of 95 keV and a mean
kinetic energy of about 12 keV, we can still expect to find a sufficient
number of Be 8 in the equilibrium situation
He 4 + He 4 o Be 8 - 95 keV (8.11)
The number of Be 8 nuclei is always quite small but still large enough
such that some reactions
Be 8 + He 4 -> C 12 + 2y + 7.4 MeV (8.12)
can take place. The net effect of (8.11) and (8.12) is obviously to make one
C 12 from three He 4 nuclei, i.e. from three alpha particles. This reaction
is therefore called the triple-alpha reaction. The net energy gain is
7.4 MeV - 95 keV ~ 7.3 MeV.

8.7 Element production in stars

Observations tell us that low abundances of heavy elements are
seen in very old stars. We actually observe stars whose heavy element
abundances are reduced by a factor up to 104 as compared to the sun. On
the other hand, young stars have all heavy element abundances which are
not very different from solar abundances. This suggests that the abun-
dances of heavy elements increased during the formation and evolution of
the galaxy and that probably the first generation of stars had no heavy
elements at all. This is also suggested by cosmological studies which show
that during the high temperature phase of the big bang there was not
enough time to make any elements more massive that He 4 except for very
few Li nuclei. The very few Be 8 nuclei which probably were present were
far too few and the time much too short to make C12 in the triple-alpha
reaction.
The first generation of stars probably consisted only of hydrogen and
helium. The CNO cycle could therefore not occur, only the PP chains. It
was an important discovery of Hoyle that the triple-alpha reaction could
work in evolved stars because these stars have about 105 years available to
98 Energy generation in stars

make C12 in the triple-alpha reactions. Without this reaction we would

have no heavy elements, which means we would not exist. Once C12 is
formed then further captures of helium nuclei or alpha particles are
possible for increasing temperatures in the interiors of massive stars; then
nuclei up to Fe 56 can form. Clearly not all observed elements and isotopes
can be made by adding alpha particles. We also need captures of protons
and neutrons by the heavy nuclei, in order to build all the observed
elements up to uranium with a mass of 238 atomic mass units. In the course
of the late stages of evolution of massive stars conditions can be identified
under which the different processes can take place, though there are still
some important unsolved problems with respect to the details of the
processes.
Basically we feel certain that the elements more massive than He 4 were
all made in the hot interiors of evolved stars. Without the triple-alpha
reaction there would be only hydrogen and helium gas; no solid planets, no
life.

8.8 Comparison of different energy generation mechanisms

From Table 8.1, we know that the total amount of energy to be
gained from the triple-alpha reaction can only be around 10 per cent of
what can be gained from the fusion of four H 1 into one He 4 . In each fusion
process 4H1 -> He 4 we gain -26.2 MeV from the PP cycle and 25.0 MeV
from the CNO cycle (the difference being due to the different amounts of
neutrino energy lost). Considering that it takes three times as much mass
to form one C12 as it takes to form one He4 we find again that the energy
gain from the reaction 3 H e 4 ^ C 1 2 is 7.3 MeV/3 - 2.4 MeV per He4
nucleus as compared to 25 MeV from the CNO cycle, or just about 10 per
cent. A star with a given mass and luminosity can therefore live on this
energy source at most 10 per cent of the time it can live on hydrogen
burning.
As the stars on the main sequence live on hydrogen fusion, they can stay
there much longer than at any other place in the color magnitude diagram.
That is the reason why we find most stars on the main sequence. On the
other hand we also see that the hot and massive O and B stars can remain
on the main sequence only for a much shorter time than the cooler stars
because they use up their available fuel much faster; the cooler stars are
much more careful in using their fuel and can therefore survive much
longer.
 Comparison of different mechanisms 99
Fig. 8.3 shows how much energy is generated by the different mechan-
isms for different temperatures. Interior temperatures for the sun and for
some typical stars are also indicated.
For M dwarfs, i.e. cool stars, the energy generation is mainly due to the
PP chain. For the sun both the PP and the CNO cycles contribute, but
the PP chain is more important. For Sirius A, an AO V star with
reff ~ 10 000 K the CNO cycle is more important than the PP chain.
Triple-alpha reactions, also called helium burning, are not important for
'normal' stars on the main sequence except for the most massive ones.
Very high interior temperatures are needed.
We saw earlier that the temperature dependence of nuclear reactions is
actually an exponential one, but since the PP chain is only important for
low temperatures and the CNO cycle mainly for high temperatures, i.e.
T ^ 1.7 x 107 K, it is often convenient to approximate the actual tempera-
ture dependence by a simple power law. In this approximation we find that
the energy generation per gram second by the PP chain, £ pp, is given by

(8.13)

I I 1 1
+10
/

/CNO /

+5 /
Sirius A x
li
Is-
0

-5 -
I I 1
6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0
log
Fig. 8.3. The energy generation per gram is shown as a function of temperature for the
different nuclear processes. Solar interior densities and abundances are used for the
proton-proton (PP) and CNO reactions. For the triple-alpha reactions densities higher
by a factor 103 were used because these reactions only occur for T > 10 8 K when much
higher densities are found in stellar interiors. Also indicated are the conditions in the
centers of some main sequence stars. For low temperatures the proton-proton chain is
the most efficient mechanism even though it generates only small amounts of energy.
For the sun the PP chain is still more important than the CNO cycle. (Adapted from
Schwarzschild 1958b.)
100 Energy generation in stars

with v ~ 4. X is the abundance of hydrogen in mass fraction. For energy

generation by the CNO cycle, £cc, we find

(8.14)

where v depends somewhat on the temperature range which we are

considering but is usually v ~ 16 when the CNO cycle is important. The
difference in v for the PP and the CNO reactions expresses the fact that the
CNO cycle is much more temperature sensitive than the PP chain.
Z(C, N) gives the abundance of C or N in mass fractions. The number of
fusion processes per cm3 depends on the number of collisions between H1
and H 1 in the PP chain, or between C12 and H 1 or N14 and H1 in the CNO
cycle. £pp per cm3 therefore depends on n(H)n(H) <* p2X2, and the scc per
cm3 depends on n(H)n(N) oc (pX)pZ(N) oc p2XZ(N) or ecc oc /i(H)/i(C) oc
p2XZ{C). £p and ec in equations (8.13) and (8.14) are constants and are
determined by the reaction rates. The energy production per gram equals
the energy production per cm3 divided by the number of grams per cm3,
i.e. divided by p, which leads to (8.13) and (8.14).

8.9 Equilibrium abundances

In equations (8.7) and (8.9) we have given approximate values for
the times that are needed on average for one reaction to occur if we shoot
one heavy particle into a hydrogen gas at a density of pX = 100 and
T=Ux 106K.
Suppose the first reaction takes 106 years to form an N13 nucleus from
any given C12 atom and one H 1. The N13 will decay in 14 minutes. This
means that we have very little chance of finding an N 13 nucleus. It will
become C13 immediately and the next N13 will be formed only 106 years
later. C13 remains there for 3 x 105 years, so we have a much better chance
offindingit than we have offindingN13, but still, after C13 is gone, we will
have to wait 7 x 105 years before the next one is formed. No matter how
fast the reaction C13 + H 1 —> N14 + y goes we still have to wait more than
106 years for the first N14 to be created because it takes so long for the first
reaction. Once this N14 is formed it will on average stay around for a long
time, namely 3 x 108 years, before it is transformed into O 15. In the
meantime 300 additional N14 have been formed by the first reactions. The
abundance of N 14 is increased. The relative abundances of the particles
 Equilibrium abundances 101
involved in the CNO cycle are changed in the process, depending on the
reaction rates. The abundance of N 14 increases at the expense of the C12
abundance. The less probable a given reaction is, the larger will be the
abundance of the element which is waiting to make this reaction. On the
other hand we also see that the more N14 nuclei there are, the larger is the
chance that one of them will react and become O 15. If the relative
abundance of N14 to C12 has increased to 300 (C12 decreases, N14
increases) then each time one new N 14 is created by the first reactions in
the CNO cycle one N14 also disappears. The abundance of N14 no longer
changes. After about 3 x 108 years N14 has reached its equilibrium abun-
dance.
The equilibrium values are reached if the number of destruction
processes per unit of time for a given nucleus equals the number of
creation processes per unit of time. This means for instance for N14
abundances in equilibrium that
dN14
= C13 x reaction rate(C13 + H1) - N14 x reaction rate(N14 + H1)
dt
= 0
With the reaction rate being proportional to (reaction time)" 1 we have
according to the numbers given in equations (8.9)
C 13 N14 N 14 3 x 188
^ = = 00 or
or —^^ = = zz- = 1000 for equilibrium
5 8 13 5
3 x 10 3 x 10 C13
C 3 x 105
Or for the ratio of C12 to C13
C12 C13 C12 106
and
W =
^W cl3 = 3 ^
which leads to

C 12 C 13 C 12

As the reaction rates depend on the temperature the equilibrium abun-

dance ratios also depend somewhat on the temperature. In any case we
expect an increase in the nitrogen abundance and a decrease in the carbon
abundance in those stellar regions where the CNO cycle has been oper-
ating even if it contributes little to the energy generation. We therefore
expect an increase in the C13/C12 ratio also in the solar interior. In the solar
atmosphere this ratio is only about 0.01 but it can reach the value of 0.3 in
102 Energy generation in stars

those regions where the CNO cycle has been operating long enough
at temperatures around 1.4 x 107 K. For the equilibrium between the C12
to C13 abundances to be established we need about 106 years for
r ~ 1 . 4 x 107K.
If we find unusually high N14 and C13 abundances together we suspect
that we see material which once has been in those regions of a star in which
the CNO cycle has been operating. We do indeed find such anomalous
abundances in the atmospheres of most red giants and supergiants. We will
come back to this point in Chapter 18.

8.10 Age determination for star clusters

We saw in Section 8.1 that nuclear energy is the only energy source
in stars which is large enough to supply the stars with enough energy to
replenish what they lose by radiation. The available amount of nuclear
energy can be estimated from the mass defect, that is the amount of mass
lost when combining four hydrogen nuclei, or protons, to one helium
nucleus, or one alpha particle. We saw that 0.7 per cent of the mass is lost
in this process and converted to energy. When we combine this with the
knowledge (to be shown later) that the stars change in appearance after
they have transformed about 10 per cent of their hydrogen mass into
helium we can easily estimate how long the sun and all the main sequence
stars can remain in their present configuration. We find that the total
nuclear energy available on the main sequence is given by
^nuclear = Amc2 = 0.1M x 0.007c2 = 6.3 x 1017Merg (8.15)
This overestimates the available energy by a small amount because a
minor percentage is lost by means of escaping neutrinos, and also because
some of the mass is helium to start with.
In order to determine the time t for which this energy supply lasts we
have to divide it by the amount of energy which is used per unit of time; this
is given by the luminosity of the star. We find
^nuclear 6.3XlO17M<

For the sun we have Mo = 2 x 10 33 g, L o = 4 x 10 33 erg s" 1 . With this

we obtain

6.3 x 10 17 x 2 x 10 33 O i C .7 inl0
tQ = ^ s = 3.15 x 1 0 l 7 s ~ lO l() years
° 4 x 10 33
 Age determination for star clusters 103
10
The total lifetime of the sun on the main sequence is about 10 years. The
sun has already spent half of its lifetime on the main sequence.
For other stars we have to insert mass and luminosity into equation
(8.17). It is more informative if we use directly the observed mass-
luminosity relation

(8.17)

We then derive
M M 3.5 M -2.5
(8.18)
tO MTo M
O

For a star whose mass is ten times the solar mass, a Bl V star, the
lifetime on the main sequence is shorter by a factor of about 300 than that
of the sun. The Bl star evolves away from the main sequence after about
3 x 107 years or 30 million years. For the most massive stars the lifetime on
the main sequence is only about 1 million years! The most massive stars
which we see now must have been formed within the last million years!
What does this mean with respect to the appearance of cluster color
magnitude diagrams?
In Fig. 8.4 we show schematic color magnitude diagrams as expected for
different ages, looking only at main sequence stars. For a very young
cluster, 104 < age < 106 years, we expect to see the very massive stars on
the main sequence. Their contraction time is about 104 years. In the course
of their contraction half of the gravitational energy released has remained
in the star as thermal energy. At some point their internal energy and
temperature has become high enough such that nuclear fusion processes

10 6 years 107 years 10 1 0 years

-5 \ -5
V -5 -

0 - 0 - 0
MV MV
+5 - - +5 - +5 _
\ .

+ 10 - - 4-10 - + 10 -
V
+ 15 i
0
I
0.5
i
1.0
i
1.5
+ 15 i
0
I
0.5 1.0
I i
1.5
+ 15 I
0
l
0.5
i
1.0
\
1.5
B-V B-V B-V
Fig. 8.4. Expected main sequences in the color magnitude diagrams for clusters of
different ages are shown schematically. The age is indicated for each curve.
104 Energy generation in stars

can start. The energy loss is then made up by nuclear energy generation.
The star stops contracting. Its radius no longer changes. In the color
magnitude diagram it remains in the same position as long as the nuclear
energy generation can resupply the surface energy lost by radiation. The
star essentially does not change its appearance (except that it slowly
increases its brightness by about 0.5 magnitude). Since the stars remain at
this stage for the largest part of their lifetimes, this is the configuration in
which we find most of the stars. This is the main sequence stage of
evolution for the stars. The most massive stars, the so-called O stars, can
remain at this stage only for 106 years as we estimated. After 106 years they
disappear from the main sequence and become supergiants, as we shall see
in Chapter 15. Of course, after 106 years stars with small masses like the
sun have not even reached the main sequence. After 106 years the main
sequence only extends down to the A stars with B - V ~ 0.10, but the
hottest, O stars, have already started to disappear. After 107 years the O
stars have all disappeared from the main sequence, which extends now at
the upper end to BO stars and at the lower end to stars with B — V ~ 0.6,
i.e. to G stars like the sun. After 108 years the main sequence extends at

NGC 2362 - 1.0 * 10*

ersei
-6" - 10*10*

\ &SXI06

nodes

\ L6*IO8
^M67
iyodes*

Ih67
7M09

N
6 —

-at as
B-v -
Fig. 8.5. Shows a superposition of color magnitude diagrams for different galactic
clusters and the globular cluster M67. The distance moduli have been determined in
such a way that the main sequences match at the lower end. For the Pleiades the top of
the main sequence ends for early B stars indicating an age of about 108 years, while for
M67 the main sequence stops for early G stars (B - V ~ 0.60) like the sun. Its age must
be about 1010 years. H + P stands for Hyades and Praesepe. Adapted from Arp (1958).
 Age determination for star clusters 105

the lower end to the K stars with B - V ~ 0.9 but at the top it ends at stars
with ~8M O , the early B stars. For 109years it stops at the top at
B - V ~ 0, at the early A stars, and at 1010 years it extends only to early G
stars like the sun.
The upper termination point of the main sequence therefore gives us an
age estimate for such clusters. In Fig. 8.5 we show the superposition of the
color magnitude diagrams of a number of galactic clusters. We can easily
derive that the Pleiades star cluster must have been formed about 100
million years ago and the globular cluster M67 must be roughly 1010 years
old. This is, of course, only a rough estimate since we have used only the
approximate mass-luminosity relation, equation (8.17).
 Basic stellar structure equations

9.1 The temperature gradient

We now have available all the basic physics and also the basic
equations to discuss the temperature and pressure stratification in stars
from which the theoretical relations between mass and chemical compo-
sition as input parameters, on the one hand, and the radius, luminosity and
effective temperatures on the other hand, can be derived.
As discussed before the observed fact that most of the stars do not
change their temperatures measurably in time tells usjthat they must be in
thermal equilibrium. This requires that the luminosity L{r), which is the
total amount of energy passing through each spherical shell at the distance
r from the center, has to be constant throughout the star, except in those
layers where energy is generated. In such layers the newly generated
energy also has to be transported out, else the energy generating layer
would have to heat up. Thermal equilibrium therefore requires that

l
p(f)e(f) (9.1)
dr

L(r) includes radiative, convective and possibly conductive energy trans-

port. e{r) includes all kinds of energy generation. If the star is contracting
or expanding we have to include gravitational energy release (or consump-
tion) in e(r) (see Chapter 20).
In Chapter 8 we found for nuclear energy generation
s = eoPr (9.2)
where v — 4 for the proton-proton chain and where v ~ 16 for the CNO
cycle.
Equations (9.1) and (9.2) determine the luminosity L as a function of r.
106
 Pressure gradient 107
The temperature gradient is determined by the radiative flux FT accord-
ing to

F (93)
\f <
3 dr
where Fr = LT/4jtr2 and L r is the radiative luminosity, i.e. the radiative
energy flux through each spherical shell.
In the case of radiative equilibrium Lr = L and we find for the tempera-
ture stratification in radiative equilibrium
J
2 3
dr Ajtr T 16a

The dependence of the Rosseland mean opacity Kcm on T and Pg and on

element abundances was discussed in Chapter 4. We use here for the
average K per gram of material

K%=KQpaT-P (9.5)

where K0^ Z for the bound-free and bound-bound transitions.

For Kramers' opacity law we have a = 1 and fi = 3.5. The numerical
calculations favor a = 0.5 and yS = 2.5, as we saw from Fig. 4.3.
We derived that in the convection zone we can usually expect the
adiabatic temperature and pressure relation (except in the upper parts of
the outer hydrogen and helium convection zones); this leads to the relation
(see equation (5.35))

<96>
dr
f*4f P dr
-
for deep convection zones. For the outer, low density layers we have to use
the equations discussed in Chapter 7.

9.2 The pressure gradient

The observed fact that the stars do not change their radii also tells
us that the stars must be in hydrostatic equilibrium, as expressed by the
hydrostatic equation (see equation (2.12))

dP GMr dPg GMr

— = - p ^ or — ^ = - ^ - p (9.7)
dr r dr r
108 Basic stellar structure equations

if only the gas pressure is important. In general we have to use

P = Pg + Pr + , etc., where Pr is the radiation pressure. Other pressures
may be due to turbulence or magnetic fields.
The thermal equilibrium (9.1), also called the energy equation, and the
hydrostatic equilibrium equations (9.7) are actually all we have in order to
determine the stellar structure. The additional equations which we have to
use only help to evaluate the quantities occurring in these equilibrium
equations.
In order to determine Mr as a function of the radius r, we have to
describe how the mass inside radius r increases with increasing r. When
increasing r by the amount dr the mass Mr increases by the amount dMr
inside the spherical shell with radius r and thickness dr, which has a volume
4jrr2 dr and a density p. This means

(9.8)
dr
Equations (9.1), (9.4) (or 9.6), (9.7) and (9.8) provide four equations
for the five unknowns Pg(r), T(r), p{r), L(r) and Mr(r). We need an
additional equation, relating Pg, p and T, namely the equation of state.
Once we discuss stellar interiors of very high density we have to take
degeneracy into account (see Chapter 16). For the following discussions
we can, however, use the well-known relation for an ideal gas

p =P.RgT (9.9)

If the radiation pressure Pr is important we have

Pr = -—T 4 and P = P+Pr (9.10)

3 c
Equation (9.9) serves to eliminate p, which leaves us with the four
unknowns T, Pg, Mr and L.

9.3 The boundary conditions

The unique solution of the four first-order differential equations
(9.1), (9.4), (9.7) and (9.8) requires the knowledge of four boundary
conditions. We can easily write down two boundary conditions at the
surface, namely at f = \ we must have a temperature T — 7 ett (see Volume
2). Since generally the temperature and pressure decrease very fast at the
surface this condition can usually be simplified to T(R) — 0. For giants and
 Dimensionless structure equations 109
supergiants, for which the pressure decreases only slowly, we have to be
more careful, however. We also know that at the surface the pressure has
to go to zero, i.e. Pg(R) = 0.
For the center of the star where r = 0 we can also easily formulate two
boundary conditions; namely for r = 0 the mass inside r has to be zero,
which means M r (0) = 0. We also know that there is no energy generated
inside r = 0, and we therefore have L(0) = 0. We thus have two boundary
conditions at the outside and two at the inside
T(R) = 0, Pg(R) = 0, Mr(0) = 0 and L(0) = 0 (9.11)
where R is determined by the condition that Mr(R) = M.
The fact that we have only two boundary conditions on each side causes
problems for the solution. If we start the integration of the differential
equations from the outside we have to assume L and R and hope that by
the time we reach the point r = 0 we do indeed find L = 0 and Mr — 0. We
could try to find the correct solution by trial and error. It turns out,
however, that this is impossible because the solutions all diverge at the
center. Why? Because the r occurs in the denominator of equations (9.4)
and (9.7). Minute errors in Mr and Lr cause the pressure and temperature
gradients to be infinite for r —> 0. We could try to start the integration from
the inside where we have to guess P(0) and T(0). We could then try again
to find the correct solution by trial and error, but we encounter the same
problem: the solutions diverge at the surface, where the temperature and
pressure go to zero. We never match the surface boundary conditions.
One possibility is to start from both ends, determining the starting
conditions in such a way that the solutions from both ends match smoothly
at some intermediate point. 'Match smoothly' must then mean that T, P, L
and Mr and their derivatives are continuous at this point. This method was
extensively used by several authors, especially by M. Schwarzschild who
developed clever forms of matching conditions and succeeded in comput-
ing evolutionary tracks in this way even before large computers were
available. Modern calculations are based on the method developed by L.
Henyey. It introduces all four boundary conditions simultaneously. We
will outline the Henyey method in Chapter 12.

9.4 Dimensionless structure equations

Schwarzschild discovered that the amount of computational work
could be greatly reduced by introducing new dimensionless variables.
Using these variables we will be able to gain some basic insights into the
110 Basic stellar structure equations

dependence of stellar structure on mass, chemical composition and age,

necessarily with some simplifying assumption, mainly that we are dealing
with so-called homologous stars and with stars of homogeneous chemical
composition.
The new dimensionless variables are chosen to be

, _ i , ,_*=, f.m
H J
,=L and , _ £ F
(9
V
.12)J
R M L To Po
The constants To and Po are chosen in such a way as to simplify the basic
structure equations. This is the case if
juGM _ GM
in ^ and in ^ T
RRg 4JZR4
where ju is the mean atomic weight of the homogeneous star. For a given
star To and Po are constants.
With these transformations the basic differential equations obtain the
following forms:
dp= _pq
(9.13)
dx tx
to replace (9.7). For equation (9.8) determining Mr we find now

^- = P-x> (9.14)
dx t
For the temperature gradient in radiative equilibrium we obtain
dt f oa+1
dx = - . r J - J L ( Q 15}

if Kg=K0PaT~P.
For adiabatic stratification with cplcv = | we derive
p = Et25 (9.16)
The energy equation now becomes

Dp?-2x2 (9.17)
dx
Here
L
C=C0 "° " with Q - — P — (9.18)
 Dimensionless structure equations 111
We also have

Mv+2 ., ^ (G\v 1
with _„
\RJ 4n
if £ = £opTv. The constant Eis derived to be

E = 4jzKG3/2(^/Rg)5/2M1/2R3/2 (9.20)

where the constant K determines the adiabat which is followed by the

temperature stratification, namely

T5/2 = PgIK (9.21)

Co and Do are elementary constants, while C, D and E are constant for

each star, C and D depending only on M, L and /?. This is very important.
For these new variables the boundary conditions are also well defined: at
the surface, for x = 1, we must have q = l,f= l,t = 0 and/? = 0. At the
center for x = 0, we must require that q = 0 and / = 0. For our four
unknown functions we have now six boundary conditions to satisfy. We
have four well-defined boundary conditions at the surface and can there-
fore start integration from the surface and find a well-defined solution for
given values of C and D. We do, however, have two necessary boundary
conditions in the center which also have to be satisfied. For arbitrary
values of C and D we cannot expect this to happen. We can, however, try
to choose C and D in such a way that the interior boundary conditions are
also satisfied. Since we have two boundary conditions in the center these
conditions determine the possible values of C and D uniquely. There is
only one pair of C and D with which the inner boundary conditions can be
satisfied. With this one pair of values for C and £>, which are well-defined
numbers, we find a unique solution for q(x), t{x),p{x) and/(x) for the four
basic differential equations (9.13)-(9.15) and (9.17). This means we have
the same solution for all stars in radiative equilibrium. C and D must also be
the same for all stars in radiative equilibrium with P ~ Pg and with e and K
given by equations (9.2) and (9.5) respectively.
Because of the numerical problems discussed earlier, this solution also
cannot be obtained by integration from outside in. Integrations also have
to be started from both sides and the constants D and C are determined by
the condition of a smooth transition from the inside to the outside solution.
If we are dealing with convective stars the constant E replaces the
constant C. All completely convective stars also have one unique solution if
P - Pg and (9.2) and (9.5) hold.
112 Basic stellar structure equations

Such stars then all show the same dependence of q, t, /?,/on the radius
variable x. They are also homologous stars. Unfortunately real stars are
not all homologous stars because they have convection zones of various
depths as we saw in the previous chapters and for hot stars radiation
pressure and electron scattering becomes very important. Nevertheless
homologous stars are reasonable approximations to stars of intermediate
mass in which the convection zones are not very extended, like for instance
the A, F, G and possibly B stars.
 10
Homologous stars in radiative
equilibrium

10.1 The dependence of stellar parameters on mass

In this section we will see what we can learn about homologous
stars. As we found in the previous chapter all homologous stars in radiative
equilibrium with P ~ Pg and for which equations (9.2) and (9.5) hold have
the same solutions for t(x), p(x), q(x), f(x) with the same values for the
constants C and D occurring in the equations (9.15) and (9.17). These
constants contain functions of M, R and L. They must therefore tell us
something about these quantities and their relation for the different stars.
We realize that by multiplying the equations for C and D we derive an
equation which no longer contains the luminosity L; it gives a relation
between R and M only:

R M
CD = const. \ . R ^ (10.1)
or

If the carbon cycle is the main energy source, which means if v = 16, and
Kramers' opacity law holds we find
/? oc M 12 - 5/18 ' 5 or roughly R oc M 2/3 (10.3)
For fi = 2.5 and a = 0.5 we obtain
R oc M 1 3 / 1 8 ° = M 0 - 72 (10.3a)
1/3
With T oc MIR (see Chapter 3), we find T ^ M . With increasing mass
the interior temperature of the stars must increase which leads to the
transition from the proton-proton chain as the energy source for low mass
stars to the CNO cycle for high mass stars. We cannot expect, however, the
effective temperature to obey this mass dependence because we have used
an opacity law which does not hold for the stellar photospheres, and also
113
114 Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium
equation (9.2) is not true for optically thin atmospheric layers. But, of
course, r eff also increases with M.
With this relation between R and M we find now from the equation for C
that for Kramers' opacity law

*R £ «M£ « »
05 m (10.4)
For /? = 2.5 and a = 0.5 we have

L oc M43 (10.4a)

This is the mass-luminosity relation for idealized homologous stars in

radiative equilibrium for which the CNO cycle is the main energy source.
A and F stars with their small inner and outer convection zones best match
the conditions. We want to emphasize that the mass-luminosity relation
follows mainly from C, which means mainly from the equation of energy
transport. The radius, which depends on the energy generation, enters
only with a very small power.
We can now estimate the dependence of Teff on the mass using the mass
dependences of the luminosities and radii. We have T^f ^ L/R2 oc
096
M 5.2 /M i36 ^ M 3.8 ? for K r a m e r s ' opacity which gives Teff oc M . This
increase in Teff with M is stronger than observed. For the relation between
L and Teff we find L oc T^ f 2/0% = T5J2 or dlogL/dlog Teff = 5.42. For
a = 0.5 and/3 = 2.5 we find Teff oc M° 72 and L * T5J7. In Figs. 10.1-10.3
we compare all these relations with the observed values for main sequence
B, A and F stars. The agreement with observation is much better for
a = 0.5 and/3 = 2.5 than for Kramers' opacity law, which is apparently not
a good approximation. We realize the importance of good values for K.
In this simplified discussion, of course, we do not recover exactly the
observed relations but we can find qualitative agreement with observation
and can make semi-quantitative comparisons of stars with different masses
and chemical compositions.
For stars in which the proton-proton chain is the main energy source,
like our sun, we have v — 4 and we find from equation (10.2) for Kramers'
opacity law that

R oc M°- 5 / 6 - 5 = M 1/13 (10.5)

while for a = 0.5 and /? = 2.5 we find

R oc Mm (10.5a)
 Dependence of parameters on mass 115

The radius depends only very weakly on the mass. Using equation (10.4)
again we find now for Kramers' opacity

(10.6)
M 1/26

and for a = 0.5 and 0 = 2.5

L oc M 4 - 83 (10.6a)
We find a somewhat steeper mass-luminosity relation than for the
hotter stars, but not much steeper. The radius again enters only very little
into this. The mass-luminosity relation is determined mainly by the energy
transport.
For reff we find with Kramers' opacity

4 - M5-21 or (10.7)

and for a = 0.5 and ft = 2.5

M L12 (10.7a)

1 1 1

5 -

4 -

Si
• ^

LcxM*-3

i
2 -

Observed
1 -- main sequence

I I i ^V
1.2 1.0 0.5

Fig. 10.1. A comparison of empirical (solid line) and theoretical (dashed lines) mass-
luminosity relations for homologous stars in radiative equilibrium and CNO energy
generation. For Kramers' opacity law we find L oc M 5 2 (long dashes). For
5 2 5 43
K = KOp°- T~ - we find L oc M (short dashes). For the latter approximation the
agreement between theoretical and observed relation is much better than for Kramers'
opacity law.
116 Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium
In Fig. 10.4 we compare the empirical mass-luminosity relation for the
F, G and K stars with this mass-luminosity relation for the idealized
homologous, radiative equilibrium models. The overall trend is verified.
For the G and K stars of course the outer convection zones become
increasingly important.
For the relation between L and reff we derive with Kramers' opacity law
I 5.46/1.30
T _ 1T 4.2 (10.8)
eff - eff

and with a = 0.5,/3 = 2.5

T4J (10.8a)

Both relations are shown in Fig. 10.5. The match with the observations is
poor for Teff > 6000 K, while for lower Teii it is rather good even though
the outer convection zones become important for the energy transport.
For a qualitative comparison of stars with different chemical compositions
but the same mass we may therefore use these relations with /3 = 2.5 and
a = 0.5.

1.2 1.0

Fig. 10.2. A comparison of the empirical (solid line) and the theoretical (dashed lines)
relations between Teff and mass for homologous stars in radiative equilibrium and the
CNO cycle as energy source. For Kramers' opacity law we find r eff cc M 1196 (long
dashes) and for K = KOp° 5T~2-5 we obtain Teff oc M0J2 (short dashes), which agrees
better with the observations.
 Dependence on mean atomic weight 111
10.2 Dependence of stellar parameters on the mean atomic weight or
evolution of mixed stars
We are now going to discuss the dependence of the main sequence
position on the chemical abundances. We will first study the dependence
on the mean atomic weight//, which is mainly determined by the hydrogen
and helium abundances. Since hydrogen is converted by nuclear reactions
into helium the helium abundance increases during stellar evolution. This
leads to an increase in the overall helium abundance if the stars remain
well mixed during the evolution. The discussion in this section therefore
refers to the evolutionary changes of stellar parameters for mixed stars.
After this we recognize that real stars are generally not well mixed.
The mean atomic weighty appears explicitly in the constants C and D.
The He abundance also enters somewhat into the /c0? mainly due to the
number of free electrons. In the following discussion we omit the changes
of K0 in the opacity law. This means we cannot extend the derivations to
pure He stars. For He stars we also have to consider different nuclear

L oc

4.5

Fig. 10.3. A comparison of the luminosity-Teff relations as observed (solid line) and as
derived theoretically (dashed lines) for homologous stars in radiative equilibrium and
the CNO cycle as energy source. For Kramers' opacity law we find L oc T5^ (long
dashes) and for K = K0p05T~2-5 we obtain L oc T5JP (short dashes).
118 Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium
reactions. The discussions here therefore refer only to moderate increases
in He abundances, say by factors of 2 or 3.
We again multiply the expressions for the constants C and D in order to
eliminate the luminosity L, but we now focus our attention on the
dependence on//, i.e. comparing stars of a given mass but with different//.
We use a = 0.5 and /} = 2.5. We have

CD = const = uv-6-5R-(v+2)Mv-3 (10.9)

For constant mass we obtain

v+1
R (10.10)
With v — 16 for the upper part of the main sequence where evolution goes
fastest this yields
orroughiy (10.11)

01-

-1
0.3 0.2 0.1 -0.2

Fig. 10.4. A comparison between empirical (solid line) and theoretical (dashed lines)
mass-luminosity relation for low mass homologous stars in radiative equilibrium with
the proton-proton chain as energy source. For Kramers' opacity law we find L oc A/5 46
which is too steep. For K = K0p°-5T~25 a relation L ^ M 4 89 is found, which shows better
agreement with the empirical relation.
 Dependence on mean atomic weight 119
From equation (9.17) we then derive
L oc ju6-5/R oc (10.12)
The luminosity increases steeply with increasing mean molecular weight!
A higher central temperature is required in order to increase the central
pressure enough to balance the weight of the overlying material. The
radius also depends on the mean atomic weight. The dependence of the
radius on ju does however change for a different energy generation
mechanism. For stars on the lower main sequence when the proton-
proton chain is supplying the nuclear energy, i.e. when v = 4, we find
Roc^~2-5/6 or roughly R oc ^~0A (10.13)
While for the upper main sequence stars the radius increases for
increasing// we find for the lower main sequence stars a deciease in R with
increasing //. In this case the luminosity increases even more steeply with

Observed
main sequence

3.9
'09 Teff

Fig. 10.5. A comparison between the observed main sequence (solid line) and the
theoretical relations for low mass homologous stars in radiative equilibrium and with the
proton-proton chain as energy source. For Kramers' opacity law a relation L oc T^ is
found (long dashes). For K = KOp°-5T~2-5 a relation L <* 7 ^ is derived (short dashes).
For low temperatures good agreement is found between observed and theoretical
relations.
120 Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium
increasing //; we find for stars in which the proton-proton chain provides
the energy
L oc ^ 5/R oc ^6.9 roughly for v = 4 (10.14)
Knowing the luminosity and radius we can also estimate the dependence
of Teff on //, though we know that this will be less accurate. We find for
v= 16
L u6 1 25
Ti oc — 2
<* = /^ 5 an
d rrfeff °c /z1 "25
f °c /z "
approximately (10.15)
7? //
If v = 4 we find
T4ff °c //7-76 and Teff oc // 194 approximately (10.16)
In any case the stars become much more luminous and their effective
temperatures increase. They evolve upwards and to the left in the HR
diagram. The question is do they evolve above or below the main sequence
of the hydrogen rich stars? In order to see this we have to compare the
L(r eff ) relation for a given mass but increasing// with the relation between
L and Teff for the main sequence stars, i.e. stars of given// but different M.
If, for increasing ju, Te{{ increases more steeply with L than for main
sequence stars, the mixed stars will evolve below the main sequence. If Teff
increases more slowly with L than for the main sequence they will evolve
above the main sequence. For v — 16 we find from equations (10.12) and
(10.15) that for a given mass,
r e f f oc/-25oc L 1.25/6 = L0.208 Qr L oc ^ f f 8 (10.17)

and for v = 4 we have

r eff oc/-9ocL L9/6 - 9 = L0-28 or LocT3J3 (10.18)
These relations have to be compared with the main sequence relations
obtained in the same way looking at stars with different masses but the
same//. We had found for v = 16 (see the preceding section)
reff oc L °- 72/4 - 28 = L0-17 or Locre5ff94 (10.19)
For v = 4 we derived for the main sequence
reff ex L° 2 3 or L oc T4J (10.20)
In both cases wefindthat, for increasing values of//, Tcii increases more
steeply with increasing L than on the main sequence which means the stars
evolve to the left of the main sequence, as shown in Fig. 10.6. Were the
 Changes of main sequence position 121
stars to remain mixed during their evolution they would evolve up to larger
L but evolve below the well-known main sequence.
Calculations determining the position of the pure helium star main
sequence, taking into account the change in the absorption coefficients
and the change in the energy generation (which has to be by the triple-
alpha reaction because there is no hydrogen for the other reactions), find
that the main sequence for pure helium stars is far below the hydrogen star
main sequence even though for a given mass the luminosity of the helium
star is larger but its Teii is also much larger. In Fig. 10.7 we compare the
solar composition main sequence with the main sequence of helium stars
as calculated by Cox and Salpeter (1964). Helium-rich stars are found to
the left of the normal main sequence. For a given mass L and Te{{ are larger
than for hydrogen-rich stars.

10.3 Changes of main sequence position for decreasing heavy element

abundances
For lower mass stars, we would like to compare population I and
population II stars, i.e., stars with different metal abundances Z. Stars
with different abundances of heavy elements are not strictly homologous
4

Main sequence

4.5 4.0

Fig. 10.6. The evolutionary track for a mixed star, i.e. a star with a given mass but
increasing//, is compared with the main sequence, i.e. with the positions of stars with
given// but different masses. Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium are considered
with the CNO cycle as energy source.
122 Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium
because the depth of the outer convection zone depends on Z. Neverthe-
less comparing homologous stars still shows us the trend of the differences.
Since the heavy elements contribute such a small mass fraction decreasing
heavy element abundances will not influence ju. The abundance of the
heavy elements enters mainly into the K 0. In the deep interior the
bound-free K0 is proportional to Z because only heavy element ions still
have electrons bound to them which can absorb photons. Since there are
free-free contributions to K which do not depend on Z the use of the
bound-free K alone will exaggerate the dependence on Z but still give the
qualitative trend.
If the energy source is the proton-proton chain as we expect for stars
with about one solar mass and less, then e0 does not depend on the metal
abundance.
We again multiply the constants C and D to eliminate the luminosity.
Including the Z dependence of K0 this yields
ZRM v+2
(10.21)
RV+3M5

1 1 1
-9 ^(14.8)
1 ' ' 1 ' ' ' 1
\80 -
-8
58
-7 Y~ ' \ _
-6 \X4.0 )
\ \\
_
-5 \3.0
29) \ /
-4 \
\\ 1/
-3 \
Vl.5 \\
-2 >5 \
7
bo I \ /
-I o \\ I

0
\ V0.75 ^^^^ —^' 11
(0.5) —
A\0.5\ \ \ J
2 \0.4 \ /
3- VO.35
-
4 - ^-0.31
\ -
5 ". , , 1 1 \ 1
5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5

Fig. 10.7. In the M bol, Teff diagram the main sequence for hydrogen stars (dashed line)
is compared with the main sequence for helium stars as calculated by Cox and Salpeter.
The stellar masses in units of solar masses are given at the appropriate points. (Dots and
circles are from less accurate calculations.) Also shown in the lower right is a globular
cluster diagram for comparison. From Cox and Salpeter (1964).
 Changes of main sequence position 123
With v ~ 4 we obtain
CD oc ZR~6M (10.22)
which gives for constant M
R6^Z or R^Zm (10.23)
The radius decreases only very little with decreasing Z.
Inserting this into equation (9.17) we find for C with constant mass
C oc ZLR oc Z7/6L (10.24)
For the luminosity we find from equation (10.24) that
L ex Z~m (10.25)
For stars of a given mass the luminosity increases with decreasing Z! For
a given mass the lifetime of a metal-poor star therefore is shorter than for a
metal-rich star because it uses its fuel more rapidly. As we said earlier,
equation (10.25) exaggerates the Z dependence of L but gives the correct
trend: for smaller Z, the K decreases and the radiation can escape more
easily. The luminosity increases.
We are now looking at the change of T eff. We obtain

?iff-|>-^4™~ z ~ 9 / 6 (io 26)

-
or
Teff oc Z " 0 3 7 6 ~ Z~m (10.27)
The Z dependence is again exaggerated but shows the correct trend. L and
Teff both increase for decreasing Z.
For the relation between Teif and L we then find
L*T3J or r e f f *cL 0 - 3 3 (10.28)
for stars with changing Z but constant mass.
With the same approximations we found for the luminosity Tei{ relation
along the solar composition main sequence, i.e. for stars with the same Z
but different masses (equation 10.8)
L oc Tfff approximately
Again, the main sequence has a steeper increase of L with increasing Teff
than the track in the HR diagram outlining the change in appearance for
stars of decreasing heavy element abundances, shown in Fig. 10.8. Stars
with a given mass but different Z will have to follow the trend of this track.
124 Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium
The main sequence for metal-poor population II stars lies below the main
sequence for solar abundance stars, at least if the helium abundance for
these stars is the same as for the population I stars.
We are still not sure about the helium abundance in population II stars
because only cool population II stars are bright enough to permit a good
spectrum analysis, and cool stars do not show helium lines. The only hot
population II stars are the blue horizontal branch stars and they are so faint
that up until now no spectrum analysis has been possible. With more
sensitive receiving instruments we may hope to have some helium abun-
dance determination for these stars soon, but even then we will still not
know whether the helium abundance in these very evolved stars is the
same as the one for the main sequence population II stars.
Since helium is constantly manufactured in hot stars and during their
final evolution stages is mixed in with the interstellar medium we might
expect the more recently formed population I stars to have a higher helium
abundance than the old population II stars. If the metal-poor population II
stars do indeed have a smaller helium abundance than population I stars,

Main sequence, L « 7"4 3

3
O L ex r
for fixed M,
decreasing Z

for decreasing
li (Heab.)

3.9 3.8 3.7 3.6

Fig. 10.8. In the luminosity, Teff diagram we show the expected direction of change for
decreasing abundances of heavy elements Z (long dashes) and the direction of change in
position for decreasing// due to possibly lower helium abundance (solid arrow). Also
shown is the main sequence (solid line). Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium are
compared.
 Changes of main sequence position 125
we have to consider the influence of the lower helium abundance simul-
taneously with the decreasing metal abundances. As we saw in the
preceding section, a decreasing helium abundance moves the stars to
lower luminosities and lower Teff, i.e. in the opposite direction to the trend
we discussed for increasing helium abundances. A small decrease in
helium abundance would move the population II stars back along the line
L oc Tiff1, i.e. would make the main sequence for metal-poor stars agree
more with the one for solar abundance stars. For the same L or Tcff a
population II star would still have a smaller mass (see Fig. 10.8). Because
of the uncertainty of the helium abundance for population II stars we are
still not quite sure about their masses. Their absolute magnitudes are also
not known accurately. We have to rely on uncertain trigonometric paral-
laxes for some relatively close population II dwarfs. It appears, however,
that the population II main sequence does lie below the population I main
sequence, as seen in Fig. 10.9.

3 -

4 -

6 -

0.2

Fig. 10.9. The color magnitude diagram for the nearest population II stars, for which
trigonometric parallaxes can be measured. The vertical lines indicate error bars. The
solid line shows the main sequence for stars with solar element abundances. When
compared at the same B - V the main sequence for very metal-poor stars appears to be
about two magnitudes below the solar abundance main sequence. When compared at
equal Teff the difference is smaller, because for a given Teff the B - V decreases for
metal-deficient stars. From Sandage (1986).
126 Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium
In Fig. 10.10 we show theoretical sequences calculated for stars with
different abundances of heavy elements and helium, calculated to the best
of our present knowledge with the inclusion of all complications.

10.4 Homologous contracting stars in radiative equilibrium

10.4.1 Tefj~luminosity relations
During the early evolutionary phases young stars are still rather
cool in their interiors. We saw (equation 2.19) that hydrostatic equilibrium
requires their thermal energyfi'thermaito be half the amount of the released
gravitational energy i?grav ~ GM2/R, i.e.
IGM2
^thermal (10.29)
2 R

1 I I
_ Z = 0.006 z = 0.001
3 - - ^

0.9 0.20
5 -
- j\ -
0.6
7 -
1 I I 0.5

3.80 3.70 3.60 3.85 3.75 3.65 3.90 3.80 3.70

lo lo
9 7".tf lo
9 T'eff 9 Teff

1 i i I I

_z =0.0001 7

-
1.0 Y = 0.30
0.9 X
_ 0.8 \ _
0.7
7 -- 0.6 X

I I I lo.5^
3.80 3.70 3.60 3.85 3.75 3.65 3.85 3.75 3.65
lo
9 Teff "09 7"eff •°9 Tiff

Fig. 10.10. In the Mbol, log Tefi diagram main sequences for different metal abundances
Z and helium abundances are shown. A helium abundance Y = 0.30 was assumed for
the lower panel and Y = 0.20 for the upper panel. Stellar masses (in units of the solar
mass) are given at the point of arrival on the main sequence. These points outline the so-
called zero age main sequence (ZAMS). The shift of stellar positions for a given mass to
higher Teff and L for increasing Y and decreasing Z is obvious. Note the change in the
reff scale for the different panels. The dotted lines outline the evolution during the
contraction phases (see also chapter 11). From VandenBerg and Bell (1985).
 Homologous contracting stars 127
For large radii the gravitational energy released is still small and
therefore the internal temperatures are still low, not high enough for
nuclear reactions to take place. The quantity D derived from the equations
for nuclear energy generation is therefore not applicable for the discussion
of contracting stars. Fortunately we can obtain all the information we need
from the constant C alone. During contraction of a star the mass remains
constant (except perhaps for the very early phases). From the condition
C = constant we then find for Kg = K0p°'5T~2-5
L^R'1 (10.30)
With decreasing radius the luminosity increases slowly. From the
relation
Tin oc L/R2
we find with L ^ R~l that
Tiff oc / r 3 oc L3 (10.31)
The effective temperature increases rapidly with decreasing radius, and
very rapidly with increasing luminosity. We find Teff ex L 3/4 . During
contraction the star evolves almost horizontally through the HR diagram if
it is in radiative equilibrium (see Fig. 10.10).
In Section 8.1 we estimated how long the Sun could live on its
gravitational energy assuming that it had constant luminosity during the
contraction. We now see that this assumption is not very wrong. The
effective temperature changes quickly with a small increase in luminosity.
An increase in Mbol by 0.75 correlates with an increase in Teff from say
4000 K to 6700 K (see Fig. 10.10), depending on Z and M.
Do stars evolve from a cool interstellar cloud by slowly contracting
along the relation L oc R~lc! (More accurate calculations, taking into
account the accurate K(T,Pg), show a dependence LocR~075^ The
answer is no. Observations show that this is not the case. In star-forming
regions of the sky where we find young, luminous stars we do not find very
cool, low luminosity stars which would fall along this track. The track
derived here for contracting stars only holds for the higher temperature
part, i.e. T ^ 5000 K as seen in Fig. 10.10, which means only for stars with
no deep convection zones. So far we have neglected convection in our
discussions of contracting stars and of main sequence stars. For cool stars
the outer convection zones become very important. The neglect of these
zones leads to the failure of our predictions for cool, contracting stars as we
shall see soon.
128 Homologous stars in radiative equilibrium
10.4.2 Energy release in a contracting star
In order to calculate the temperature stratification, according to
equations (3.9) and (9.1), we have to calculate the gravitational energy
release as a function of depth.
The gravitational energy release is due to the shrinking of the star. For
the whole star it can be expressed as
dEG _ d [« GMr _A_2 ^ „ d GM2
dt dtj0 r dt R
where t stands for time.
The question remains how this energy release is distributed over the
star. How much is liberated at any given shell with radius r within the star?
At any given point in the star we can quite generally say that the energy
content per gram of material is altered by three effects: (a) by the work
done on the volume against the gas pressure, given by Pg dV, where V is
the specific volume, i.e. the volume which contains 1 g of material; (b) the
energy content is increased by the nuclear energy generation £ n; (c) it is
decreased by the difference of energy flux leaving the volume of gas and
thefluxentering the volume. Per cm3, the latter amount is given by djiF/dr
and per gram the amount must then be (djzFldr)p~l. The energy equilib-
rium requires

* ( 1 « ) m V z^ (10.33)
dt\2 JU J *dt\p) Ajtr pdr
The left-hand side describes the thermal energy content per gram of
material (if only kinetic energy needs to be considered). On the right-hand
side we have replaced JIF by LIAjtr2. With Pg = pRgT/ju the left-hand side
gives
A /I J* \ 1 T> A~ 1 1 HP
(10.34)
dt\2 p] 2pl dt 2p dt
This can be combined with the first term on the right-hand side to give

as can be verified easily. The energy equation (10.33) becomes

3 md (PA 1
(10.36)
2 d£ {p"*) 4jtrz p dr
 Homologous contracting stars 129
How does this relate to the change in gravitational energy as described
by equation (10.32)? This is, of course, contained in the left-hand side
which includes the term PgdV. The gravitational force does this work
when the star contracts. For homologous stars we can see how this term is
related to the change in radius of the star. For different homologous stars
with a given mass we know we must have at any given point r/R0

and T=T <ia37)

°(B'
where p 0 , Pg0, To are the values of p, Pg and T for the star with radius Ro.
We can now write the left-hand side of equation (10.36) in the form

5/
dAp 3 V 2 F p5/3

~ 2 p [dt"~x~~ ' 3d?

2 p At
which clearly shows the relation to the changes of the radius.
 11

Influence of convection zones on

stellar structure

11.1 Changes in radius, luminosity and effective temperature

In the previous chapter we considered only model stars in radiative

equilibrium. We pointed out several mismatches between these models
with real stars and attributed them in part to the influence of convection
zones. Convection zones change stellar structure in two main ways:
(a) The radius of the star becomes smaller.
(b) The energy transport through the outer convection zones with
the large absorption coefficients becomes easier due to the additional
convective energy transport, so that the temperature gradient becomes
smaller in comparison with radiative equilibrium. This may lead to an
increased luminosity and Teff as well as energy generation.
If energy transport outwards due to convection is increased the star
would tend to lose more energy than is generated, and so would tend to
cool off. However, this does not actually happen, because it would reduce
the internal gas pressure and the gravitational pull would then exceed the
pressure force. The star actually contracts, the stellar interior temperature
increases, thereby increasing the energy generation e ^ Tv. With the
larger energy generation the star is then able to balance the larger energy
loss. The star is again in thermal equilibrium but with a smaller radius and
a larger luminosity, which means with a larger effective temperature. As
compared to radiative equilibrium the star moves to the left and up in the
HR diagram (see Fig. 11.1). Convection decreases the equilibrium value
for the radius.
We can also look at it from another angle by the following 'thought
experiment'. We imagine a star with a given TQfi and radiative equilibrium
T{r). This star is however unstable to convection in the outer convection
zones. This means in these layers the radiative equilibrium temperature
gradient is steeper than the adiabatic one. We plot the radiative equilib-
rium temperature stratification schematically in Fig. 11.2. Since the star is
130
 Radius, luminosity and temperature 131
in hydrostatic equilibrium the interior pressure just balances the weight of
the overlying material. (This is the kind of star which we have dealt with so
far when discussing cool homologous stars in radiative equilibrium.)
However, with Vrad > Vad the radiative equilibrium is unstable. If we
introduce an infinitely small perturbation convection will start. In the
convection zones the radiative energy transport is reduced by the amount
of the convective energy transport, which means with convection the
temperature gradient and thereby the temperature is reduced everywhere
below the upper boundary of the convection zone. The central tempera-
ture and pressure would therefore also be reduced. The star must contract
and the thermal energy f'therm = ~2^grav must increase. This must con-
tinue until enough gravitational energy is released to heat the star
everywhere to temperatures which are on average, and especially in the
center, higher than they were originally in the radiative equilibrium star.
Because of the higher central temperature and density nuclear energy
generation increases, leading to a larger luminosity and effective tempera-
ture of the star.
All these effects become most noticeable if the temperature gradient is
strongly reduced with the onset of convection, i.e. if the convective energy
transport is very efficient. The observed change in stellar radius as
compared with radiative equilibrium models is therefore a measure for the
efficiency of the convective energy transport, which depends on the degree
of convective instability and also on the size of the characteristic traveling
length /. The observed stellar radii can therefore be used to determine the
characteristic length /. Observed stellar radii, when compared with

Position change
due to convection

to T
-« 9 e1t

Fig. 11.1. Shows schematically for cool stars the change of position in the HR diagram
due to increasing efficiencies of convective energy transport with decreasing 7 eff. For
more efficient energy transport a star of a given mass has to have a higher luminosity and
effective temperature. Its radius decreases.
132 Influence of convection zones
modern calculations, indicate a value of IIH — 1.5 for lower main se-
quence stars. We do not know, however, whether the ratio of IIH is the
same for all kinds of stars. We remember that the Li7 abundances observed
in the solar photosphere lead to an estimate IIH — 1 as discussed in
Chapter 7.

11.2 The Hayashi line

In this section we will talk about completely convective stars. We
saw in Chapter 10 that for the convective regions the constant E in
equation (9.15) takes the place of the constant Cin equation (9.14) (which
determines the relation between M, L and R for stars in radiative
equilibrium). This constant E is related to the stellar parameters in the
following way (see equation 9.19)

E= AjtKGm{^IR5/25l2 m u3/2
*, 1/2
g) M R (11.1)

Fig. 11.2. The depth dependence of the temperature Tr for a star in radiative
equilibrium is shown schematically (solid line). In a star which is convectively unstable
the onset of convection reduces the temperature gradient in the convection zone, as
indicated by Tc (long dashed line). The central temperature would then also be reduced.
This would decrease Pg (center) below the equilibrium value. The star must shrink from
the radius RQ to the radius Rx and heat up to the temperatures shown as Tcc (short
dashes).
 Hay as hi line 133
where the constant K determines the adiabat which is followed by the
temperature stratification:

T5/2 = Pg/K with d l n T

=0.4 (11.2)

for adiabatic stratification with y = | . For the convective layers the

constant E is determined by the inner and outer boundary conditions. If
inner and outer radiative equilibrium zones are considered E is deter-
mined by the conditions that at the boundaries of the convection zone(s)
temperature and pressure and their gradients have to match the values of
the adjacent radiative equilibrium layers. It is found that completely
convective stars have the largest value of E, namely Eo = 45.48 (Hayashi,
Hoshi and Sugimoto 1962). If there is a radiative equilibrium zone below
the convection zone then these radiative zones can only be matched with a
convective zone having a smaller value of E.
How do we determine the positions of these stars in the H R diagram?
We have to use the constant E instead of the constant C which we used for
radiative equilibrium stars. For a given E = Eo and for a given mass,
equation (11.1) determines a relation K= K(R). In order to determine
both K and /?, we need another equation. This equation comes from the
boundary condition at the top of the adiabatically stratified region, which
is, of course, the bottom of the stellar atmosphere. The stellar atmosphere
is determined by Teff and the gravitational acceleration g = GMIR2. For a
given mass g = g{R). For a given g(R) we can integrate the hydrostatic
equilibrium equation down to the bottom of the atmosphere where the
optical depth is r = r1 (see for instance equation 5.18). This gives us
Pg{ti). For a given Teff we can also calculate the temperature for this same
optical depth r1 and obtain T{ti) according to equations (5.20) and (5.21).
With T(TI) known and Pg(ti) known, both depending on R and T eff , we
determine
K = P^/Tir,)512 = K(R, Teff) = K(R, L) (11.3)
where we have eliminated Teff by means of the relation

Tiff = - ^ 3 (H.4)

The relation (11.3) provides the second equation to determine K and R for
a given M. It contains, however, as a new parameter the luminosity L. For
a given set of M and E we thus find a one-dimensional sequence of
solutions for K and R as a function of L.
134 Influence of convection zones

For luminosities L ^ L o Hayashi, Hoshi and Sugimoto (1962) suc-

ceeded in giving an approximate analytical relation between the stellar
parameters, namely
T M
log — = 0.272 - 1.835 log + 9.17(log Teff - 3.70)

+ 2.27 log ^ + 0.699(log KO(Z) + 15.58) (11.5)

It is of special importance to note the very strong increase of L with Teff.

Changing r eff by 4 per cent changes L by roughly a factor of 10 and Mbol by
about - 2 . 5 . For a given value of £ , stars of a given mass lie essentially on a
vertical line in the L versus 7 ^ diagram as seen in Fig. 11.3. We find

42.62 H5.48
1.0 32.22
E=5 10 20 /

wholly
convective
bo
.9
0.5

* 45.48

-45.11
0.0
42.62
39.66
- / 32.22
/
/. I hydrogen \ \ 10,20

-0.5
'begins to \
v burn i
\
\
\
w \ M
3.8 3.7 3.6
!
eff
Fig. 11.3. Stars for a given constant E lie along a nearly vertical line in the Teff,
luminosity diagram (dashed lines). For decreasing values of E the Teii increases for a
given value of L. The nearly horizontal dotted lines show the combinations of L and Teff
permitted by the atmospheric boundary conditions for a given E. The intersection with
the vertical E = constant line gives the actual position of the star (o). The thick solid line
outlines the actual evolutionary track of a contracting star which slowly develops a
growing radiative equilibrium core. From Hayashi, Hoshi and Sugimoto (1962).
 Hayashi line 135
(d log Lid log r e f f ) = 9.17 to be compared with the value obtained for the
main sequence (d log Lid log Teff) ~ 5. The almost vertical line in the HR
diagram on which fully convective stars of a given mass, i.e. stars with
E = 45.58, are found is called the Hayashi line after the astronomer who
first derived the relations for fully convective stars and discussed the
consequences.
As we said earlier the largest value of E corresponds to completely
convective stars. Smaller values of E lead to higher r eff for a given L,
according to equation (11.5). They correspond to stars with an interior
zone in radiative equilibrium. To know which value of E is actually
applicable we have to test the fully adiabatic star for convective instability
in the interior. If Vr < Vad in the core then a model with a smaller E is
applicable. These stars then have larger T eff . The nearly vertical lines in
Fig. 11.3 combine stars with a given E, i.e. homologous stars, with similar
extent of the radiative equilibrium cores. The intersection of these lines
with the horizontal E = constant line, as obtained from the outer bound-
ary condition, yields the possible stellar models satisfying all interior and
surface constraints. The actual evolutionary track followed by a contract-
ing star is then given by the thick line following the Hayashi track in the
beginning. The star slowly develops a growing core in radiative equilib-
rium and finally with increasing Teff becomes a star which is almost
completely in radiative equilibrium following the track which we calcu-
lated for homologous contracting stars in radiative equilibrium, until it
reaches the main sequence when hydrogen burning starts.
Since stars with radiative equilibrium zones have higher Teff than fully
convective stars there can be no stars with Teff lower than for the
completely convective stars. The Hayashi line gives a lower limit for the r eff
of stars in hydrostatic equilibrium.
Equation (11.5) shows that for a given L the r eff on the Hayashi line
increases with increasing mass, but only slightly. If M increases by a factor
of 10 the Teff increases by 50 per cent for constant L. In Fig. 11.4 we show
the Hayashi lines for different values of M.
For increasing abundances of heavy elements K0 increases and for a
given L and M the Teff must decrease. From equation (11.5) we estimate
that
9.17A log r eff = -0.699A log KO(Z)
for a given L and M. For A log K O ( Z ) = A log Z in the cool stellar
atmospheres we find A log r eff = —0.076A log Z. For a change in Z by a
factor 100, Teff increases by 40 per cent if K0 <* Z.
136 Influence of convection zones
11.3 Physical interpretation of the Hayashi line
How can we understand the existence of the Hayashi line and its
dependence on mass and chemical composition? Why is there a lower limit
for jTeff of stars in hydrostatic equilibrium? We start our discussion by first
considering the stellar interior. The central temperature of the star in
hydrostatic equilibrium is determined by the mass which means essentially
by the central regions containing most of the mass. It is independent of the
atmospheric layers. On the other hand K0 and L are introduced into the
equation (11.5) for the luminosity only by means of the atmospheric
boundary conditions. This tells us that it is mainly the atmosphere which
determines the relation between L, M and Teff. We now look at the
temperature stratification in the star starting from the given central
temperature, as shown in the schematic Fig. 11.5. For a fully convective
star the temperature decreases outwards adiabatically up to the upper

-i -

-2.
3.9 3.7 3.5 3.3
[
eff
Fig. 11.4. Hayashi lines for different masses in the luminosity, T&if diagram. From
Hayashi, Hoshi and Sugimoto (1962).
 Physical interpretation of Hayashi line 137
boundary of the region with efficient convection. For higher layers we
rapidly approach radiative equilibrium. For our schematic discussion we
assume that out to the layer with Pg = Pgl the stratification is adiabatic and
that for Pg < Pgl the stratification follows the one for radiative equilibrium
with Vr < Vad. In these high layers the temperature gradient is inversely
proportional to the absorption coefficient. For cool stars the continuous
absorption in the atmospheres is due to the H~ ion (see Volume 2). For
very cool stars there are few free electrons to form the H~ ion. (Some
heavy atoms have to be ionized to provide the electrons.) So K is very
small. The radiative equilibrium temperature gradient Arad is therefore
very flat and the gas pressure Pg0 at r = | is reached at a fairly high
temperature Tefil. With such low values of K and the corresponding small
temperature gradient very low effective temperatures cannot be reached.
For larger heavy element abundances the K0 increases because more free
electrons become available to form H~, the temperature gradient steepens
and somewhat lower surface temperatures Tefi2 can be reached.

S5

small Z, small K

7~ef f , 2
Larger Z, larger K

log Pg0

Fig. 11.5. Shows schematically the temperature stratification in a cool star. The central
temperature of a star, Tc, is determined by its mass. In a fully convective star the
temperature decrease outwards follows Vad. The top layer of the star with Pg > Pgl is in
radiative equilibrium. The temperature gradient Vrad is proportional to the absorption
coefficient K. At the layer with f = f and with Pg = Pg0 a temperature T = Teii is reached
which depends on Vrad. The larger K the steeper Vrad and the lower is Tef{. For cool stars
K becomes very small and Teff cannot become very low. For larger K, which means for a
larger metal abundance Z, 7eff can become lower than for the low Z. The lowest
possible value is determined by the stellar mass, determining Tc, and by K.
138 Influence of convection zones
We now look at stars of different masses (see Fig. 11.6). For the larger
mass star 1 the central temperature Tcl must be larger than for lower mass
star 2 because of the larger weight of the overlying material. In both stars
the temperature decreases adiabatically outwards until the upper bound-
ary of the layer with efficient convective energy transport is reached at a
region with Pg = Pgl or Pg2. (Because of the lower reff the Pg2 may be
somewhat larger than Pgl.) For higher layers we have essentially radiative
equilibrium. Since at the layer with Pg = Pgl the temperature is higher in
the higher mass star the layer with r = § is also reached with a higher
temperature. The higher mass star has a higher Teff.
We now compare a star which has a radiative equilibrium zone in the
center with a completely adiabatically stratified star. Star 1 with the
radiative equilibrium core has in the interior a flatter temperature stratifi-
cation than the adiabatically stratified fully convective star 2. The situation
is shown qualitatively in Fig. 11.7. In star 1 the adiabatic, convective
region starts at the layer with Pg = Pg2; the temperature decreases adiaba-
tically outwards. At the upper boundary of the adiabatic region a higher
temperature is found than in the fully convective case, and the star has a
higher temperature at r = §, which means it has a higher TG&. Stars which
are partially in radiative equilibrium have a higher 7"eff than fully convec-
tive stars.

log Pg2

Fig. 11.6. Compares schematically the temperature stratifications as a function of

pressure for two stars of different masses. For the larger mass star the central pressure
and temperature are higher. A higher Teff is reached at the surface for the higher mass
star.
 Stars on the cool side of Hayashi line 139
This discussion is of course very schematic, complications are not
considered, but it demonstrates the main effects which determine the
difference in structure of fully and partially convective stars.

11.4 Stars on the cool side of the Hayashi line

As we pointed out earlier for stars which have radiative equilib-
rium zones r eff must increase in comparison with fully convective stars on
the Hayashi line. There can then be no stars on the cool side of the Hayashi
line, at least no stars in hydrostatic equilibrium. The coolest stars are fully
convective and must lie on the Hayashi line.
There are, however, a few objects observed on the cool side of the
Hayashi line with rather low luminosities and temperatures around a few
hundred degrees. How can this be? Several explanations are possible:
1. These stars are not in hydrostatic equilibrium.
2. There may be a dust cloud around a hotter star. The stellar
radiation proper is then obscured by the dust which may be heated to

1
eff, 1

'eff,2

92 log Pg3 log/> log Pgl

Fig. 11.7. Compares schematically the temperature stratification in two stars, one of
which has a central radiative equilibrium core, the other being convective all the way to
the center. For stars with a central radiative equilibrium zone, i.e. Vr < Vad, the
temperature decrease for the central region is slower than for the fully convective stars.
In the convection zone starting at Pg = Pg2 the temperature stratification follows Vad.
The pressure Pg at the upper boundary of the convection zone is reached for a higher
temperature 7\, which leads to a higher value of Teff for Pg = Pg0 at r = |. The more
extended the interior radiative equilibrium zone, the higher r eff .
140 Influence of convection zones
several hundred degrees by the stellar radiation. We actually see the warm
dust cloud.
3. The star may have Vr > Vad but convective energy transport
may be inhibited by a stellar magnetic field. In this special case we could
have a situation where V > Vad, which would put the star on the cool side
of the Hayashi line.
 12

Calculation of stellar models

12.1 Schwarzschild's method

Before we can discuss the detailed structure of the stars on the

main sequence we have to outline the methods by which it can be
calculated. In Chapter 10 we have compared homologous stars on the
main sequence. While we were able to see how temperatures and press-
ures in the stars change qualitatively with changing mass and chemical
composition, we have never calculated what the radius and effective
temperature of a star with a given mass really is. In order to do this we need
to integrate the basic differential equations, which determine the stellar
structure as outlined in Chapter 9. Two methods are in use: Schwarzs-
child's method and Henyey's method.
Schwarzschild's method is described in his book on stellar structure and
evolution (1958). The basic differential equations are integrated both from
the inside out and from the outside in. In the dimensionless form the
differential equations for the integration from the outside in contain the
unknown constant C (see Chapter 9), for the integration from the inside
out the differential equations also contain the unknown constant D. A
series of integrations from both sides of the star is performed for different
values of these constants. The problem then is tofindthe correct values for
the constants C and D and thereby the correct solutions for the stellar
structure. At some fitting point Xf = (rAR)^we have to fit the exterior and
the interior solutions together in order to get the solution for the whole
star. At this fitting point we must of course require that pressure and
temperature are continuous. In other words for this value of Xf= (r/R)f
the values for tf and pf and their gradients must be the same for both
solutions. This requirement provides two equations from which the
constants C and D can be determined (see Fig. 12.1). Schwarzschild
developed an elegant way to facilitate the matching of the two solutions.
His method also provides relatively good insight into the processes which
141
142 Calculation of stellar models

determine stellar structure. For simple models it works very well. The
method becomes complicated when we find convection zones in stars or
zones with different chemical abundances or both. Under those conditions
more than two constants occur in the differential equations, and more than
two different zones have to be matched. The number of trial solutions
becomes large. For these reasons modern studies prefer the more flexible
though less transparent calculations by means of Henyey's method. Since
Schwarzschild's method is now rarely used and also because it is described
very well in Schwarzschild's book, we will not describe it here in detail.

12.2 Henyey's method

12.2.1 The basic equations
This method was first described by Henyey et al. (1959).
We want to calculate the unknown functions, pressure = P(Mr, t),
temperature = T(Mr, t), radius = r(Mr, t), luminosity = Lr{Mr, i), hy-
drogen abundance by mass = Xi(Mr, t) and helium abundance by
mass = Y{Mr, t) = X2{Mr, t), where t stands for time. The total mass M
and the chemical abundances at time t = t0 are given. Here Mr is the mass

log T

log Pgf \ogPg

Fig. 12.1. Demonstrates the principle of Schwarzschild's method: A series of

integrations is performed from the inside out assuming (basically) different constants D.
Another series of integrations is performed from the outside in, assuming different
values for the constant C. Only for the constants D = D3 and C = C3 can the solutions
be fitted smoothly at the fitting point with Pg = Pgf.
 Henyey's method 143
inside a shell of radius r. Since the zones with given abundances are nearly
stationary in mass while during stellar evolution they may move in and out
in radius r, it is better to choose the mass Mr inside a given shell as the
independent variable and calculate the corresponding radius, rather than
use the radius as the independent variable.
In order to obtain the five unknown functions we have to solve the
following differential equations (see Chapter 9) when we use Mr as the
independent variable.

dr
* (12-1)
dMr 4jtr2p

describing the change of mass Mr with an increase of radius by dr. This is

the transformation equation.
The condition of hydrostatic equilibrium is then

(12.2)
dMr 4jrr4

describing the equilibrium between pressure and gravitational forces.

The energy equation is

eT (12.3)
dMr dt
where S is the entropy. We have dS/T = d<2, where Q is the internal
energy. Equation (12.3) expresses the fact that the energy e generated per
g s has to either increase the luminosity, when it is transported outwards,
or it has to be used to increase the thermal energy Q, or the enthalpy.
In addition we must describe the temperature stratification either for
radiative energy transport or for convective energy transport. For the
latter the temperature stratification is adiabatic in the stellar interior
where the energy exchange is very small and the density p is very high (see
equation (6.46)).
Generally the temperature stratification can be described by

dlnP T dP T dMr dP

or, using equation (12.2), we find

=V =-V £ (12.5)
4 }
dMr PdMr P4jtr
144 Calculation of stellar models

Here P is the total pressure including gas pressure Pg, radiation pressure
Pr and perhaps turbulence pressure Pt.
Equation (12.5) does not contain any physics describing the kind of
energy transport. The physics is introduced when calculating the actual
value of V.
If the energy transport is radiative then

LJ (12.6)
r
For convective energy transport in the interior
V = Vad (12.7)
At each layer we have to check if Vrad < Vad; if so equation (12.6) has to be
used, otherwise equation (12.7) must be used. In low density regions we
have to calculate Vconv using the convection theory for instance as
described in Chapter 6.
In order to determine the abundances X, Y and Z which enter into the
calculations of K and £, we have to give the original abundances at the time
t = t0 and prescribe how the abundances at a given Mr change in time due
to nuclear reactions. One equation must describe how the helium abun-
dance Y increases due to the combining of four H 1 into He4 and the other
must describe how the hydrogen abundance X diminishes because four H 1
disappear when one He 4 is formed.
If the CNO cycle contributes to the energy generation then the abun-
dance changes of the C, N and O elements and isotopes involved in the
cycle also have to be considered. If those abundances change the number
of reactions changes and the energy generation changes.
If during late stages of stellar evolution heavy elements are generated
these abundance changes have to be included in the e term and possibly in
the K term.
If there is a negative JJL gradient, i.e. if the deeper layers have a larger ju
than the upper layers, we have to check carefully under which circum-
stances a rising bubble, which may have a larger// due to a larger helium
abundance, will still have a lower density p than its surroundings. The
actual temperature gradient needed for convective instability has to be larger
than for constant //, large enough to overcome the stabilizing effect of the//
gradient. For convective instability the Vrad has to be larger than a critical
gradient Vcr which is larger than Vad, the difference depending on the ju
gradient. Ifju is increasing outwards, which might happen if helium-rich
material is accreted from a neighboring star, then Vcr < Vad. In this case
 Henyey's method 145
we can have instability even for V < V ad . This is a so-called Rayleigh-
Taylor instability.
Equations (12.1), (12.2), (12.3) and (12.6) or (12.7) with specifications
(12.5) are the four differential equations of first order which have to be
solved in order to determine the four unknown functions P, T, r, L as
functions of Mr. We still have to give the equation of state which relates p
with P and T.
For the integration of the four differential equations of first order
describing P, T, L and r at any given time t we need four boundary
conditions. At the inner boundary coefficients containing r~x become
singular (see equations (12.5), (12.6)). In order to avoid this problem we
apply boundary conditions at r} > 0, but only slightly larger than 0. If r; is
very small then we may assume that inside r; the p is constant and p = p c .
We then have the relations
/ ^ \1/3
,,-(—) Mf (12.8)

P, = P c - i ( f ) " W 3 M , f (12.9)
Equation (12.9) describes the fact that at the radius ry the pressure Pj is
lower than the central pressure Pc by the weight of the overlying column of
thickness r;. The luminosity at this ry must be given by the energy generated
inside the radius ry by the mass Mrj, reduced by the amount of energy which
might be used to increase the temperature, which means

, (12,0)

We can also describe the temperature T(r7), because it must be given by

the central temperature
Tc- (dT/dMr)Mr. (12.11)
which leads to

Tr, = Tc-\ ( y ) G(p4c«/Pc)Vc TM? (12.12)

In this way we prescribe four boundary conditions near the center, but we
do not know Tc and Pc (pc is a function of Pc and Tc given by the equation of
state). We therefore cannot start the integration in the center.
We also have boundary conditions at the base of the atmosphere. At this
point, if the atmosphere is very thin and contains very little mass, we must
146 Calculation of stellar models
have Mr = M, the mass of the star, which we have to give if we want to
calculate a stellar model. In the atmosphere r = R, which has to be
calculated, and Lr = L which also has to be calculated. We do know,
however, that
and
F4(*) = 347'eff(t+ <?(*)) (12.13)
O

withg(r) ~ | (see Volume 2 or equation (7.1)). These equations relate Tto

L and R and therefore provide a boundary condition.
We have thus two real boundary conditions at the surface, namely
Mr = M, and equations (12.13). In the center we have four boundary
conditions with two unknowns, which also are equivalent to two boundary
conditions.
At no boundary do we have enough conditions to start the integration.
The Henyey method aims at making use of all four boundary conditions
simultaneously in order to find the solution for the whole star at any given
time t. The trick is to replace the differential equations by difference
equations, and solve a large system of linear equations for the unknowns at
all depth points.

12.2.2 The choice of variables

In order to replace the differential equations by difference
equations we have to set up a number of grid points in the independent
variable. We have to ensure that we have a large number of grid points in
regions where P, T, K, etc., change fast, which means close to the surface.
In equations (12.1)-(12.7) we have used Mr as the independent variable,
but in the outer regions close to the atmosphere P, T and p change very
rapidly while Mr hardly changes at all. One small step in Mr would
correspond to a large change in P and T. In order to keep the changes in p,
T and P small, we would need very many grid points in Mr, which means
extremely small values of AMr from one grid point to the next, while in the
center we do not need that many points because all the variables change
slowly with Mr. An independent variable such as

£ = ln(l — ) (12.14)

gives many grid points close to the surface but relatively few points near
the center. Here rj « 1 and can be chosen arbitrarily. Equal spacings A§
give many grid points in the atmosphere and fewer close to the center.
 Henyey's method 147
Other choices of £(Mr) are possible of course. Eggleton (1971), for
instance, chooses an independent variable which changes with time. We
then have to transform to the new independent variable with each time
step, but computing time can be saved in that way for a properly chosen
independent variable.
We will in the following call the independent variable £(Mr) without
specifying the function. We assume that all differential equations have
been transformed to differentials with respect to §.
For any numerical method to work accurately the dependent variables
as well as the independent variables should not vary by orders of magni-
tude through the star. Since pressure and temperature change by many
orders of magnitude it is better to choose for instance p = In P, 0 = In T,
x = In r and / = In L as dependent variables. These new variables are then
all functions of §.

12.2.3 Replacing differentials with differences

We now set up the grid points £;-, withy = 1 to m (see Fig. 12.2).
After all the transformations we have differential equations in all the
new variables. For instance, the differential equation describing the
change of radius with mass at a given layer with an index / where the grid
point is %j reads
dx 1 dx
z
(12.15)
4jtr (x)p(p,e,Xl)dr/ dMr
Similar equations are derived from the other differential equations.
The Xt give the element abundances; the index / stands for the different
elements.

Center Surface

m — 1 m — 2 m — 3 m — 4 1 =/

Mr
Fig. 12.2. A grid point system £; is set up throughout the star. The index/ runs from 1 to
m. The index/ = 1 refers to the point where the outer boundary condition is applied, m
refers to the center and m — 1 to the point r at which the interior boundary condition is
applied.
148 Calculation of stellar models

The differentials on the right-hand side can be calculated analytically

from the transformation relation. They are known functions of the
variables at point y. In order to do it right we have to evaluate all the
variables at the same layer.
If we express the right-hand side of equation (12.15) by the variables at
layer/ then the derivatives at the left-hand side also have to be evaluated at
the layer y. This means we have to write
dx *(; + !)-*(/-!) (12.16)

which would use rather large intervals to describe the differential.

If we want to use half that spacing and write
dx _ x{j + 1) - x(j) _ dx
(12.17)
l y+l/2
then this actually describes the differential at the center between y and
j + 1, i.e. at the layer with index; + \, which is not a grid point. In order to
be consistent we then have to express the right-hand side also by the
variables at the point y + |. Since this is not a grid point for which the
variables will be calculated we have to describe the variables at the point
y + \ by means of the variables at the grid points as for instance

(12-18)

and similarly for all the variables. If a function varies rapidly over the
interval y and y + 1, as may be the case for e, then other averages, for
instance, the geometric mean, may better describe the value at the point
y: + \. At any given time we have for each layer with index y: + \ a set of
equations in which only the variables at the points y and y' + 1 occur. This
means at each half point we have a set of four equations, replacing the four
differential equations, which are of the form
G/(py, 0/5Xj, lh %hPj+i, 0j+l,xj+1, lJ+1, £ /+ i) = 0 (12.19)
where / = 1,2,3,4, for the four differential equations. The G/ stand for the
functions derived from the differential equations describing /?(£), #(£)>
x(£) and /(£). They = 1, . . ., m — 2 if m — 1 is the number of grid points.
(For the region m (center) to m — 1 we have made the analytical inte-
gration with p = const., e = const.). This is a system of 4 x (m — 2)
 Henyey's method 149
equations for the 4 x (m - 1) unknowns at the layers with j =
1,. . ., (m - 1). We need four additional equations to determine the
unknowns. The additional four equations are the boundary conditions. Of
course we also have to know the chemical abundances at each point. For
main sequence stars we assume for the time t = t0 homogeneous abun-
dances through the whole star. Following the contraction history we see no
reason why there should be any element separation. (The time scales are
too short for diffusion to work through major parts of the star.)
The outer boundary condition applies to an atmospheric layer, for
instance a layer with r = §, for which T = Teff or oT4 = L/4JIR2. £(1) must
then refer to this layer and M r (l) = M. Integrations of the hydrostatic
equations for different R and L from x = 0 down to f = \ determine how P
depends on L and R for a given M. This relation provides another
boundary condition. Both boundary conditions relate the variables R, T
and L or P, R and L at the point/ = 1. They only contain variables at this
layer. They are of the general form

B1(pueuxul1) = 0 and B2(pu 0uxu h) = 0 (12.20)

This yields only two additional equations. We need two more, which come
from the interior boundary conditions. The analytical integration for the
central region from; = m (center) toy = m — 1, the innermost shell point,
leads to equations (12.8)-(12.12) which give us four additional equations.
At first sight it might appear that this is more than we can use. We realize,
however, that these equations contain the additional unknowns p c , Tc, Pc.
Making use of the equation of state, we are left with two unknowns, 6c,pc,
and four boundary conditions at the grid pointy = m — 1 which contain all
the variables at the layer m — \ and the two variables for the center pc and
Tc. The boundary conditions are of the form Ci(pm_1, 0 w _i, Xm_1, lm_l,
p m , 0m) = 0, for / = 1, . . .,4. The total number of equations then equals
the number of unknowns.
The equations are algebraic but non-linear. Before we can solve this
system we have to linearize the equations. For this we need an approxi-
mate zero order solution/?o(£), 0o(£)> ^o(£)> W£)- We then write a better
approximation to /?(£) as

P l (£) =/>(,(£)+ Ap(§) (12.21)

and similarly for the other unknowns.
In all the equations we replace the /?, 0, x, /, by these expressions and
then neglect the terms which are quadratic or of higher order in the
 150 Calculation of stellar models

corrections A/?, A#, Ax, and A/, leaving only terms which are linear in these
corrections. The equations then read

Gj = Gi0 + — - kpj + — - A0y + — - Axj + —j- A/y + A/?y+1

+ - A 0 y + 1 4- - Axy+1 + A/y+1 = 0 (12.22)

All the derivatives are calculated from the zero order approximation.
In addition the boundary conditions have to be linearized in the same
way.
We then have a system of 4(ra - 1) + 2 equations for the 4(ra - 1) + 2
unknowns, namely the corrections A/?, A0, Ax and A/ as well as A/?c and
A0C. These equations can be solved for the corrections. We thus find a
new, better approximation for the unknowns at the grid points. These are
not yet the correct solutions because we have used the zero order
approximations /? 0 , 0O, x 0 and /0 to calculate the coefficients in the system
of equations. Setting now

p 2 (£) = Pl(£) + Ap(£) (12.23)

and similarly for the other unknowns we can calculate new coefficients
using the better approximations/?!, 0 1? x 1? and lx and solve again for the
A/?, A0, Ax and A/ as well as A/?c and A0C, giving us a yet better
approximation to the correct solution.
If the zero order approximation was reasonably close the A/?, etc. should
become small after a few steps of iteration and the solutionsp n , etc., get
closer with each step and finally converge to a final solution /?(£), 0(£),
x(§) and /(§), as well as/? c and 0C.

12.2.4 Solution of the system of equations

With four unknowns at each of the m — 1 layers in the star we have
a large system of equations with a large number of unknowns. Even for a
system of linear equations it is not a trivial problem to calculate the
solutions but there are computer programs available now. It is to our
advantage that at each layer with index; + \ the equations contain only the
unknowns in two adjacent layers with indices ; and ; + 1 and not the
unknowns from all layers; in other words most of the coefficients in the
system of linear equations are zero except the diagonal ones in the matrix
 Stellar evolution 151
of coefficients. The scheme of coefficients is shown in Fig. 12.3, which is
taken from Kippenhahn, Weigert & Hofmeister (1967). Of special import-
ance is the fact that in the top boundary conditions only unknowns of one
point occur. This special scheme of coefficients enables us to develop a
method for the solution of the system of linear equations, which is saving
time and computer memory. It wasfirstdeveloped by Henyey et al. (1959),
and was extremely important at the time. It is described in detail in the
article by Kippenhahn, Weigert and Hofmeister (1967).

12.3 Stellar evolution

12.3.1 Reason for stellar evolution
So far we have considered the time t0 to be a given value. No time
changes have been considered. However, because of nuclear burning the
number of particles in the interior does change with time - it decreases.
This tends to reduce the pressure and therefore provokes a slight shrinking

6x, dl, dp, 60, d&2

38, 38, 3B, B^

dx, *J
382 3B2 38Z 382
dx, 31, dd,
36, 30, 36, 36, 36, 36, 36,
dt, 3p, 3d, 3x,t, 31,., 3p,.i
/=1.5
362 3G2 362 362 O6Z
IT:, dlr , 3B,H
d63
dl

36
j ~dp~
-w,
363 363 3O3
dPj.,
363 363
**J dl, -Wj 3Q, dxjt, dp,*, 39,.,
d6> d6> 36k 36k
w,
36k
dXj "i ~dP~ 30,
36, 36, 36, 36, 36, 36, 36, J6,
dx, 31; dp, 30J dl,.,

y = 2.5

y = 3.5

Fig. 12.3. The structure of the six equations for the top two layers in the system of linear
equations to be solved. In the top layer there are two equations (the boundary
conditions) for the four unknowns in layer; = 1. For the layer; = |we have four
equations for the eight unknowns in layers; = 1 and; = 2 only. For the layer; = 2^-we
again have four equations with eight unknowns in layers; =2 and; = 3 only. From
Kippenhahn, Weigert and Hofmeister (1967).
152 Calculation of stellar models
of the star with a corresponding need to increase the central pressure and
temperature. The nuclear processes force a slow change in the chemical
abundances and thus in the stellar structure. For a model at a later time we
have to consider a slightly different chemical composition with marginally
different energy generations e and different absorption coefficients K.
Since the star changes its density structure we must also consider the
release of gravitational energy.

12.3.2 Changes in chemical abundances

If the abundances by mass of the different chemical elements i at
time t0 are called Xt and the abundances at the time tx = t$ + Ar are called
X*, we must have

X?Xt + At

The change of the abundances Xt of the different chemical elements /

with time are given by

where thefirstterm on the right-hand side describes the abundance change

of element Xt due to nuclear reactions destroying this element. Here the
eik is the amount of energy generated per gram material and per second,
and Qik is the energy gained if one gram of element / is destroyed. The ratio
gives the abundance change per second. The second term on the right-
hand side describes the abundance gain of element i due to reactions which
lead to the formation of element i. Again eni is the amount of energy gained
per g s by this process and Qni the amount which would be gained if one
gram of element / is formed. For instance if we consider the abundance
change of N14 in the CNO cycle, the first term would describe the
destruction of N14 by the reaction

and the second term would describe the formation of N14 by the reaction
C13 + H 1 —> N14 + y. Qni is the energy which would be gained if one gram
of N14 is formed, while eni is the amount of energy actually gained per gram
of material and per second, which is of course much smaller.
 Stellar evolution 153

If the energy generation takes place in a convective region we have to

take into account the fact that the material is mixed essentially instan-
taneously. We then have to average the abundance changes over the whole
convection zone, for instance the cores of hot stars. We find

(12.25)
dt

12.3.3 Gravitational energy release

If during evolution the density stratification of the star changes we
have to consider the gravitational energy release, which locally is de-
scribed by —P dV, where V = p" 1 is the specific volume. This energy will
be used to increase either the radiative flux or the temperature. Consider-
ing nuclear energy generation also, we can write (see equation (10.33))

4^pL + ^ ^ r ) l (12.26)
l n 2 y
dr \ p dt dt\2/i j\ '
if the change in thermal energy is determined only by the change in kinetic
energy. In the outer convection zone the change in ionization energy also
has to be considered.
The last two terms in the bracket of equation (12.26) can be combined to
give
dL
r _ 4 _ r 2 J" _3 2/3 d P

The changes over time in volume and in internal heat appear as a

'correction' term to the nuclear energy generation en. In the outer stellar
regions this term may be the only energy generation or consumption term.
If changes over time, i.e. evolutionary changes, are calculated this term
has to be taken into account in the energy equation.

12.3.4 Evolution computations

For evolution calculations we have to take time steps of small but
finite length At. We assume a certain Af and calculate
154 Calculation of stellar models

^Y^L (12.28)

For the new abundances we calculate a static model at time ^i = ^o + At.

Since the abundance changes are so slow the star can always adjust to a
new hydrostatic configuration in a much shorter time (the Kelvin-
Helmholtz time) than the time over which the abundances change measur-
ably. Once we have an approximation for the new configurations t — tly we
can calculate A(Pp~5/3)/A£ for every depth layer and correct the energy
equation. While originally we had to take the eik and eni as calculated for
t = t0 we can now use an average value for times to and tx. We can again
iterate until we find convergence. Then the next time step can be taken.
This outlines the general procedure. For details and necessary pre-
cautions concerning numerical methods and choosing the right time steps
the reader is referred to the article by Kippenhahn, Weigert and Hofmeis-
ter(1967).
 13
Models for main sequence stars

13.1 Solar models

Here we describe only a few representative main sequence stellar

models. One is for the zero age sun, that is, the sun as it was when it had
just reached the main sequence and started to burn hydrogen. We also
reproduce a model of the present sun, a star with spectral type G2 V, i.e.
B — V ~ 0.63 and r eff ~ 5800 K, after it has burned hydrogen for about
4.5 X 109 years. In the next section we discuss the internal structures of a
BO star with Teff ~ 30 000 K and an A0 type main sequence star with
r eff ~ 10 800 K. There are several basic differences between these stars.
For the sun the nuclear energy production is due to the proton-proton
chain, which approximately depends only on the fourth power of tempera-
ture and is therefore not strongly concentrated towards the center. We do
not have a convective core in the sun, but we do have an outer hydrogen
convection zone in the region where hydrogen and helium are partially
ionized. The opacity in the central regions of the sun is due mainly to
bound-free and free-free transitions, though at the base of the outer
convection zone many strong lines of the heavy elements like C, N, O and
Fe also increase the opacity.
In Table 13.1 we reproduce the temperature and pressure stratifications
of the zero age sun. In Table 13.2 we give the values for the present sun as
given by Bahcall and Ulrich (1987). The central temperature of the sun
was around 13 million degrees when it first arrived on the main sequence;
Bahcall and Ulrich calculate that the Sun has increased its central tempera-
ture by approximately 2 million degrees since. Why? During hydrogen
burning four protons are combined to make one He 4 . This means that after
50 per cent of the hydrogen has been transformed to helium the number of
particles has decreased by a factor of 0.73, if the helium abundance was
originally 10 per cent by number. For a given temperature this decreases
the gas pressure by the same factor if the star did not contract.
155
156 Models for main sequence stars
Table 13.1. Distribution of mass, temperature, pressure, density and
luminosity for the young sun at the age of 5.4 x 107 years when it had
R = 6.14 x 1010cm = Roz, L = 2.66 x 1033 ergs'1 and Teff = 5610 K.
{These data were provided by C. Proffttt.)

T P
8 P
r/Roz Mr/Mo [K] [dyn cm 2] [g cm"3] L/Lo r/Ro

0 0 13.62 (6) 1.49(17) 8.02 (1) 0 0

0.014 1.00 (-4) 13.62 (6) 1.48 (17) 8.01 (1) 0.001 0.012
0.018 2.22 (-4) 13.60 (6) 1.48(17) 7.99(1) 0.003 0.016
0.035 1.64 (-3) 13.49 (6) 1.45 (17) 7.89(1) 0.020 0.031
0.057 7.23 (-3) 13.23 (6) 1.38(17) 7.67 (1) 0.076 0.051
0.081 1.99 (-2) 12.84 (6) 1.28 (17) 7.33 (1) 0.164 0.072
0.098 3.42 (-2) 12.49 (6) 1.19(17) 7.03 (1) 0.233 0.087
0.115 5.32 (-2) 12.09 (6) 1.10(17) 6.69 (1) 0.309 0.101
0.125 6.71 (-2) 11.84 (6) 1.04(17) 6.45 (1) 0.358 0.110
0.138 8.75 (-2) 11.50 (6) 9.59 (16) 6.14(1) 0.418 0.122
0.147 1.05 (-1) 11.24 (6) 9.00 (16) 5.90(1) 0.461 0.130
0.158 1.26 (-1) 10.94 (6) 8.33 (16) 5.61 (1) 0.506 0.140
0.178 1.69 (-1) 10.40 (6) 7.16(16) 5.07 (1) 0.575 0.157
0.198 2.18 (-1) 9.85 (6) 6.03 (16) 4.51 (1) 0.625 0.174
0.219 2.75 (-1) 9.28 (6) 4.93 (16) 3.92 (1) 0.655 0.193
0.263 3.99 (-1) 8.18 (6) 3.10(16) 2.80(1) 0.682 0.232
0.424 7.63 (-1) 5.26 (6) 4.11 (15) 5.81 (0) 0.692 0.374
0.635 9.45 (-1) 3.13 (6) 2.94 (14) 7.01 (-1) 0.690 0.560
0.731 9.74 (-1) 2.33 (6) 9.15(13) 2.94 (-1) 0.690 0.645
0.745 9.78 (-1) 2.16 (6) 7.56 (13) 2.62 (-1) 0.690 0.658
0.843 9.93 (-1) 1.18 (6) 1.65 (13) 1.05 (-1) 0.690 0.744
1.00 1.00 5.61 (3) 0.690 0.884

The numbers in brackets give the powers of 10.

Gravitational forces therefore exceed pressure forces. The star contracts

and becomes hotter. Slightly more energy is generated and the star
becomes somewhat brighter. Since the arrival on the main sequence the
sun has become brighter by about 0.3 magnitude. On time scales of the
order of 109 years the sun increases its luminosity by a few per cent, while it
remains on the main sequence and burns hydrogen. Stars of a given mass
but different ages populate a main sequence which has a width of about 0.5
magnitude.
In Fig. 13.1 we compare the temperature and pressure stratifications for
the zero age sun with the present sun. The pressure increases steeply in the
center. We also show the mass distribution Mr(r) in the sun. Fifty per cent
of the mass is concentrated within a radius of 0.25/?. In the layers in and
 Solar models 157
Table 13.2. Distribution of mass, temperature, pressure, density,
luminosity, and abundances of H, He, C and N in the present sun
according to Bahcall and Ulrich (1988).

T P P
r/RG MrIMQ [K] [dyn cm~2] [gem"3] L/LQ H He C N

0.0 0.0 1.56(7) 2.29 (17) 1.48(2) 0.0 0.341 0.639 2.61 (-5) 6.34 (-3)
0.024 0.0014 1.55 (7) 2.21 (17) 1.42(2) 0.012 0.359 0.621 2.50 (-5) 6.22 (-3)
0.048 0.0108 1.49(7) 1.99(17) 1.26(2) 0.085 0.408 0.571 2.24 (-5) 5.98 (-3)
0.071 0.0307 1.42(7) 1.72(17) 1.08(2) 0.217 0.467 0.513 1.98 (-5) 5.84 (-3)
0.095 0.0654 1.33(7) 1.41 (17) 8.99(1) 0.400 0.530 0.450 1.71 (-5) 5.78 (-3)
0.115 0.1039 1.25 (7) 1.18(17) 7.64(1) 0.553 0.577 0.403 1.50 (-5) 5.77 (-3)
0.135 0.1500 1.17(7) 9.60 (16) 6.45 (1) 0.688 0.615 0.364 1.68 (-5) 5.77 (-3)
0.149 0.186 1.12(7) 8.25 (16) 5.72(1) 0.766 0.637 0.342 1.84 (-4) 5.57 (-3)
0.162 0.222 1.07(7) 7.11(16) 5.10(1) 0.826 0.654 0.325 1.09 (-3) 4.52 (-3)
0.174 0.258 1.02(7) 6.14(16) 4.55 (1) 0.872 0.667 0.312 2.39 (-3) 3.00 (-3)
0.188 0.300 9.74 (6) 5.16(16) 3.99(1) 0.912 0.679 0.301 3.42 (-3) 1.80 (-3)
0.211 0.370 9.00 (6) 3.84(16) 3.18(1) 0.954 0.692 0.288 4.01 (-3) 1.11 (-3)
0.235 0.440 8.32 (6) 2.81 (16) 2.51(1) 0.978 0.699 0.280 4.12 (-3) 9.86 (-4)
0.259 0.510 7.67 (6) 2.00 (16) 1.94(1) 0.992 0.704 0.274 4.13 (-3) 9.66 (-4)
0.318 0.655 6.39 (6) 8.69 (15) 1.01(1) 1.000 0.708 0.271 4.14 (-3) 9.63 (-4)
0.504 0.900 3.88 (6) 6.59 (14) 1.27(0) 1.000 0.710 0.271 4.14 (-3) 9.63 (-4)
0.752 0.985 1.82(6) 2.98 (13) 1.22 (-1) 1.00 0.710 0.271 4.14 (-3) 9.63 (-4)
0.886 0.998 6.92 (5) 2.60 (12) 2.84 (-2) 1.00 0.710 0.271 4.14 (-3) 9.63 (-4)
0.920 0.999 4.54 (5) 8.95(11) 1.50 (-2) 1.00 0.710 0.271 4.14 (-3) 9.63 (-4)
1.000 1.000 5.77 (3) 1.00 0.710 0.271 4.14 (-3) 9.63 (-4)

The numbers in brackets give the powers of 10.

above the hydrogen convection zone we find less than 1 per cent of the
total mass.
In Fig. 13.2 we show the present distribution of element abundances in
the interior of the sun as calculated assuming an originally homogeneous
sun with 27 per cent helium and 71 per cent hydrogen by mass at the
beginning, and then burning hydrogen to helium according to local
temperatures and pressures. Two per cent of the mass is in the heavy
elements. Since the proton-proton chain is not very sensitive to tempera-
ture we find a small amount of hydrogen burning in off-core regions. The
mass fraction in which some nuclear reactions occur is fairly large for low
mass stars with the proton-proton chain as the energy source. For the sun
we see a small change in hydrogen abundance out to 50 per cent of the
mass.
We also find a change in the carbon and nitrogen abundances in the
central regions where the CNO cycle is operating very slowly. Since this
has been going on for 4.5 x 109 years there has been enough time to
achieve equilibrium abundances of C12 and N14, so nitrogen is about 300
times as abundant as carbon. Nitrogen is enriched by a factor of 7 while
158 Models for main sequence stars
carbon has been depleted by a factor of 200. Nearly all the carbon has been
transformed into nitrogen. A small fraction of oxygen has also been
transformed into nitrogen. Of course, the sum of carbon, nitrogen and
oxygen remains constant.

13.2 The solar neutrino problem

Generally we do not receive any radiation from the interiors of
stars because all photons are absorbed and re-emitted very frequently
during their diffusion to the stellar surface. There is, however, one kind of
radiation for which the absorption cross-section is extremely small; these
are the neutrinos. Neutrinos can therefore freely escape from the solar
interior where they are formed in several nuclear reactions occurring in the
energy generating cycles or chains. If we can observe these neutrinos they
provide a direct check on our assertion of nuclear energy generation in
stars. This observation is, of course, very difficult just because these
neutrinos hardly interact with any material. So how can they be observed?

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Fig. 13.1. The pressures and temperatures of the zero age (index z) and present sun are
shown as a function of radial distance from the center. Also shown is the mass
distribution in the present sun, according to Bahcall and Ulrich (1988). The data for the
zero age sun were kindly provided by Charles Proffitt.
 Solar neutrino problem 159
Only by using a very large amount of material and waiting for a long time
and then trying to measure a very few events of interaction with the solar
neutrinos.
Which kinds of neutrinos do we expect to be formed in the solar
interior? In Table 13.3 we list the important reactions which occur in the
different endings of the proton-proton chain. We also list the energies of
the generated neutrinos because these have important implications for the
possibility of observing them. Most of the neutrinos generated have very
low energies, and are even more difficult to observe than the more
energetic ones. There are, however, four reactions which, while inefficient
for energy generation, do generate fairly energetic neutrinos. The neu-
trino energies from these reactions are printed in bold in Table 13.3.
As indicated by the long lifetimes given in the last column of Table 13.3,
the reactions in lines 2 and 3 are rare in comparison with the reactions
shown in line 1. The He 3 + He 3 reaction is the most probable ending of the
proton-proton chain (see section 8.4). Only in about 14 per cent of the
cases will He 3 react with He 4 and form a Be7 nucleus. This will then lead to

7 X 1(T3 -

0.9 1.0

Fig. 13.2. The distributions of hydrogen, helium, carbon and nitrogen are shown as
calculated for the present sun. In the center a large fraction of hydrogen has already
been converted to helium. Carbon has been mainly converted to nitrogen. In the outer
50 per cent of mass, the abundances are unchanged. According to Bahcall and Ulrich
(1988).
160 Models for main sequence stars
Table 13.3. Neutrino generating nuclear reactions in the sun
(from Bahcall and Ulrich (1988).)

Neutrino energy Lifetime

[MeV] [years]

0.265 10 10
H 1 + p + e " -* H 2 + v e 1.442 IO12
9.625 IO12
Be 7 + e " -> Li 7 + ve 0.862 io- 1
0.384
B 8 ^ B e 8 + e + + ve 6.71 io- 8

the generation of a neutrino with either an energy of 0.862 or 0.384 MeV

or an even more energetic one with an average energy of 6.71 MeV if a B 8
nucleus is formed. The reaction Be7 + H 1 —» B 8 + y, however, is a factor
of 1000 less probable than the reaction in line 4. We can easily estimate
from the lifetimes given that these latter processes nevertheless generate
most of the energetic neutrinos.
As pointed out above any observation of neutrinos is extremely diffi-
cult. If the neutrinos can pass entirely through the sun without interacting
with any of the particles (there are about IO35 particles in a column of
cross-section 1 cm2 and length /? o in the sun) then they have no problems
passing through the Earth without any interaction. (If the average density
of the Earth is 6 g cm" 3 there are approximately IO23 particles per cm3, and
with a diameter of 12000 km = 1.2 x IO9 cm the column density for the
Earth is roughly IO32 particles cm" 2.)
Our only chance is to use particles whose cross-section for neutrino
interaction is relatively large and to amass a very large amount of them,
which means they must also not be very expensive.
R. Davis found that Cl37 has a fairly large cross-section and can be
obtained inexpensively in the form of C2C14, perchlorethylene, a cleaning
fluid. He built a large tank originally holding IO5 gallons (1 gallon ~
4 litres) of this cleaning fluid. In order to cut down on interference by
cosmic ray radiation, which could perturb the measurements, he placed
the tank in an abandoned gold mine in South Dakota.
A neutrino can react with Cl37 to form A37 by the reaction

Cl 3 7 -^e- + A37 (13.1)

 Solar neutrino problem 161
but only if the neutrino has an energy larger than the threshold energy of
0.814 MeV. This reaction can therefore only occur with the more energetic
neutrinos as printed in bold in Table 13.3.
The most energetic neutrinos originate from the B 8 reactions. These
neutrinos have the largest chance of reacting with Cl37 in the tank, but only
14 per cent of the He 3 reactions go through this ending. Even for these
energetic neutrinos the cross-section for capture by a Cl37 atom is still
extremely small, namely 10~42 cm2. With the calculated solar flux of
energetic neutrinos Davis expected to measure about six reactions per day
in the 105 gallon tank. This means that after waiting for a week he expected
to have 42 atoms of A37 in his 105 gallon tank. How long could he wait in
order to accumulate more A 37 atoms? Not longer than about a month
because the A 37 is unstable and radioactively decays back to Cl37 by the
reaction

with a half-life of 35 days. In this process the A 37 emits an Auger electron

with an energy of 2.8 MeV. So Davis had to find a way to discover about a
hundred A37 atoms in the 105 gallon tank! He pumped helium gas through
the tank which flushed out the A 37. The helium gas was then pumped
through charcoal which adsorbs the A 37. How efficient was this method in
recovering the A37? In order to test this Davis added known amounts of
A36 and A37 to his tank and followed the same procedure. He recovered 95
per cent of the A atoms He had added.
Davis still had to count the A37 atoms which were adsorbed to the
charcoal. For this it was helpful that A 37 decays by emitting an Auger
electron of a well-known energy of 2.8 MeV. The charcoal was placed into
an electron counting device which also measured the energy of the
electron. Only those with an energy of 2.8 MeV were counted. Special
precautions were taken not to measure electrons passing through the
whole apparatus but only those which originated within the measuring
device.
Here we have to pause and talk about the units in which neutrino fluxes
are measured. The unit is SNU, which stands for solar neutrino unit.
1 SNU corresponds to 10~36 neutrino captures per target atom per second.
This is equal to 1 capture per day in the 105 gallon tank.
With the calculated solar neutrino flux Davis expected originally to
measure at least 6 SNU. The exact value depends on the adopted solar
model and on the nuclear reaction cross-sections for the different reactions
leading to the emission of energetic neutrinos. The most modern value for
162 Models for main sequence stars
the expected number of captures is 7.9 SNU. However, Davis only
measured about 2 SNU on average after measuring for about 20 years with
increasing amounts of C2C14. This is the solar neutrino problem!
Several suggestions have been made in order to resolve the problem:
1. It has lead to speculations that the neutrino rest mass may not
be zero. In this case the solar neutrinos could change into other kinds of
neutrinos before they reach the Earth. This question is still unresolved.
2. Another possibility might be erroneous nuclear reaction rates.
If for instance the CNO cycle is more efficient than we think or if there is an
additional energy generating chain or cycle then there would be fewer
proton-proton chain reactions leading to fewer energetic neutrinos. If the
proton-proton chain is also more efficient than we think then the neces-
sary energy generation could be achieved with a lower central tempera-
ture. The B 8 nuclear reactions, generating the energetic neutrinos, are
very temperature sensitive (^T 1 8 ); a lower temperature in the solar
interior could also solve the problem. If the other endings of the proton-
proton cycle not including B 8 are more efficient than calculated, the solar
neutrino flux is also reduced. Extensive checks of the cross-sections have
lead to revisions but not to an agreement between the observed and
calculated neutrino fluxes.
3. The solar model might be incorrect. This latter possibility is of
special interest to us in the context of this book. As mentioned in the
preceding paragraph a reduction of the solar central temperature from
15.6 x 106 K to 15.2 x 106 K could solve the neutrino problem because the
generation of energetic neutrinos is so temperature sensitive. This does
not sound like a large correction but it would cause several large problems.
If the central temperature is decreased by 4 per cent the solar energy
generation, which is proportional to T4, is reduced by 16 per cent. The
solar luminosity would then come out much too low. There is a way out.
Since the sun has been burning hydrogen for 4.5 x 109 years already,
hydrogen in the center is depleted by a factor up to 2 as seen in Fig. 13.2. If
more hydrogen is brought into the central regions then more nuclear
reactions will take place and the luminosity will increase. Therefore
interior mixing could solve the luminosity problem. There is, however,
also a problem satisfying the radiative transfer equation. Starting from the
layer with f = \ where reff = 5800 K we integrate the temperature stratifi-
cation inwards and reach T = 1.56 x 107 K in the center. In order to reach
the lower temperature of 1.52 x 107K the temperature gradient would
have to be smaller. This might be achieved by choosing a larger mixing
length / in the convection theory. More efficient convection would reduce
 Solar neutrino problem 163
the temperature gradient and thereby the central temperature. But more
efficient convection would also extend the convection zone to greater
depths which gets us into trouble with the observed Li 7 abundance, which
should then be zero.
The only other way to decrease the temperature gradient inwards is to
reduce the radiative gradient by decreasing K. Just below the convection
zone, K is still rather large because of the bound-free and free-free
absorption of hydrogen and helium; K is further increased by line absorp-
tion from carbon, nitrogen and oxygen. The temperature gradient and K
would be reduced were the abundance of heavy elements in these layers
lower than observed at the solar surface. Ulrich (1974) found that a
reduction by roughly a factor of 10 could solve the neutrino problem. A
general reduction of the heavy element abundances in the solar interior
seems rather unlikely. It might be easier to deplete the strongest absorbers
just in the layers where they contribute most to K; for instance, the C, N, O
elements or iron in the layers below the convection zone. If, for instance,
carbon would be the main absorber in this layer then the total radiative
acceleration due to photon absorption, which transmits a momentum hvlc
to the absorbers, would work on the carbon ions alone. They would be
pushed upwards into the convection zone. Carbon would then be reduced
in the layer where it contributes most to K but enriched at the surface.
Oxygen might be more important in another layer and thus pushed out of
that layer. In this way the main absorbers are always reduced in the layer
where they perform the absorption. The K would be reduced in all layers
where elements other than helium and hydrogen are the main absorbers,
and the temperature gradient would be reduced leading to a lower central
temperature. If such an element, for instance carbon, is pushed up into the
convection zone it is transported to the surface immediately, enriching the
surface abundance. Trial calculations by Nelson and Bohm-Vitense found
that if carbon were the main absorber below the convection zone the
surface abundance of carbon could be increased by a factor of 2 during a
time of 4.5 x 109 years while the abundance just below the convection
zone is decreased by a similar factor. The assumption that the observed
surface abundance holds for the deeper layers could then lead to an
overestimate of K by a factor of 4 in the important layers. While this effect
must be present in principle, the quantitative results depend strongly on
the actual values of the absorption coefficients for the different elements.
It is not known at present whether this kind of radiative diffusion together
with additional mixing in the solar interior bringing more hydrogen into
the nuclear burning regions, could help to solve the neutrino problem.
164 Models for main sequence stars
Table 13.4. Temperature, pressure and mass distribution of a zero age
main sequence BO star with M = 15 M o , Teff = 30 423 K,R = 5.6RO.

T P
r/Ro M r /M o [K] [dyn cm 2] [gem"3] L/LQ

0.0 0.014 3.04 (7) 2.06 (16) 4.50 0

0.16 0.014 3.03 (7) 2.03 (16) 4.50 4.84 (2)
0.20 0.025 3.02 (7) 2.01 (16) 4.43 8.07 (2)
0.25 0.049 3.00 (7) 1.98(16) 4.39 1.50(3)
0.30 0.087 2.98 (7) 1.94(16) 4.33 2.49 (3)
0.35 0.135 2.96 (7) 1.90(16) 4.28 3.62 (3)
0.40 0.200 2.94 (7) 1.85 (16) 4.21 4.97 (3)
0.50 0.378 2.88 (7) 1.75(16) 4.05 7.93 (3)
0.60 0.631 2.81 (7) 1.62 (16) 3.87 1.09(4)
0.70 0.960 2.74 (7) 1.49 (16) 3.68 1.34(4)
0.80 1.390 2.65 (7) 1.35(16) 3.44 1.55(4)
1.00 2.51 2.44 (7) 1.06(16) 2.97 1.76(4)
1.20 3.89 2.22 (7) 7.95 (15) 2.49 1.81 (4)

1.40 5.46 1.98(7) 5.64 (15) 2.01 1.81 (4)

1.60 7.09 1.75(7) 3.82 (15) 1.56 1.85 (4)
2.00 10.15 1.36(7) 1.48(15) 7.91 (-1) 2.04 (4)
2.50 12.72 9.78 (6) 3.76 (14) 2.93 (-1) 2.25 (4)
3.00 14.07 6.98 (6) 9.53 (13) 9.84 (-2) 2.34 (4)
3.50 14.68 4.85 (6) 2.00 (13) 2.98 (-2) 2.38 (4)
4.00 14.91 3.23 (6) 3.50 (12) 7.69 (-3) 2.39 (4)
4.50 14.98 4.19(5) 4.25 (11) 1.53 (-3) 2.39 (4)
5.00 14.99 9.15(5) 1.83 (10) 1.39 (-4) 2.39 (4)
5.25 15.00 4.99 (5) 1.29(9) 1.75 (-5) 2.39 (4)
5.47 15.00 1.76 (5) 1.27(7) 6.12 (-7) 2.39 (4)
5.60 15.00 3.04 (4) 2.39 (4)

The line space shows the boundary of the convective core.

The numbers in brackets give the powers of 10.

13.3 Hot star models

In Table 13.4 we show the data for the interior temperatures and
pressures of a B0 star, a hot star with Teff ~ 30 400 K, for the time when the
star arrives at the main sequence, i.e. for the zero age main sequence B0
star. This particular star has a mass of 15 M© and a radius of 5.6 /?©. The
data were calculated by Wendee Brunish (to whom we are indebted for
making these data available to us).
In Table 13.5 we show the depth dependence of T and P for the main
sequence B0 star after it has been on the main sequence for
 Hot star models 165
Table 13.5. Distribution of mass, temperature, pressure, density,
luminosity, and abundances of H, He, C and N in a BO star with 15 M o
and age of 8.6 x 106 years

T P
rlRQ Mr/MQ [K] [dyncm 2] [gem"3] L/Lo H He C ]

0.00 0 3.74(7) 2.51 (16) 6.51 0 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) L.10(-2)
0.12 8.0 (-3) 3.72(7) 2.46 (16) 6.50 7.31 (2) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) L.10 (-2)
0.15 1.55 (-2) 3.71 (7) 2.44 (16) 6.39 1.34(3) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) L10(-2)
0.20 3.65 (-2) 3.68 (7) 2.39 (16) 6.31 2.96 (3) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) 1L10(-2)
0.25 7.00 (-2) 3.66 (7) 2.33 (16) 6.21 5.28 (3) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) ]L.10(-2)
0.30 1.19 (-1) 3.62 (7) 2.26 (16) 6.08 8.25 (3) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) 1L10(-2)
0.35 1.87 (-1) 3.58(7) 2.18(16) 5.94 1.17(4) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) 1L10(-2)
0.40 2.57 (-1) 3.54 (7) 2.09 (16) 5.77 1.55(4) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) 1L10(-2)
0.50 5.16 (-1) 3.43 (7) 1.88(16) 5.41 2.26 (4) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) L10(-2)
0.60 8.49 (-1) 3.31 (7) 1.67(16) 4.99 2.84(4) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) 1L10(-2)
0.70 1.28 3.17(7) 1.44(16) 4.54 3.20 (4) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) 'L10(-2)
0.80 1.79 3.01 (7) 1.20(16) 4.10 3.28(4) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) 11.10 (-2)
1.00 3.04 2.67 (7) 8.16(15) 3.18 3.56 (4) 0.20 0.78 2.08 (-4) 1L10(-2)

1.20 4.33 2.33 (7) 5.23 (15) 1.43 3.58(4) 0.36 0.62 1.07 (-4) 11.09 (-2)
1.50 5.89 1.95 (7) 3.00 (15) 1.06 3.58(4) 0.65 0.33 6.0 (-5) t5.7 (-3)
2.00 8.33 1.50(7) 1.27(15) 5.74 (-1) 3.58(4) 0.70 0.28 1.86 (-3) :>.04(-3)
2.50 10.53 1.17(7) 5.10(14) 3.00 (-1) 3.58 (4) 0.70 0.28 2.81 (-3) 5).30(-4)
3.0 12.23 9.10(6) 1.98(14) 1.50 (-1) 3.58(4) 0.70 0.28 2.82 (-3) S).20(-4)
4.0 14.11 5.60 (6) 2.70 (13) 3.38 (-2) 3.57 (4) 0.70 0.28 2.82 (-3) S).20(-4)
5.0 14.77 3.41 (6) 3.36 (12) 6.81 (-3) 3.57(4) 0.70 0.28 2.82 (-3) 5).20(-4)
6.0 14.96 1.90(6) 2.95(11) 1.07 (-3) 3.57 (4) 0.70 0.28 2.82 (-3) 9.20 (-4)
7.0 14.988 8.32(5) 9.31 (9) 7.53 (-5) 3.57 (4) 0.70 0.28 2.82 (-3) 5).2O (-4)
7.5 15.00 4.31 (5) 5.32 (8) 7.94 (-6) 3.57(4) 0.70 0.28 2.82 (-3) 5).2O (-4)
7.95 15.00 1.27(5) 2.79(6) 1.25 (-7) 3.57 (4) 0.70 0.28 2.82 (-3) S).2O (-4)
8.14 15.00 2.79 (4) 3.57(4) 0.70 0.28 2.82 (-3) S).2O (-4)

The line space shows the boundary of the convective core.

The numbers in brackets give the powers of 10.

8.6 X 106 years. Its radius has increased to 8.14 RQ, and the reff has
decreased to 27 900 K. (These data were also provided by Wendee
Brunish.)
For the B0 star models discussed here mass loss has not been con-
sidered. For the O stars we observe rather strong mass loss. For stars with
masses larger than about 30 M o the mass loss may change the stellar
masses measurably and the decreasing mass has to be taken into account
though the exact amount is difficult to determine. Because of the mass
loss, the luminosities of the stars are somewhat decreased.
In Fig. 13.3 we compare the temperature and pressure stratifications of
the zero age star with 15 M o and the same star after it has been on the main
166 Models for main sequence stars
sequence for 8.6 x 106 years. As for the sun, central temperature and
pressure increase because of the conversion of hydrogen into helium and
the contraction of the core. The outer layers expand because at the surface
of the helium enriched core, which is at the bottom of the hydrogen
envelope, the temperature has become too high for the hydrogen envel-
ope. The surplus expands the envelope.
The temperatures in the interior of a massive star are higher than in a
low mass star like the sun, but, as may be surprising at first sight, the gas
pressures are not. We remember, however, from the comparison of
homologous stars that we expect Pc <* M2/R4 and Tc <* MIR. If Tc in-
creases by a factor of 2 as compared to the sun and R by a factor of 5 then
the pressure must decrease, as is calculated. The reason for this is the low
density of these hot stars.

13 g>

Fig. 13.3. The temperature and pressure stratifications in a zero age main sequence star
with 15 MQ are compared with the same star 8.6 x 106 years later. Due to the
transformation of hydrogen into helium the central temperature, pressure and density
have increased. According to data provided by W. Brunish.
 Hot star models 167
We also have to be aware that for the O stars the radiation pressure P r
can be quite important. Since the total pressure P = Pg + Pr has to balance
the weight of the overlying material, Pg can be smaller.
Because of the higher central temperature in B stars, the nuclear energy
is supplied by the CNO cycle which depends approximately on the 16th
power of the temperature. The energy generation is therefore strongly
concentrated towards the center. Nearly all the luminosity is generated in
a very small volume. In this small volume the energy flux is very large and
we find a core convection zone. This core therefore remains well mixed, as
it has homogeneous chemical abundances in spite of the conversion of H 1
into He 4 being concentrated in the central parts of the core (see Fig. 13.4).
If no convective overshoot past the boundary of the convective core occurs
we should find an abrupt change in chemical abundances. In the convec-
tive core the helium abundance increases during the main sequence
lifetime, while outside the core the original abundances are preserved.

i
i i i i i i
IN
He
H
0.7
3
13 X 10~
- 0.6
N
11
- 0.5 S

§ 9 0

•8 7 --
fir H0.4 _g
X
He 0.3 x
5 -
H j
h - 0.2
3 -

1
A- C

N
0.1

—1 1 1 I 1 1 0
0 4 5

Fig. 13.4. The abundances of hydrogen, helium, carbon and nitrogen are plotted as a
function of distance from the center for a star of 15 M© with an age of 8.6 x 106 years. In
the central convection zone the abundances are uniform. The convective core extends to
r/Ro ~ 1.0. Over the next half solar radius we still find abundance changes partly due to
the fact that the convective core originally was somewhat larger, and partly due to semi-
convection causing some mixing. Outside 2.5 RQ the original chemical abundances are
unchanged. According to data provided by W. Brunish.
168 Models for main sequence stars
Under these circumstances we may find it hard to decide for very hot stars
whether the layer directly above the convective core proper becomes
unstable to convection or not. We find what is called semi-convection (see
the next section).
In the core where the CNO cycle is active the relative abundances of
carbon, nitrogen and oxygen are drastically changed as seen in Fig. 13.4;
we expect to see this because equilibrium abundances for the CNO cycle
are established in the core.

13.4 Semi-convection
Convection sets in if the radiative temperature gradient exceeds
the adiabatic one. The radiative temperature gradient increases for
increasing opacity K + <7, where a is the electron scattering coefficient. In
O star interiors electron scattering is most important for radiative transfer,
more important than even the bound-free or free-free absorption conti-
nua. In a hydrogen atmosphere we find one electron per proton, i.e., one
electron per unit atomic mass. In a helium atmosphere we find two
electrons per He 4 , or 0.5 electrons per unit atomic mass. The 'absorption'
coefficient per gram is therefore higher in the envelope layer with 10 per
cent helium than in the core with, say, 40 per cent helium. At the boundary
of the well-mixed helium rich core we find by definition the boundary for
convective stability using the core helium abundance; that is, we find
convective stability outside of the core. In the layer just above this
boundary we have, however, only 10 per cent helium. For this abundance
we find V r >V a d , implying convective instability. For this low helium
abundance K + o per gram is larger and therefore Vrad is larger. So if we
assume there is no mixing across the core boundary, i.e. no convection, we
find that in the layers just outside of the core we have convective instability
and therefore mixing. If we assume we have convective instability and
therefore mixing with the core wefindconvective stability. So whatever we
assume is inconsistent with what we find as a result of the assumption.
Therefore it is generally assumed that there is some slow convection
causing just enough mixing to keep this layer marginally unstable. The
condition of marginal convective stability determines the helium abun-
dance in the semi-convective layer. Even if the layer is only marginally
unstable to convection we still find V = Vad for the temperature stratifi-
cation. The actual degree of mixing in these semi-convective layers is still a
 Structure of main sequence A stars 169
major point of uncertainty for the hot star stratification, as is the question
how much convective overshoot we might expect. Generally the question
of mixing in stellar interiors is still open to debate.
Distortion of the star due to rapid rotation, as found for most massive
stars, causes so-called Eddington-Sweet circulations. Material slowly rises
in polar regions and sinks in equatorial regions. Some slow mixing might
occur because of this circulation; however, the increasing atomic weight
towards the deeper layers with higher helium content tends to inhibit or
slow down these currents so much that mixing over major fractions of the
star through these currents is not theoretically expected over the lifetime
of the stars.

13.5 Structure of main sequence A stars

From Volume 1 we know that early A stars with TQ# ~ 10 800 K
have masses around 2.5 M©. Such stars are of spectral type A0. (Vega is an
A0 star with Teff ~ 9500 K.)
The A stars are different from the hot O and B stars inasmuch as they
have only small convective cores. The CNO cycle is operative in the very
center, but further out the temperatures are lower and the proton-proton
chain still contributes to energy generation. This is therefore not as
strongly concentrated towards the center as in the very hot O stars. Of
course, luminosity is smaller in an A star than in an O star and this also
reduces the Vr in the central regions and hence the size of the convective
core.
The structures of A stars with Teff ~ 10 000 K differ from those of cooler
stars because they do not have an outer convection zone which contributes
any measurable convective energy transport. For all practical purposes an
A star has no outer convection zone, except that small, convective
velocities, of the order of cm s" 1, might be found, just enough to keep the
outer layers well mixed.
The A stars therefore have the smallest convective regions. They have
only a small convective core and essentially no outer convection zone. This
is important in the understanding of magnetic A stars.
In Tables 13.6 and 13.7 we show the temperature, pressure, luminosity
and chemical abundance stratifications for two main sequence A stars.
(These data were kindly provided by Wendee Brunish.)
170 Models for main sequence stars
Table 13.6. Distribution of mass, temperature, pressure, density and
luminosity in a zero age main sequence star with M = 2.5 Mo, having
Teff= 10800K, R = 7.9

T P
rlRo M r /M o [K] [dyn cm 2] [gem"3] L/Lo

0 0 2.05 (7) 1.10(17) 3.97(1) 0

0.04 0.002 2.04 (7) 1.09 (17) 3.93 (1) 0.90
0.05 0.004 2.03 (7) 1.08(17) 3.91 (1) 1.68
0.06 0.006 2.02 (7) 1.07(17) 3.89(1) 2.73
0.08 0.014 2.00 (7) 1.04(17) 3.82(1) 5.66
0.10 0.028 1.97(7) 9.99 (16) 3.74(1) 9.74
0.12 0.046 1.94(7) 9.60 (16) 3.65 (1) 13.9
0.14 0.072 1.90(7) 9.13(16) 3.55 (1) 18.5
0.17 0.125 1.83 (7) 8.32 (16) 3.36(1) 24.5
0.20 0.196 1.76(7) 7.48 (16) 2.91 (1) 29.1
0.30 0.557 1.46 (7) 4.53 (16) 2.33 (1) 37.9
0.50 1.48 9.78 (6) 9.99 (15) 7.96 42.8
0.70 2.08 6.69 (6) 1.75 (15) 1.96 46.1
0.90 2.35 4.66 (6) 2.91 (14) 4.79 (-1) 47.6
1.10 2.45 3.26 (6) 5.11(13) 1.19 (-1) 48.0
1.30 2.49 2.20 (6) 8.38 (12) 2.92 (-2) 48.13
1.50 2.50 1.36 (6) 1.08 (12) 6.10 (-3) 48.15
1.70 2.50 7.00 (5) 6.48 (10) .7.12 (-4) 48.15
1.91 2.50 1.45(5) 5.36 (7) 1.93 (-5) 48.15
1.97 2.50 1.08 (4) 48.15

The numbers in brackets give the powers of 10.

13.6 The peculiar A stars

As we discussed in Volume 1 rather strong magnetic fields are
observed for some early A and late B stars. Guided by solar observations
we believe that the magnetic fields responsible for the sunspot cycle are
created by a dynamo action due to the interaction of differential rotation
(the equatorial regions rotate faster than the polar regions) and convec-
tion. For the magnetic late B and A stars the creation of a magneticfieldby
this method does not seem to be possible, at least not in the outer layers,
because there is no outer convection zone with measurable convective
velocities. For sunspots the suppressed convective energy transport in the
magnetic regions is believed to be the origin for the lower temperatures in
the magnetic spots. The formation of dark spots, similar to the sunspots,
which many people claim to be present on magnetic A stars, cannot be due
to the suppression of convective energy flux, because convective energy
flux is not present in the outer regions of A stars and therefore cannot be
 Peculiar A stars 171

Table 13.7. Distribution of mass, temperature, pressure, density,

luminosity and abundances of H, He, C and N in a main sequence star
with M = 2.5 M o at an age of 2.98 x 108 years, R = 2.6 R o

T P
r/RQ Mr/Mo [K] [dyncm 2] [gem"3] LILQ H He C N

0 0 2.50 (7) 1.34(17) 6.37(1) 0 0.20 0.78 1.03 (-4) 1.05 (-2)
0.03 0.0012 2.49 (7) 1.31 (17) 6.30(1) 2.14 0.20 0.78 1.03 (-4) 1.05 (-2)
0.04 0.0028 2.47 (7) 1.30(17) 6.25 (1) 4.70 0.20 0.78 1.03 (-4) 1.05 (-2)
0.05 0.0056 2.45 (7) 1.27(17) 6.18(1) 8.41 0.20 0.78 1.03 (-4) 1.05 (-2)
0.06 0.0095 2.43 (7) 1.24(17) 6.09(1) 1.32(1) 0.20 0.78 1.03 (-4) 1.05 (-2)
0.08 0.021 2.38 (7) 1.17(17) 5.89(1) 2.46(1) 0.20 0.78 1.03 (-4) 1.05 (-2)
0.10 0.042 2.31 (7) 1.09(17) 5.64(1) 3.62(1) 0.20 0.78 1.03 (-4) 1.05 (-2)
0.12 0.070 2.23 (7) 9.94 (16) 5.35(1) 4.55 (1) 0.20 0.78 1.03 (-4) 1.05 (-2)
0.15 0.127 2.09 (7) 8.35 (16) 4.84(1) 5.38(1) 0.20 0.78 1.03 (-4) 1.05 (-2)
0.20 0.265 1.81(7) 5.87 (16) 3.33(1) 5.72(1) 0.36 0.62 6.18 (-5) 9.82 (-3)
0.30 0.550 1.46(7) 3.20 (16) 1.66(1) 5.83(1) 0.69 0.29 1.76 (-5) 4.25 (-3)
0.50 1.24 1.01 (7) 8.78 (15) 6.53 5.87(1) 0.70 0.28 2.18 (-3) 1.75 (-3)
0.70 1.81 7.31 (6) 2.13(15) 2.24 5.87(1) 0.70 0.28 2.81 (-3) 9.35 (-4)
0.90 2.15 5.43 (6) 5.20 (15) 7.37 (-1) 5.87(1) 0.70 0.28 2.81 (-3) 9.35 (-4)
1.10 2.33 4.09 (6) 1.34(14) 2.52 (-1) 5.87(1) 0.70 0.28 2.81 (-3) 9.35 (-4)
1.40 2.45 2.70 (6) 1.90(13) 5.41 (-2) 5.87(1) 0.70 0.28 2.81 (-3) 9.35 (-4)
1.90 2.50 1.18(6) 5.60(11) 3.63 (-3) 5.87(1) 0.70 0.28 2.81 (-3) 9.35 (-4)
2.25 2.50 5.17(5) 1.51 (10) 2.23 (-4) 5.87(1) 0.70 0.28 2.81 (-3) 9.35 (-4)
2.52 2.50 1.06(5) 1.34(7) 1.04 (-6) 5.87(1) 0.70 0.28 2.81 (-3) 9.35 (-4)
2.60 2.50 9.93 (4) 5.87(1) 0.70 0.28 2.81 (-3) 9.35 (-4)

The numbers in brackets give the powers of 10.

suppressed by magnetic fields. If dark spots are present in the peculiar A

stars, there must be a different explanation.
While some magnetic fields could be generated in the convective cores
of A stars and diffuse to the surface in about 108 years, it seems more likely
that the observed magnetic fields in the magnetic A stars are just fossil
fields inherited from the interstellar clouds from which the stars were
formed.
 14
Evolution of low mass stars

14.1 Evolution along the subgiant branch

14.1.1 Solar mass stars
From previous discussions we know that solar mass stars last about
1010 years on the main sequence. Lower mass stars last longer. Since the
age of globular clusters seems to be around 1.2 x 1010 to 1.7 x 1010 years
and the age of the universe does not seem to be much greater, we cannot
expect stars with masses much smaller than that of the Sun to have evolved
off the main sequence yet. We therefore restrict our discussion to stars
with masses greater than about 0.8 solar masses, which we observe for
globular cluster stars.
We discussed in Section 10.2 that for a homogeneous increase in ju
through an entire star (due to an increase in helium abundance and
complete mixing), the star would shrink, become hotter and more lumi-
nous. It would evolve to the left of the hydrogen star main sequence
towards the main sequence position for stars with increasing helium
abundance. In fact, we do not observe star clusters with stars along
sequences consistent with such an evolution (except perhaps for the so-
called blue stragglers seen in some globular clusters which are now
believed to be binaries or merged binaries). Nor do we know any
mechanism which would keep an entire star well mixed. We therefore
expect that stars become helium rich only in their interiors, remaining
hydrogen rich in their envelopes. Since nuclear fusion is most efficient in
the center where the temperature is highest, hydrogen depletion proceeds
fastest in the center. Hydrogen will therefore be exhausted first in the
center. As helium becomes enriched, the core keeps shrinking and heating
up and we find a growing helium rich core. For this small but growing
helium rich star (the core) the central temperature increases; in fact its
increase is sufficient to enable these already hydrogen depleted layers to
172
 Evolution along sub giant branch 173
generate enough energy to make up for the radiative energy loss at the
surface. As these layers heat up, the CNO cycle becomes more important,
relative to the proton-proton chain. Because the CNO cycle is pro-
portional to T 16 , the energy generation is concentrated in the highest
temperature regions in which hydrogen is still present. This means that
energy generation is increasingly concentrated in a narrow region near the
rim of the helium rich core. A so-called shell source develops around a
core which finally becomes a pure helium core containing more than 10 per
cent of the stellar mass. This shell source reaches a temperature of about
20 x 10 6 K for which the CNO cycle is the main fusion process. Gravi-
tational forces so squeeze the helium core that this temperature is reached
in the shell source and enough energy is generated.
On the other hand we know that for a hydrogen star of one solar mass
such a high interior temperature and corresponding pressure are too high
to be in equilibrium with gravitational forces. While for the helium star in
the center with large ju such a high temperature is needed for the balance of
forces it is too high for the lowju hydrogen envelope. At some point outside
the helium core the high temperature causes an excess pressure for the
hydrogen envelope which then expands. Temperature, pressure and
gravitational forces in the envelope are then reduced until a balance is re-
established between pressure and gravity forces. Such an expansion starts
already while the star is still on the main sequence but it becomes more
noticeable if more than about 10 per cent of the stellar mass is in the helium
core. The expansion of the hydrogen envelope terminates the main
sequence lifetime, thus only 10 per cent of the hydrogen is used for energy
generation during the main sequence phase of a star's lifetime.
During the phase of 'rapid' envelope expansion the shell source at the
rim of the helium star does not notice anything. It maintains the high
temperature necessary to replenish, by nuclear reactions, the energy lost
at the surface. (Were it not to do so the thermal energy would fall below its
equilibrium value, the neighboring layers would contract and heat up until
enough energy is generated.) The luminosity remains essentially constant
while the envelope expands. With increasing radius but constant lumino-
sity the effective temperature must decrease. The star moves to the right in
the HR diagram along the giant or subgiant branch depending on the
stellar mass. During this time the shell source slowly burns its way out,
getting closer to the surface and moving the 20 x 106 K layer further out in
the envelope. This causes further expansion. A small increase in mass of
the helium core causes a relatively large expansion of the envelope.
During this phase the expansion proceeds very quickly. The stars evolve
174 Evolution of low mass stars
rapidly through the range with about 6500 K > Teff > 5000 K, the so-
called Hertzsprung gap, in which, consequently, very few stars are found.
As the surface temperature of the star decreases because of expansion,
the hydrogen convection zone extends deeper into the star (see Chapter 7
and Volume 2). If the effective temperature of the giant decreases below
about 5000 K the convection zone mayfinallyreach down into a layer with
some nuclear processed material and bring it up to the surface, where it
may be observed.

74.7.2 Stars with M ^ MQ

Stars with masses larger than 2 M o have a small convective core
while on the main sequence. The convective core remains well mixed.
With increasing helium abundance this convective zone shrinks, however,
and leaves in its surroundings some nuclear processed material. This effect
is seen in Fig. 14.1 between the mass fractions q0 and ql9 with q = MrIM.
Outside the convective core the temperature is still high enough
(T > 8 X 106 K) for the CNO cycle to proceed slowly. While it is too slow

I
i 1 1 1 1

0.8 _ _

\f
Helium, hydrogen

0.6 -
\l
0.4 - /A
V He

0.21 -

1 1 1 I
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
9 (mass fraction)

Fig. 14.1. The hydrogen and helium abundances for a star with 2.5 MQ and an age of
3 x 108 years are plotted as a function of q = M/M(star). At zero age the convective
core extended to q0 = 0.174. At the age of 3 x 108 years it extends to qx = 0.08. The
mass layers between qx and q0 show hydrogen depletion and helium enrichment because
of the larger extent of the convective core at the earlier times. According to data
provided by W. Brunish.
 Evolution along subgiant branch 175
to change the helium abundance, it still changes the CNO abundances (see
Fig. 14.2). For the layers with 0.4 < q < 0.6, the temperatures are too low
and the nuclear reactions too slow for equilibrium abundances to be
established during the age of the star. For the interior with q < 0.4, the
temperature exceeds 107 K and 3 x 108 years are sufficient to establish
equilibrium abundances. For q < q0, the effect of the originally extended
and then shrinking convective core is seen. The CNO abundances are
determined by the high central temperatures which were present when the
convection zone reached out to the q value under consideration. For
q < qu the abundances determined by the present high central tempera-
tures are seen.
The oxygen abundances are changed only when the CNO bi-cycle is
operating, which requires high temperatures. They are therefore only
influenced in the high temperature central regions and so show the effect
of the shrinking extent of the convective core.

i i 1

o16
O f\t OK'
0.01 zb - 0.008
1
0.0100
0.006 I
0.0075 j
0.0050
- //L c12
0.004 £

0.0025

0.0000I i
q0 0.2
i
X
^ /
0.4
1
0.6 0.8
N14
- 0.002

qr(mass fraction)

Fig. 14.2. The CNO abundances for a 2.5 M o star at an age of 3 x 108 years are plotted
as a function of q. The nitrogen abundance is increased out to q < 0.6 because the
temperatures inside this layer are high enough to maintain the CNO cycle, though at a
very slow pace, but still slowly altering the abundances. For q < 0.4 the equilibrium
abundances for these low temperatures are reached. Between q 0 and qx the steep
increase due to the convection zones of various extents are seen. For q < q0 the nitrogen
abundance is constant for the core convection zone. The oxygen abundances are
changed only for q<q$. For q > 0.6 the nuclear reactions including oxygen are too slow
to cause abundance changes at these 'low' temperatures. Data provided by W. Brunish.
176 Evolution of low mass stars
By the time the surface temperature approaches 5000 K the hydrogen
convection zone extends very deeply into the envelope, reaching high
temperature regions. The total energy transport is then increased because
convective energy transport by mass motion is more efficient than radiat-
ive energy transport by the diffusion of photons. The star therefore loses
much more energy, increasing its luminosity. Energy generation is acceler-
ated, the shell source burns upwards faster and the stellar envelope
expands faster (but the radius still remains smaller than it would be for
radiative equilibrium). With increasing energy transport outwards the star
is still able to keep its surface temperature nearly constant. It moves up the
red giant branch close to the Hayashi track. Since in the interior at the rim
of the helium core the star has a temperature of about 20 x 106 K and the
temperature decreases outwards with the adiabatic gradient or even less,
the star cannot reach a lower temperature at the surface for the same
reasons as discussed in Chapter 12 in connection with the Hayashi track.
At the same time as the envelope expands and the luminosity increases,
the helium core (which is essentially a helium star in the center) grows in
mass and therefore increases its central temperature which controls the
stellar evolution at these phases.
During these low surface temperature, red giant phases the outer
convection zones reach deep enough to dredge up material in which the
CNO cycle has been operating. Enlarged ratios of N14/C12 and C13/C12 can
therefore be expected in the atmospheres of such stars. These have been
found by Lambert and Ries (1981) for cool subgiants, red giants and red
supergiants, confirming that the CNO cycle is indeed operating in the
interiors of these stars.

14.2 Advanced stages of low mass stellar evolution

With increasing temperature of the central helium star, new
nuclear reactions may take place. In Section 8.3 we discussed the tunnel
effect, necessary for nuclear reactions to occur. We pointed out that
tunnelling becomes more difficult for higher Z values of particles because
of larger repelling Coulomb forces, but also that tunnelling becomes easier
for higher temperatures. For relatively low temperatures only reactions
between particles with low Z values are possible while for higher tempera-
tures reactions for higher values of Z also become possible (see equation
(8.4)). When the helium core reaches a size of about 0.45 M o the envelope
has greatly expanded, convection has become very efficient and the
luminosity has increased so much that the star appears at the top of the red
 Degeneracy 177
giant branch in the HR diagram. At this point the central temperature in
the helium core has reached a value Tc ~ 108 K. This is high enough for the
triple-alpha reaction to take place (see Section 8.6). Three He 4 nuclei
combine to form C 12 . The energy liberation per unit mass in this process is
about 10 per cent of that liberated by hydrogen burning, as we inferred
previously from Table 8.1.
Before we can understand what happens at this point we have to look
into the equation of state for the helium core which in the mean time for
low mass stars has reached such high densities that the electrons are in a so-
called degenerate state.

14.3 Degeneracy
We talk about degenerate matter if, for a given temperature, the
density is so high that the well-known equation of state for an ideal gas,
Pg = pRg/Tju, breaks down. For high densities the Pauli principle (from
quantum theory) becomes important for the relation between pressure,
temperature and density. Pauli noticed that particles with spin = \n,
where n is an odd number, follow different statistics than other particles.
These particles are called Fermi particles. The Pauli principle states that
there cannot be two or more Fermi particles with all equal quantum
numbers in one quantum cell. This applies for instance to electrons,
protons, neutrons but not to helium nuclei, for which the nuclear spin is 0.
A quantum cell is defined in phase space, i.e. in the six-dimensional
space of geometrical space x, y, z and momentum space pXJ py, pz. For a
quantum cell the (volume) element in phase space is given by
AxAyAzAPxApyAPz = h3 (14.1)
where h is Planck's constant. The number of electrons in this quantum cell
can at most be two. These two electrons must have opposite spin direc-
tions.
We now look at the geometrical volume of 1 cm 3 . For a quantum cell we
then have ApxApyApz = h3, and in this momentum space there can be at
most two electrons.
For the electrons in 1 cm 3 we plot in the momentum space all the arrows
for a given absolute value of p between/? andp + Ap (see Fig. 14.3). All
these arrows end in a spherical shell with radius/? and thickness Ap. The
number of quantum cells Nq corresponding to these momenta between p
and p + Ap is then given by
Nq = 4jtpiAp/h3 (14.2)
178 Evolution of low mass stars

and the number of electrons per cm3 which have momenta between p and
p + Ap can then at most be
nG(p, Ap) *s 2Nq = 8jtp2Ap/h3 = 8jzmlv2Av/h3 (14.3)
Here rae = electron mass. With p = mQv this corresponds to a velocity
distribution. It has to be compared with the Maxwell velocity distribution
which also gives the number of electrons per cm3 with velocities between v
and v + Av, namely
/ m v2\
4exp——Q
I 2kT -
, Av) = ne v2Av (14.4)

which we are accustomed to use for low densities. This is, however, correct
only as long as the number of electrons is small enough that condition
(14.3) is not violated. For very high electron densities the Maxwell
distribution may give us a larger number nQ (v, AV) than is permitted by the
Pauli principle, equation (14.3).
In Fig. 14.4 we have plotted the Maxwell energy distribution for
electron density ne = 1.5 x 1023cm~3 and temperature T= 105 K. We
have also plotted the maximum possible number of electrons per cm3 with
a given velocity p/me. For this electron density of 1.5 x 1023 cm" 3 we do
notfindmore electrons with a given velocity in 1 cm3 than permitted by the
Pauli principle. In Fig. 14.5 we have plotted the Maxwell velocity distri-
bution for ne = 3 x 1023 cm" 3 together with the distribution of 2Nq. For

Fig. 14.3. The phase space volume for 1 cm3 and momenta between/? and/? + A/? equals
the volume of the spherical shell with radius p and thickness Ap.
 Degeneracy 179

this density the Maxwell distribution gives us more electrons per cm3 with
a given velocity than are permitted by the Pauli principle (see the cross-
hatched area in Fig. 14.5). These electrons then cannot have such low
velocities, and must acquire higher energies than given by the Maxwell
distribution. We can only squeeze that many electrons into 1 cm3 if this
additional energy is supplied. If the electrons in the cross-hatched area of
Fig. 14.5 obtain the lowest possible energies they will appear in the shaded
area which must be just as large as the cross-hatched area in order to
accommodate all the electrons which are not permitted to be in the cross-
hatched area. The actual momentum distribution obtained for this density
is shown by the heavy line in Fig. 14.5. Up to a certain momentum p0,
which is called the Fermi momentum, the distribution follows the maxi-
mum possible number of electrons 2Nq. There is also a fraction of high
energy electrons which still follows the Maxwell distribution in the so-
called Maxwell tail. The gas considered here would be called partially
degenerate, because the Maxwell tail is still rather extended.

I I

Pauli
fl
emax~
/
15
/
1 X 10 -
/
Maxwell
/

5 X 10 1 4

T = 105 K
1.5 X 10 23 cm" 3
1 X 10 1 4
I I
10 15 X 10 7

Fig. 14.4. The Maxwell velocity distribution for T = l(r K and ne = 1.5 x 10ZJ cm j is
shown. Also shown is the upper limit ne max for the number of electrons per cm3 with a
given velocity permitted according to the Pauli principle (both for Av = lcms" 1 ). For
ne = 1.5 x 1023 the number of electrons with a given velocity v as given by the Maxwell
velocity distribution never exceeds the maximum number permitted by the Pauli
principle.
180 Evolution of low mass stars

i
Pauli

1
20 x 10 1 4 - -

\
15 X 10 1 4 -

^_- Maxwell

Mi
7 = 105 K
ne = 3 x 10 2 3 cm- 3

<
\

s
10 X 10 1 4 - -
\
\

m
fflg
- " " \
\

5 X 10 14 - y\ \
\ ~
Maxwell \
T= 3 x 105K
Mr / ne = 3 x 10 2 3 cm- 3
\

- dry
1 X 10 1 4 -

10 20 30 X 10 2

i/(km s

Fig. 14.5. The maximum number of electrons with a given velocity permitted by the
Pauli principle is shown by the thick, solid line. Also shown is the Maxwell velocity
distribution for T = 105 K as in Fig. 14.4 but now for an electron density nc = 3 x 1023,
i.e. twice as high as in Fig. 14.4. For this electron density the numbers given by the
Maxwell distribution exceed the number ne miXX(p) permitted by the Pauli principle by
the electron numbers included in the cross-hatched area. These electrons have to obtain
higher energies and must appear in the shaded area. We also show the Maxwell velocity
distribution obtained for the same ne = 3x 1023 cm"3 but for T = 3 x 105 K. For
r = 3 x 105 K the Maxwell energy distribution no longer violates the Pauli principle; all
the electrons have, according to the Maxwell energy distribution, higher velocities and
so fewer electrons have small velocities. There is no degeneracy at this temperature. For
a given electron density degeneracy can be removed by a higher temperature.
 Degeneracy 181
If the electron density is increased further the shaded area grows and a
large number of electrons have to acquire higher energies. p 0 grows, and
the Maxwell tail shrinks. If the Maxwell tail contains a negligible number of
electrons we talk about complete electron degeneracy.
In Fig. 14.5 we have also plotted the Maxwell energy distribution for the
same electron number of 3 x 1023 cm" 3 but for a temperature of
3 x 105 K. For this higher temperature all the electrons obtain higher
energies. The number of electrons with a given velocity according to the
Maxwell velocity distribution never exceeds the number permitted by the
Pauli principle (which does not depend on T). For this temperature the gas
with ne = 3 x 1023 cm" 3 is not degenerate even though it was at T = 105 K.
For a given ne there is always a temperature by which degeneracy can be
removed. If the temperature is high enough the number of electrons
given by the Maxwell velocity distribution will stay below the number
2Nq.
We now look at the situation for protons or neutrons. Will they also be
degenerate if the electrons are degenerate? The maximum number nn of
neutrons with momenta between p and p + Apis again given by equation
(14.3). With p = mnv and mnv2 = mev2 for equal temperature in a non-
degenerate gas, we find v °c 1/Vm^ and p <* Vm^. For neutrons the
momenta are all larger and therefore the number of quantum cells in
momentum space is much greater for the heavy particles. According to
equation (14.3) the permitted number of particles with a given velocity
increases with
A/7/?2(neutron) ^ k j 3
App2 (electron) \mj
(For low velocities the number of particles with a given v according to the
Maxwell distribution increases only proportional to m 3/2.)
In Fig. 14.6 we have plotted the Maxwell velocity distribution for the
number of neutrons per cm3 equal to 3 x 1023 cm"3 and also the velocity
distribution according to equation (14.3), taking into account the Pauli
principle. For this number of particles per cm3 we found degeneracy for
electrons, while the number of neutrons stays well below the Pauli
principle limit for all velocities. The velocities are lower by a factor 100
than in Figs. 14.5 and 14.4. Because of the higher masses and larger
momenta we can have much higher particle densities for protons and
neutrons (about a factor 105) before they become degenerate. Of course,
in the dense helium core we do not have protons or neutrons, and helium
182 Evolution of low mass stars
does not obey the Pauli principle. The alpha particles do not degenerate;
only the electrons in the helium core degenerate.

14.4 Equation of state for complete degeneracy

Since the gas pressure is determined by the kinetic energy of the
particles we expect, for a given temperature, a higher gas pressure for a
degenerate gas than for an ideal gas because the kinetic energies for the
degenerate particles are much higher than they would be for a Maxwell
energy distribution. For a completely degenerate gas we can calculate the
Fermi momentump 0, i.e. the momentum up to which all quantum cells are
filled. This depends only on the electron density n e , and not on the

21

20

19

18

17

16

15 Maxwell
7"=3X 105 K
nn =3 X 10 2 3 cm" 3
14

13
20 30
/(km s

Fig. 14.6. For a particle density of neutrons nn = 2x 1023 and T = 105 K we plot the
Maxwell velocity distribution. Also plotted is the maximum number of neutrons n nmax
with a given velocity permitted according to the Pauli principle. For a given velocity the
momenta of the neutrons are larger by the ratio of the masses, therefore
n nmax (t;) » nemax(v). Notice that the log nn are plotted because otherwise the Maxwell
velocity distribution and the Pauli limit could not have been shown on one plot. Also
notice that the velocities here are lower by a factor 100 than in Figs. 14.5 and 14.6.
 Equation of state for complete degeneracy 183
temperature. The temperature controls only the very high energy Maxwell
tail, which for complete degeneracy has a negligible number of particles.
Knowing the Fermi energy corresponding to p0 we can calculate the
average kinetic energy of the particles. From this average kinetic energy
the gas pressure for completely degenerate gas can be calculated as
follows.
The maximum number of electrons nQ per cm 3 with momenta up to/? 0 is
given by the volume in phase space (see Fig. 14.3) divided by the size of a
quantum cell, i.e. by h3, multiplied by 2, which means
8
ldp = ?L£v (14.5)

In order to calculate the pressure for a given density we have to relate

density pand/? 0 .
If jUEmu is the mass (of heavy particles) per electron then

= or n
— e (14.6)

(For He 2 + , juE = 2; for H + , juE = 1.) Making use of equations (14.5) and
(14.6) we find

— p = — —^/?o (14.7)

In order to calculate the pressure we have to calculate the momentum

transferred to a hypothetical wall in the gas if the electrons coming from all
directions are reflected on the wall. The momentum transfer 8/? per
electron with momentum/?x is given by dpx = 2px = 2p{pxlp). The number
of electrons with p and px arriving at the wall per cm2 s is given by

ne = dne(p,px)vx = dne(/?,/?v) — cos 0 (14.8)

mc
where 0 is the angle between/? and the x-axis (see Fig. 14.7).
The dnc(p,px) is given by the volume in momentum space occupied by
the electrons with p between p and p + dp and px multiplied by 2 and
divided by h3. We find

dnc(p,px) = —r/r dp sin 0 d6 (14.9)

k
184 Evolution of low mass stars
The total momentum transfer of these electrons to the wall is then

7, px) = —^p 2 — dp cos 6 sin 6 d6 2p x = dp cos2 6 sin 9 dd

(14.10)
Integration over all angles 6 (over the half sphere out of which particles
hit the wall) gives

(14.11)

In order to calculate the total electron pressure we have to integrate

over all momenta/? up to the Fermi momentump 0 , i.e.

4 ^ o (14.12)
3meh
Using equation (14.7) we find

pH^f*5" 573 (14.13)

H

Wall

Fig. 14.7. Electrons with momentum p passing through a ring of thickness p dd and
radius p = p sin 6 hit the wall and each transfer a momentum 2p x to the wall when they
are reflected.
 Equation of state for complete degeneracy 185
and
\5/3
P e = Kl| —I (14.14)
ME)

with
\2/3
= 9.91xlO 1 2 [cgs] (14.15)
2UraeraH \JtmHJ
If more and more electrons are squeezed into a given volume, p0 must
increase andfinallythe vast majority of the electrons will have velocities
very close to the velocity of light, c. We then talk about relativistic
degeneracy. In this case vx = c(px/p) = ccos 0 and the integral for the
derivation of the electron pressure takes the form

n (Po1 87t 2 i 8JT x 4 27ZC 4 /i>i i * \

Pe = \pc-^p2dp = —c\pl = -^p% (14.16)

or

where
u^ I i \i/3
^2 (j <10 15 [cgs] (14.18)
8raH \Jtmu)
In order to obtain the total gas pressure Pg we have to add the pressure PH
of the heavy particles, such that
Pg = P Q + P H (14.19)
The electron pressure Pe for a gas with degenerate electrons will, however,
be much larger than PH because the kinetic energies of the electrons have
so increased because of the degeneracy, that for complete degeneracy the
pressure of the heavy particles can be neglected.
A very important point is the fact that for complete degeneracy
according to equations (14.14) and (14.17) the electron pressure does not
depend on the temperature, but only on the density. Since PH « Pe for
complete degeneracy of the electrons, the gas pressure Pg = Pe + PH is
also independent of the temperature and depends only on the density. In
Fig. 14.8 we show in the T, p plane roughly the regions for which electron
degeneracy becomes important and where relativistic degeneracy sets in.
186 Evolution of low mass stars
For the solar interior with pc ~ 102 g cm" 3 and Tc ~ 1.5 x 107 K degener-
acy is not yet important, although an increase in p by a factor of 10 would
cause degeneracy.

14.5 Onset of helium burning, the helium flash

14.5.1 Stars with solar metal abundances
We saw that because of the diminishing number of particles due to
the nuclear reactions in the core and later in the shell source the burned-
out helium core contracts and increases its temperature. When stars with
masses less than about 2.25 M o reach the tip of the red giant branch the
stellar helium core has contracted so much that the electrons have become
completely degenerate. This means that the pressure is due to degenerate
electron pressure and is temperature independent, where the temperature
is now defined by the energy distribution of the very sparsely populated
high energy tail of the Maxwell energy distribution of the electrons, and by
the energy distribution of the heavy particles, which are the ones that make
nuclear reactions. Their temperature is therefore very important, but
gravitational forces are balanced by electron pressure which does not
depend on temperature. This has important consequences for the stability
of the hydrostatic equilibrium. For temperatures aroujid 108 K the triple-
alpha reactions, combining three He 4 to one C12, start in the very dense

-8 -6 -4

Fig. 14.8. In 7, p plane we indicate the regions where electron degeneracy becomes
important and where relativistic degeneracy is achieved. Also indicated is the region
where the radiation pressure becomes important. According to Schwarzschild (1958).
 Onset of helium burning 187
core near the center. These processes generate energy and heat the core,
which means they increase the kinetic energy of the heavy particles. They
then make more nuclear reactions, further increasing the energy pro-
duction, etc. The core heats up rapidly. If the pressure were temperature
dependent the increased T would lead to an increased pressure, the core
would then expand and cool off, thereby reducing the number of nuclear
reactions to the equilibrium value. Because the degenerate electron
pressure is independent of temperature this does not happen. The core
does not expand but energy generation and heating continue to increase in
a runaway situation, which is called the helium flash. During this time the
interior temperature changes within seconds; the star changes faster than a
computer could follow around 1960, when the helium flash was dis-
covered.
With increasing temperature the Maxwell tail of the electron velocity
distribution becomes, however, more and more populated (see Fig. 14.5),
and for still higher temperatures most of the electrons again follow the
Maxwell velocity distribution. The degeneracy is removed. The pressure
increases again with increasing temperature, causing the core to expand
and prevent further increase in temperature. At this point the star is able
to find a new equilibrium configuration with an expanded non-degenerate
hot helium burning core. The result is that the hydrogen burning shell
source is also expanded and has a lower density and temperature and

16 _| i i i [ i i i 1 1 1 | 1 1 1 | 1 1 1 | 1 ' '-

17
- LW 7 9 I
18
' / ~-
19

20

21

22
[ ^
23

24 '- ' i
I; i i \i#i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r
-.4 -.4 .4 .8 12 1.6
(B-V)
Fig. 14.9. The color magnitude diagrams for the two star clusters H4 and LW79 in the
Large Magellanic Clouds. After the helium flash the low mass stars finishhalf-way up
the red giant branch where they form the group of clump stars in the HR diagrams of
globular clusters. They are burning helium in their cores. For the two clusters shown the
clump stars can be recognized at mv = V ~ 19 and B - V ~ 1. From Mateo (1987).
188 Evolution of low mass stars
generates less energy from hydrogen burning, while some energy is
generated in the core by the triple-alpha reaction.
Since at the bottom of the hydrogen envelope the temperature is no
longer so high, the envelope shrinks and the star becomes hotter at the
surface, though not that much so since at the same time its luminosity is
decreasing.
What can we observe from the helium flash? Not very much, because it
takes the radiation at least a thousand years to get to the surface! By that
time the effect is smoothed out. We expect to see a slight increase in
luminosity for a short period of time before the star decreases in lumino-
sity. In the HR diagram the star ends up in the lower part of the giant
branch where such stars form the so-called clump stars. Stars stay a
relatively long time in this region while they are burning helium in their
centers. That is why there are many stars at this luminosity and why they
form a 'clump' in the HR diagram (see Fig. 14.9).
For stars more massive than about 3 M o the helium core never becomes
very degenerate. Helium burning therefore starts slowly in a quasi-
equilibrium configuration. These stars do not experience a helium flash.
For stars less massive than 0.5 M o the helium core will never become
hot enough and helium burning will never start.

14.5.2 Metal poor globular clusters

In metal poor clusters we do not see a clump of stars at the giant
branch of their HR diagram but instead see a horizontal branch (HB)
which merges with the giant branch at about the luminosity of the clump
stars (see Figs. 1.7 and 1.8). We still do not know how the stars get to the
horizontal branch position in the HR diagram, but we can calculate
equilibrium configurations that will put them there (see Faulkner et al.,
1965). These are stars with hydrogen burning shell sources and helium
burning helium cores. The stars can have only thin hydrogen envelopes.
The more mass is lost from the hydrogen envelope, the hotter the
remaining star. Stars with the smallest amount of mass in the hydrogen
envelope populate the blue part of the horizontal branch. The more mass
left in the envelope, the redder the stars are. Stars with larger heavy
element abundances generally appear more to the red side of the HB. We
can consider the clump stars as the outermost red part of the horizontal
branch. What we do not know is why and how metal poor stars lose so
much mass apparently after the helium flash while metal rich ones do not
seem to do so. The helium cores for all stars at the moment of the helium
 Post core helium burning evolution 189
flash appear to have the same mass because the mass of the helium core
determines the central temperature. Stars on the blue part of the horizon-
tal branch appear to have a smaller total mass than the stars on the red end.
The blue horizontal branch stars appear to have around 0.55 M o while
those on the red giant branch of globular clusters have about 0.8 M©, as
inferred from the ages of the clusters.

14.6 Post core helium burning evolution

Since the triple-alpha reaction is even more temperature depend-
ent (e oc T30) than the CNO cycle, energy generation is even more
centrally condensed, but not all energy is generated in the core. There is
still the hydrogen burning shell source. The inner part of the helium star
will soon consist only of carbon, and the carbon core slowly grows while a
helium burning shell source also develops which burns its way out. In the
meantime the hydrogen burning shell source also burns its way out and
gets closer to the surface while the helium shell grows; this again causes the
envelope to expand and the population I star evolves up the red giant

[
7 /z 0.917
10 0837
l2/ 2 0.783
15 0 745
17 Vz 0.715

Fig. 14.10. Evolutionary tracks for horizontal branch stars of different masses in the
luminosity, Tei{ plane. When the horizontal branch stars develop a carbon core and the
helium and hydrogen burning shell sources burn outwards, the stars increase slightly in
luminosity and expand again, moving towards the red giant branch in the HR diagram.
They populate the so-called asymptotic giant branch. Adapted from Iben (1971).
190 Evolution of low mass stars
branch. We call such stars asymptotic giant branch stars. For population I
stars this branch agrees with the first ascent red giant branch. The name
originates from the metal poor globular clusters (see Figs. 1.7 and 1.8).
The population II horizontal branch stars also develop a growing carbon
core, with a helium burning shell source around it. When the helium
burning shell sources for these stars burn outwards the horizontal branch
star envelopes expand again, becoming cooler but more luminous when
the outer convection zone contributes to the energy transport outwards.
Fig. 14.10 shows evolutionary tracks for horizontal branch stars of differ-
ent masses. These stars evolve towards the first ascent giant branch but do
not quite reach it. They remain slightly brighter than the first ascent giants,
which is why this branch is called the asymptotic giant branch (see Figs. 1.7

To planetary
\ nebula phase

1000
Boundaries of
instability strip

Central helium 5 million

burning
•5 100

i 10 250 million
Shell
5 hydrogen
,, , burning
Hydrogen
vanishes at center"
7 billion years
Zero age
main sequence
To white
dwarf phase 8000° 7000° 6000° 5000° 4000 c
• t. i • t t i
4.0 3.9 3.8 3.7 3.6
log (surface temperature)

Fig. 14.11. Evolutionary tracks for population II stars with 0.7 and 0.8 M o . A helium
abundance of Y = 0.30 and a heavy element abundance of Z = 10~3 was used. On the
main sequence and subgiant branches evolution times since arrival on the zero age main
sequence are given in billions of years. On the red giant branch evolution times from one
arrow to the next are given in millions of years. Also indicated is the instability strip, the
Teff, L domain in which stars start to pulsate (see Chapter 17). From the tip of the
asymptotic giant branch the stars probably evolve through the planetary nebula stage to
become white dwarfs as indicated by the long dashed lines. From Iben (1971).
 Post core helium burning evolution 191
and 1.8, where the asymptotic giant branch can clearly be recognized).
During their ascent on the asymptotic giant branch these stars have two
shell sources.
Fig. 14.11 shows the whole evolutionary tracks for a 0.8 and 0.7 M o star
as derived by Iben (1971). In this diagram evolutionary times for the
different phases are also given.
The bluest horizontal branch stars with very small envelope masses do
not evolve towards the asymptotic giant branch; instead, they evolve to the
blue side of the HR diagram, towards the white dwarf region (see Chapter
16).
As seen in Fig. 14.12, which shows a composite color magnitude
diagram for several globular clusters, the asymptotic and the red giant
branches have tips. The stars do not evolve up the red giant branches any
further. For metal rich stars (as in the globular cluster M67 or NGC 188)
this tip occurs at lower luminosities than for metal poor stars like those in
the globular cluster M92. Something must be happening at the tips of the
asymptotic giant branches.

Fig. 14.12. A composite color magnitude diagram is shown for several star clusters with
different heavy element abundances. [Fe/H] stands for log (Fe/H) - log (Fe/H) o . The
distance moduli for the different clusters were determined in such a way as to fit the
main sequences with the luminosities indicated by the nearby metal poor stars of similar
abundances (see Fig. 10.9). For the more metal rich stars the red giant branches
terminate at lower luminosities than for the metal poor clusters. From Sandage (1986).
192 Evolution of low mass stars
14.7 Planetary nebulae
We think we can see what is happening at the tip of the red giant
branch by observing planetary nebulae (see Figs. 14.13 and 14.14; see also
Volume 1). These planetary nebulae, which are bright mainly in the
spectral emission lines, show a splitting of the line profiles (see Fig. 14.15).
Whfen the spectrograph slit extends over the diameter of the nebula, close
to the edges of the nebula the line is seen as one, while in the center of the
nebula there are two components, one shifted to the red and one to the
blue, indicating that the nebula is expanding (see Fig. 14.16). Since the
nebula is optically thin we see both the back side and the front side
material. The front side material is moving towards us, the back side away
from us, giving rise to the double line in the center. At the 'top' and the
'bottom' of the nebula the motion is perpendicular to the line of sight and
no Doppler effect is seen. The expansion velocities are about 30 to
60 km s"1. These nebulae expand from a central star which is observable
but usually quite faint because most planetary nebulae are at vast dis-
tances. The nice thing about planetary nebulae is the fact that they have a
'clock' attached to them. Since they expand from a central star they
increase their size in time. The larger the radius, the longer the time since

Fig. 14.13. The planetary nebula NGC 7293. (Photograph: Hale Observatories.)
 Planetary nebulae 193
the expansion or explosion started. We can thus study the time evolution
of the nebula and with it the evolution of the central star. As discovered
first by O'Dell (1968), the central stars are hotter for planetary nebulae
with larger radii while the luminosities of the central stars remain nearly
unchanged until they reach temperatures around 60 000 K. Once the
central stars have reached such high temperatures (and small radii) their
luminosities decrease. By this time they appear way below the hydrogen
star main sequence, at a location where only helium stars or stars with still
higher// can be found. For these stars the nebulae are so large and have
become so faint that they are very hard to detect and observations
therefore stop.
Even in the earliest stages of evolution when the planetary nebula is still
small the central stars of planetary nebulae are all hotter than 10 000 K, i.e.
hotter than A0 stars. For these stars the planetary nebulae have already
reached about half the maximum radius possible to be observed before
they become too faint. We do not see the origin of the expansion, because
the hydrogen gas of the planetary nebula needs a high temperature central
light source to ionize it. Only after ionization does it shine in the emission

Fig. 14.14. Four photographs of the planetary nebula NGC 3242 taken with filters which
are transparent only to light near the hydrogen Ha line at X = 6562.8 A (top left), near
the forbidden O III line at X = 5006.8 A (top right), and near the forbidden N II line at
X = 6583 A (bottom left). The He II line is emitted only in the hot inner regions of the
nebula. For this line the nebula therefore appears smaller (bottom right). (Photograph:
courtesy of B. Balick.)
194 Evolution of low mass stars
lines we observe. As long as the central star is cooler than about 10 000 K
the hydrogen gas in the planetary nebula is not ionized and the planetary
nebula is dark.
We can now, as O'Dell first did, plot the position of the central stars of
different planetary nebulae with different ages in the HR diagram (see Fig.
14.17). They form a sequence across it which we can interpret as a time or
evolutionary sequence because we know that the coolest central stars are

Fig. 14.15. High resolution spectra of the planetary nebula NGC 3242. In the top
spectrum the brightness is shown as a function of velocity according to the relation
v = cAA/A. The velocity is given in units of 1000 km s" 1. The spectrograph slit was
positioned along the 'long axis' of the nebula. In the bottom spectrum, the same
spectrum is seen but the brightness shown is proportional to the logarithm of the flux
received. This brings out the fainter lines. The lines seen are from left to right: He II at
6560.1 A, Ha at 6562.8 A, forbidden NII at 6583 A. In the center the continuous
spectrum of the faint central star is seen. All lines show splitting in central parts due to
the expansion of the nebula as explained in Fig. 14.16. (Photograph: courtesy B.
Balick.)
 Planetary nebulae 195
associated with the smallest and therefore youngest nebulae and the
hottest ones with the largest old nebulae. The evolutionary arrow must go
from right to left. We can also determine the time t for this evolution by
measuring the radius increase of the nebula Ar = v x t and dividing it by
the expansion velocity v. This tells us that the whole evolution of the
observed planetary nebulae takes only about 20 000 years!
We can extrapolate this evolutionary sequence back in order to bridge
the time when the nebula is dark and invisible. It seems reasonable to
assume that the central star was originally at the tip of the red giant branch
when it became unstable to a large mass loss and expelled about 10 to 50
per cent of its mass. Thus the whole hydrogen envelope was lost and
expanded to become the planetary nebula while the central star must be
mainly the carbon core of a red giant with a helium envelope and originally
a helium burning shell source. If any hydrogen was left the hydrogen shell
source probably extinguished because it got so close to the surface that it
became too cool. We do not yet understand the reason for the expulsion of
the envelope (radiative acceleration may be one cause), nor have we
observed the process of formation of such a planetary nebula, simply
because the nebula is cold and therefore invisible. Infrared observations
may be able to detect planetary nebulae at a very early stage and several

Slit of spectograph

Fig. 14.16. Explains the splitting of the spectral emission lines of planetary nebulae. We
see two parts of the expanding nebula one moving away from us (supposedly on the back
side of the nebula) and one moving towards us (supposedly on the front side of the
nebula). On the edges of the nebula the material is moving perpendicular to the line of
sight and the line appears as one line, with a shift corresponding to the system velocity.
196 Evolution of low mass stars
candidates have been identified. For some luminous cool supergiants in a
binary system like a Her we see indications in the Ca K line profiles of
some mass outflow. Whether this could be related to a later formation of a
planetary nebula is not clear, nor do we understand the mechanism which
leads to this outflow.
In Chapter 16 we will discuss what we think happens later to the central
stars of planetary nebulae.

l0
9 7"eff

Fig. 14.17. The positions of central stars of planetary nebulae in the color magnitude
diagram. The error bars are shown. While the nebula expands, the central star becomes
smaller and hotter until it reaches the white dwarf region. The evolution goes from right
to left. The main sequence and the horizontal branch positions are also shown by the
solid lines. From O'Dell (1968).
 15
Evolution of massive stars

15.1 Evolution along the giant branch

Just as for low mass stars, the evolution of high mass stars is caused
by the change in chemical composition when hydrogen fuses to helium.
These stars, however, have a convective core such that the newly formed
helium is evenly mixed throughout the core. When hydrogen is consumed,
the convective core contracts and also shrinks in mass (because the K + o
per gram decreases and therefore Vr decreases); the mixing then occurs
over a smaller mass fraction, while some material, which was originally
part of the convective region, is left in a stable region but with a slightly
enriched helium abundance and also a slight increase in the N 14/C12 and
C13/C12 ratios. (See Figs. 13.2 and 13.4.) When the convective core mass
reduces further, another region with still higher helium abundance and
higher N14/C12 and C13/C12 is left outside the convection zone. The
remaining convective core becomes hydrogen exhausted homogeneously
while it contracts to a smaller volume and becomes hotter. The stars also
develop hydrogen burning shell sources around the helium core. Again the
core acts like a helium star with a very high temperature; the temperature
at the bottom of the hydrogen envelope becomes too high to sustain
hydrostatic equilibrium in the hydrogen envelope. The envelope expands
and the stellar surface becomes cooler, moving the star in the HR diagram
towards the red giant region. Again an outer hydrogen convection zone
develops and reaches into deeper and deeper layers. Finally it dredges up
some of the material which was originally in the convective core when it
included a rather large mass-fraction of the star.
As we saw earlier, in massive stars the central gas pressures and
densities are lower than in low mass stars; even during core contraction
the densities in evolved high mass stars do not become high enough
for electrons to degenerate. Therefore when the central temperature
reaches 108 K helium fusion to C12 (i.e. the triple-alpha reaction) can start
197
198 Evolution of massive stars
smoothly. The temperature rises, the pressure increases. The star expands
somewhat and reaches a new equilibrium state.
For very massive stars (M > 15 M o ) the interior temperatures become
so high that helium burning starts while the stars are still close to the main
sequence.

15.2 Blue loop excursions

Unlike the evolution of low mass stars, more massive stars do not
increase their luminosities by large factors (see Fig. 15.1). Helium burning
starts in the center when the helium core contains more than about
0.47 M©. This happens when the stars reach the red giant region. The core
then expands, as does the hydrogen burning shell source, thereby con-
tributing less than before to the total energy generation. The temperature
at the base of the hydrogen envelope decreases, the hydrogen envelope

•2.0

log Teii

Fig. 15.1. Evolutionary tracks for stars of different masses. For more massive stars the
luminosities of the red giants do not increase as much as those for lower mass stars. For
the more massive stars the triple-alpha reaction starts soon after they reach the red giant
region. The points with the numbers indicate the position for the onset of helium
burning. The other numbers indicate other stages of evolution. From Iben (1967).
 Blue loop excursions 199
contracts and Teff increases. In the HR diagram the star makes a 'blue loop
excursion'. When more helium in the center is consumed, fusing to C 12,
the number of particles decreases and the core contracts while heating up.
The hydrogen envelope expands again. In the color magnitude diagram
the star moves to the red again. This processfinallycreates a carbon star in
the center of the helium star. The carbon star becomes more massive when
the helium burning shell source burns its way outwards. The envelope
continues to expand and cool (see Figs. 15.1 and 15.2). For the massive
stars, several blue loop excursions may happen when new nuclear reac-
tions start (see Fig. 15.2). How far the star moves to the blue depends
sensitively on the chemical abundances and their stratification throughout
the star. The blue loops extend further to the blue for low abundances of
heavy elements than for higher metal abundances. Similarly, they extend
further to the blue for higher masses than for lower masses. For masses
around 2 or 3 solar masses (depending on chemical abundances) they seem
to disappear. The stars remain close to the red giant branch. Fig. 15.2

4.0 3.8 3.6

Fig. 15.2. During advanced stages of evolution, massive stars with M > 3 M o make
several blue loop excursions when new nuclear reactions become possible in their cores.
The luminosities and the extent of the blue loops depend on the chemical composition,
as may be seen from comparing the different panels. The abundances used are given in
the panels. An increased helium abundance increases the luminosities. An increased
abundance of heavy element decreases the luminosities and shortens the loops. The
nearly vertical dashed lines show the Cepheid instability strip (see Chapter 17). Adapted
from Becker, Iben and Tuggle (1977).
200 Evolution of massive stars
shows evolutionary tracks for stars of different masses and chemical
composition as calculated by Becker, Iben and Tuggle (1977).
In Chapter 8 we saw that for the triple-alpha process the amount of
energy liberated per gram is about 10 per cent of what is liberated by
hydrogen burning (see Table 8.1). Less helium is burned during this stage
than the amount of hydrogen burned on the main sequence. Therefore the
lifetime of the star on the blue loop is only a few per cent of the main
sequence lifetime. The stars spend most of this time near the tip of the blue
loops. Since the conversion from helium to carbon in the core is a relatively
slow process, the evolution from the red to the blue is much slower than
the crossing from the blue to the red when the shell source burns its way
out. In Fig. 15.2 stages of slow evolution are indicated by thicker lines.

15.3 Dependence of evolution on interior mixing

We saw earlier that the degree of mixing of helium enriched
material to the outer layers is rather uncertain because of semi-convection
as well as the unknown amount of convective overshoot and because of
other possible mixing mechanisms like mixing due to strong differential
rotation (called Schubert-Goldreich instability). It seems therefore im-
portant to study which changes in stellar evolution would be expected if
the degree of mixing is larger than assumed in the calculations discussed so
far.
In Fig. 15.3 we compare 'standard' evolutionary tracks (A = 0) calcu-
lated in the standard way (which means assuming no overshoot mixing
outside the convective core and assuming abundance stratification in the
semi-convection zone which will just stabilize it) with evolutionary tracks
calculated by Bertelli, Bressan and Chiosi (1985), in which they assume
that due to convective overshoot the mixing extends to \ (X = 0.5) or 1
(A = 1) pressure scale height above the convectively unstable region.
There are several striking differences between these tracks. For increased
mixing we find the following:
(a) The main sequence lifetime of a star with a given mass
becomes longer because a larger reservoir of hydrogen can be tapped
before hydrogen is exhausted and the shell source develops.
(b) The luminosity L of the giant branch is increased relative to
the main sequence stars of a given mass.
(c) The luminosity of the blue loops is increased even more than
the luminosity of the giant branch such that there is now a larger difference
 Dependence on interior mixing 201
in L between the blue loop star of a given mass and a giant of the same mass
and also between a blue loop star and a main sequence star of equal
masses.
For stars with increased mixing, the mass of an evolved star with given
luminosity is therefore smaller than for a star which follows standard
evolution theory. For overshoot mixing to about 1 scale height above the
convective core the expected mass would be lower by about 20 per cent.
The reduction in mass increases with the extent of overshoot.
If we determine the mass of blue loop stars from binaries we can
determine the degree of additional mixing in stars. Present studies yield
masses of supergiants smaller than expected from standard evolution
theory, perhaps indicating additional mixing in the interiors of massive
main sequence stars, but perhaps other corrections of our theory are also
needed, such as changes in the interior absorption coefficients, for in-
stance.

4.5 4.3 4.1 3.9 3.7 3.5

log refi

Fig. 15.3. Compares evolutionary tracks of stars with M = 5 MQ and M = 9 MQ for the
same chemical composition but with different degrees of mixing during the main
sequence phase. With more mixing (A = 1 means overshoot by 1 pressure scale height) in
the core of main sequence stars, the luminosity of the giant phase is increased as
compared to no overshoot mixing (A = 0). The luminosity for the blue loop is further
increased. The solid lines on the right connect the tips of the blue loops for the different
mixing parameters X. The solid line on the left shows the main sequence. From Bertelli,
Bressan and Chiosi (1984).
202 Evolution of massive stars
15.4 Evolution after helium core burning
In Fig. 15.4 we show the structure of a star after a large fraction of
the helium star has been converted to carbon or perhaps oxygen depend-
ing on the central temperature which means, depending on the mass of the
star. For higher temperatures C12 can combine with a He4 nucleus to form
O16. In the core we therefore have a mixture of carbon and oxygen,
surrounded by the remainder of the helium star, enclosed by the hydrogen
envelope. At each boundary there is a shell source. Calculations show that
at this stage of evolution the hydrogen shell source again becomes more
important and the hydrogen envelope expands, the star evolves again to
the red while the carbon oxygen core contracts and heats. Finally the
central temperature increases enough to permit further nuclear reactions.
Two C12 may combine to Mg24. The star may experience a new blue loop,
but the lifetime on this blue loop is still shorter because less energy is
gained in this burning process. We are less likely to see stars on the second
blue loop. For any supergiant, we are most likely to see it on the first blue
loop, probably crossing from the red to the blue. In a few cases it may cross
in the other direction. Most of the cool supergiants must have been red
giants at least once before.

Fig. 15.4. Shows schematically the structure of a star after a large fraction of the core
helium star has been converted to C12. For higher temperatures some of the C 12 may be
converted to O16.
 Type II supernovae 203
15.5 The carbon flash
For massive stars we do not expect a helium flash because the
densities in the helium core are not high enough for electron degeneracy.
When, however, the star converts helium to carbon, the core contracts
further. For stars with masses between 2.25 M o and about 5 M© the
density may after helium burning become high enough for electron
degeneracy. The onset of C12 burning then leads to a runaway energy
generation until the temperature becomes high enough to remove the
degeneracy and the core expands such that the nuclear reaction rate
decreases and a new equilibrium can be established. It is not yet clear
whether an explosive onset of carbon burning could perhaps lead to an
explosion of the star. This depends on the number of neutrinos generated
at high temperatures. Since they can freely escape they provide an efficient
cooling mechanism which slows down the runaway heating. It would be
interesting tofindout whether the explosive onset of carbon burning could
indeed lead to a supernova explosion.

15.6 Evolution of massive stars beyond the blue loops

It is not difficult to extrapolate further what will happen in the
interior of massive stars after carbon is exhausted in the core and the core
further contracts and heats. Nuclear reactions between particles with
increasing Z can take place, building up heavier and heavier elements,
until elements of the iron group like Ni, Fe, Co are formed. Up to these
nuclei such fusion reactions still liberate energy because the mass per
nucleon still decreases. A binding energy of Arac2 is liberated when
particles combine (see Table 8.1). Nuclear build-up will, however, not
proceed beyond the iron group nuclei because energy would be consumed,
not liberated, in building up heavier elements. We end up with a star which
qualitatively looks as seen in Fig. 15.5. The star has a nucleus with iron
group elements surrounded with shells of lighter elements (like onion
layers). The outermost shells are helium and hydrogen. Fig. 15.5 applies to
stars with masses greater than around 12 M© to 15 M©.

15.7 Type II supernovae

Type II supernovae probably do not occur in old stellar systems
like elliptical galaxies. It is therefore believed that they are associated only
with young stellar populations. They are often associated with large H II
regions, that is with regions where hydrogen is ionized. This means they
204 Evolution of massive stars
must be associated with hot stars which can provide enough energetic
photons for the ionization. These observations suggest that they may be
related to very advanced stages of evolution of rather massive stars. The
large amount of energy involved in this explosion (~10 52 erg) leaves only
two possibilities for the energy supply: either nuclear reactions or the
formation of a neutron star (see Section 8.2 and Volume 1). In the
formation of a neutron star of 1 M© with a radius of ~ 106 cm (~ 10 km) the
gravitational energy release Eg is
GM2 6.6 x 1(T8 x 4 x 1066 ,52.
30 x 10^ erg
R 106

plenty of energy for the supernova explosion. The total nuclear energy En
available is about AMC2, where AM is the mass fraction converted into
energy, about 1 per cent of the stellar mass. For a 10 solar mass star we thus
find
En ~ 10"2 x Me2 = 10"2 x 2 x 1034 x 9 x 1020 erg = 2 x 1053 erg

Fig. 15.5. Very massive stars (M > 12 M o ) will manufacture heavier and heavier
elements in their interior during advanced stages of stellar evolution. The heaviest nuclei
are found in the innermost core, which is surrounded by shells with successively lighter
elements. The star looks like an onion with different shells (not drawn to scale).
According to Clayton (1968).
 Type II supernovae 205
which would also be enough for the supernova explosion. On the other
hand if the supernova is related to late stages of evolution for massive stars
then essentially all of the nuclear energy has been used already to provide
the luminosity of the star during its lifetime.
Once the star with 10 to 40 MQ has reached the stage shown in Fig. 15.5 a
further increase in central density and temperature due to the nuclear
reactions outside the Fe 56 core will not lead to more nuclear energy
generation in the interior but instead a process analogous to 'ionization'
occurs. The Fe 56 breaks up into helium by the following photo disinte-
gration process:
Fe 56 -> 13He 4 + 4n - 124 MeV
where n stands for neutron. This means a large energy drain occurs for the
central region. (Since the pressure is provided by the free electrons this
process does not increase the pressure because of the increasing number of
heavy particles.)
At these temperatures and densities still another process takes place.
The protons in the nuclei combine with electrons to form neutrons by the
process
p + e —> n + vet
Electrons and positrons may also annihilate to create neutrinos. These
processes reduce the pressure because electrons are consumed and energy
is lost. Because of the reduced electron pressure, which now cannot
support the weight of the overlying material, the Fe core collapses almost
freely until nuclear densities are reached. In the core essentially all
electrons and protons combine to neutrons at such high densities. At that
point resistance to further compression increases steeply and the collapse
has to stop. The pressure change causes sound waves which are trapped
and build up to form a Shockwave which for stellar masses between about
10 and 15 M o can apparently lead to an explosion of the outer layers of the
star. The theoretical result is the formation of a neutron star in the center
with a mass which is nearly equal to the original iron core mass but which
now consists of neutrons. The break-up of Fe consumes about two-thirds
of the energy released in the collapse but just enough energy seems to be
left for the explosion. For stars more massive than about 15 or 20 Mo no
explosion seems to result theoretically so far. The whole star must then
collapse forever. Very massive stars may have no other choice than
ultimately to become black holes. Of course, for us onlookers this takes an
infinite amount of time.
 16
Late stages of stellar evolution

16.1 Completely degenerate stars, white dwarfs

In Chapter 14 we saw that low mass stars apparently lose their

hydrogen envelope when they reach the tip of the asymptotic giant branch.
What is left is a degenerate carbon-oxygen core surrounded by a helium
envelope. The mass of this remnant is approximately 0.5 to 0.7 solar
masses depending perhaps slightly on the original mass and metal abun-
dances. The density is so high that the electrons are partly or completely
degenerate except in the outer envelope. We also saw that central stars of
planetary nebulae seem to outline the evolutionary track of these rem-
nants which decrease in radius, still losing mass and increasing their
surface temperature. Their luminosities do not seem to change much until
they reach the region below the main sequence (see Fig. 14.14). In the
interiors these remnants are not hot enough to start any new nuclear
reactions. When they started to lose their hydrogen envelope they still had
a helium burning and a hydrogen burning shell source. When the hydrogen
envelope is lost the hydrogen burning shell source comes so close to the
surface that it soon becomes too cool and is extinguished. The helium
burning shell source survives longer but finally is also extinguished, when
the star gets close to the white dwarf region. The remnant ends up as a
degenerate star with no nuclear energy source in its interior but which still
has very high temperatures. This is the beginning of the evolution of a
white dwarf. It loses energy at the surface, which is replenished by energy
from the interior, i.e. by thermal energy from the heavy particles. The
electrons are completely degenerate and cannot reduce their energy.
Because of the energy loss the star must slowly cool down. Unlike the
situation for non-degenerate stars, the pressure does not change when a
degenerate star cools since the star is balanced by the degenerate electron
pressure which does not change with decreasing temperature. Therefore
the star does not contract; it just cools off, maintaining its size.
206
 Completely degenerate stars 207
Where are these stars found in the H R diagram? For hydrostatic
equilibrium we must again require
dM
•i r A 2 / ^ , x

dr rl with dr = Ajtr p (16.1)

The difference with respect to stars considered so far is the relation
between P and p, which is independent of the temperature for completely
degenerate stars. To integrate equations (16.1) we therefore do not need
any equations describing the temperature stratification as we did for non-
degenerate stars. As we saw in Section 14.3, we have Pg = Ki(p/juE)5/3
provided we are not dealing with relativistic degeneracy. Here juE is the
mass (of heavy particles) per degenerate particle, in this case per electron.
Ki = 9.9 x 1012cgs units. Equations (16.1) are then two differential
equations for the two unknown functions Mr{r) and Pg{r) with p = p{Pg)
(or Pg = Pg(p)) and with two boundary conditions: one at the center,
namely at r = 0, Mr = 0 and one at the surface, namely Mr = M for Pg = 0.
For given M we find one solution for Mr(r) and Pg(r) with one set of values
for the central pressure Pc and for R. The solution does not depend on reff
or L, which remain undetermined by the hydrostatic equation. A whole
series of solutions with different r eff and L is possible for a given M. For
degenerate stars the hydrostatic equilibrium alone determines only R or p,
not the central temperature Tc.
In order to see qualitatively how M and R are related we proceed in a
similar way as we did in Chapter 3 when we derived a preliminary mass-
luminosity relation for main sequence stars. Since the temperature and
therefore the luminosity does not enter here we expect to find a relation
between mass and radius only. We can derive a qualitative relation
between M and R if we replace all the variables by average values. We can
say
dK Pc _ M A Wr M ,__N
dr R ^JZR r R
With this we find from equation (16.1) that
Pc GM 3 M _ GM2 a
(16.3)
R R 2 4 ^ r / ? 3 " R5
From the equation of state for a completely degenerate gas (equation
14.16) we have
5/3 M5/3 K x
r A
g l .5/3 ~1^5~/4^5/3 ..5/3 Ki0'^)
208 Late stages of stellar evolution

and

Pc M5B Kx 1
6
R fl (^) 5/

The hydrostatic equation (16.3) now reads

(|;T)5VE/3

Solving for the radius we find

For a given chemical composition the radius of the stellar remnant

decreases with increasing mass as M~ 1/3. For increasing masses, the
gravitational forces increase; therefore the pressure forces must also
increase. These can only increase if the density p increases, which means
the star must become smaller. The situation is very different from the one
for main sequence stars where larger mass stars have larger radii due to the
higher temperature in the massive stars.
How large are the radii estimated from the rough approximation
(equation (16.7))?
For a fully ionized carbon star we have 6 electrons for 12 nuclei. The
mass //EmH P e r electron is ^mH = 2mH = 3.32 x 10~24 g. We found
Kx - 1013 (equation (14.17)). We then obtain
1 m 13 M \2/3
R ~ M'm — - J—\ ~ M~ m x 1.82 x 1019 = 1.44 x 108 cm
fiE 6.7 x 1(T8 \4jt)
for M = MQ = 2 x 1033 g. For a one solar mass star we thus estimate
R — 1400 km. This is the correct order of magnitude for a white dwarf's
radius, in spite of our very rough approximations.
In Volume 1 we estimated from the luminosity of a white dwarf at solar
temperature that its radius is about 6000 km. With our crude estimate we
are wrong by a factor of 4, which is quite good, considering that the radius
of a white dwarf is about 100 times smaller than that of the sun. White
dwarfs must then be degenerate stars. For white dwarfs we must therefore
have R ^ M~1/3 for non-relativistic degeneracy. (For M > 0.2 M o correc-
tions are already needed.)
As we emphasized earlier, the effective temperatures and luminosities
are not determined by the hydrostatic equation. The reff are independent
 Completely degenerate stars 209

of this condition. As for main sequence stars the surface temperature or

effective temperature is determined by heat transport from the inside out.
The difference is that the central temperature of a white dwarf is not
determined by hydrostatic equilibrium but rather by its history, by
whatever the central temperature was when the star arrived in the white
dwarf region of the HR diagram, and by its age as a white dwarf. Since it
started out as the very high temperature nucleus of a red giant we expect it
to arrive as a hot star with Tef{ ~ 105 K. Even with a radius of only 6000 km
it will still be a fairly bright object intrinsically and loses energy rather
rapidly. This reduces its temperature. It has no nuclear energy source, it
does not contract because the pressure is independent of T, so it just cools
down, becoming fainter. Its luminosity is L = AjiR^oT^f. For a given mass
the radius R isfixed,while Teff and L slowly decrease. In the log L, log Teff
diagram it follows a line
log L = 4 log Teff + 2 log R(M)
R is a constant for a given mass but decreases with increasing mass. In the
log L, log Teff diagram the cooling sequence of a white dwarf is a straight
line, the larger mass white dwarfs having the smaller L for a given Teff, as
shown in Fig. 16.1.
For more massive white dwarfs the radius becomes smaller and smaller.
How small can white dwarfs get? For larger masses and smaller radii the
density obviously increases, and with increasing density the degeneracy
increases. For large enough masses relativistic degeneracy is approached.
The electrons must have velocities close to the velocity of light. In Chapter
14 we derived that for relativistic degeneracy

-) (16.8)
E/

If we want to find out whether there is a limiting radius of white dwarfs

for increasing masses we have to use this relation which holds for
extremely large densities.
Using the same approach as above, we stillfindequation (16.3) but now
equation (16.8) has to be used to replace Pg. We find

2
R R5 (3Jr) 4 / V R5 4JT

We cannot solve for the radius, because R cancels out of this equation.
We are left with an equation for the mass alone, which becomes
210 Late stages of stellar evolution
1/3
M™^±±\— .4/3

and

(16.10)
M
G) UJ .
With// E = 2raH as for a helium, carbon or oxygen white dwarf we estimate
Me~1.4M0.
Equation (16.10) tells us that there can be only one mass for a relativistic
degenerate star in hydrostatic equilibrium and that mass is M e ~ 1.4 M©,
as was first calculated by Chandrasehkar. We do not obtain any infor-
mation about the radius. The star could have any radius, provided it is still
a star whose pressure is determined by relativistic degenerate electrons,
which requires very small radii. In the hydrostatic equation the pressure
cancels out.

15

3.6

Fig. 16.1. In the M bol , Teff diagram cooling sequences for white dwarfs with
1.2 ^ MIMQ ^ 0.1 are shown (solid lines). They are straight lines going almost
diagonally through the diagram. The mass numbers are given at the top. The curved
solid lines show the positions of white dwarfs of different ages. A carbon-oxygen core
with a thin hydrogen or helium shell was assumed. The positions of helium white dwarfs
with an age of 1010 years are also shown by the dashed line. In addition the positions
determined for existing white dwarfs have been plotted. Different symbols refer to
different spectral types of white dwarfs. From Weidemann (1975).
 Neutron stars 211
Complete relativistic degeneracy is of course only a limiting case which
is never quite reached. The derivation shows, however, that there cannot
be a white dwarf with M > M e.
If juE changes, the mass limit changes and a relativistically degenerate
star with M = 1.4 Mo is not in hydrostatic equilibrium if juE ¥^ 2.

16.2 Neutron stars

We saw that for very large electron densities leading to relativistic
degeneracy we reach a mass limit for white dwarfs. For larger masses
gravitational forces are larger than the pressure forces. The star shrinks.
We know, however, from our discussion of supernovae that for very
high densities the electrons and protons are squeezed so close together
that they form neutrons. We then no longer have degenerate electrons,
but degenerate neutrons. Because of the larger mass of neutrons as
compared to electrons the degeneracy starts only at much higher densities
as we discussed in Chapter 14, but for sufficiently high densities we also
find neutron degeneracy. The constant Kx in relation (16.4) is smaller for a
neutron star because me for the electrons has to be replaced by m n , the
larger mass of the neutrons. Also instead of juBmu, the mass per degener-
ate electron (which is^ E ra H = 2raH for helium and carbon white dwarfs),
we now have to insert juNmu, the mass per degenerate neutron, which
gives /uN = raH if we have only neutrons. There are also some heavier
particles in such high density matter, which increases juN but by how much
we do not know exactly. In any case JUN = raH is a reasonable estimate.
This means we have less mass per degenerate particle.
We again find that the radii of neutron stars decrease as M~1/3 for
non-relativistic degeneracy and again we can estimate a radius for a 1 M o
neutron star, which is decreased by a factor 1835 because of the larger
neutron mass, but increased by the factor 25/3 because of the smaller value
of//N. Altogether wefinda decrease in radius by roughly a factor of 600 as
compared to the white dwarf, that is a 1 M© neutron star has a radius of
about 10 to 15 km. The density in such a star comes out to be

One cubic centimeter of this material has a mass of several 100 million
tonnes. In other words, such a star has nuclear densities.
Is there a limiting mass for neutron stars? The constant K2 does not
depend on the particle mass. It is therefore the same for a relativistically
212 Late stages of stellar evolution

degenerate neutron star as for a star with relativistically degenerate

electrons. The limiting mass M for a neutron star, which we call M N , is
proportional to//^ 2 as seen from equation (16.10). lfjuN = mu the limiting
value MN ~ 4Me — 5.6 MQ. In reality we have to consider the presence of
heavier nuclei, which increases juN. The upper limit for the mass of a
neutron star appears to be between 3 and 5 solar masses.
The actual mass of a neutron star depends, of course, on the history of its
formation. If it originates from the collapse of the Fe core of 1.35 solar
masses, while the remainder of the stellar mass is expelled, we will find a
supernova remnant which is a neutron star with M ~ 1.35 M©.
If a He or C, O white dwarf with a mass close to 1.4 M o accretes mass
from a companion star it is squeezed together and heats up. He or C12 may
then start nuclear reactions before the star is compressed into a neutron
star. In the highly degenerate interior such nuclear reactions may lead to a
detonation or deflagration which can be the origin for a supernova I
explosion. These also occur in elliptical galaxies and are therefore believed
to have old, low mass stars as progenitors.
 17

Observational tests of stellar

evolution theory

17.1 Color magnitude diagrams for globular clusters

The best way to check stellar evolution calculations is, of course, to

compare calculated and observed evolutionary tracks. Unfortunately we
cannot follow the evolution of one star through its lifetime, because our
lifetime is too short - not even the lifetime of scientifically interested
humanity is long enough. Only in rare cases may we observe changes in the
appearance of one star, for instance when it becomes a supernova.
Another example occurred some decades ago when FG Sagittae suddenly
became far bluer, a rare example of stellar changes which are too fast to fit
into our present understanding of stellar evolution.
Generally evolutionary changes of stars are expected to take place over
times of at least 104 years (except perhaps for stars on the Hayashi track,
where massive stars may evolve somewhat faster). How then can we
compare evolutionary tracks? Fortunately there are star clusters which
contain up to 105 stars all of which are nearly the same age but of different
masses. In such very populous clusters there are a large number of stars
which have nearly the same masses.
In Fig. 17.1 we show schematically evolutionary tracks of stars with
about one solar mass. They all originate near spectral types GO or G2 on
the main sequence. Their lifetime, t, on the main sequence is about
1010 years. The evolution to the red giant branch takes about 107 years. So
after 1010 years stars with a mass of 1 M© are just leaving the main
sequence. Stars with a mass of 1.004 M o have a lifetime of 1010 — 107 years
(if t oc M~2'5). Stars with a mass of 1.004 M o therefore are further along in
their evolution and have just reached the red giant branch. Stars with
1.008 M o are still further evolved and have already reached the top of the
red giant branch. Since stars of 1.000 M o , 1.004 M o and 1.008 M o all have
indistinguishable evolutionary tracks we will find that they outline the
evolutionary track for stars with 1.004 ± 0.004 M o .
213
214 Tests of stellar evolution theory
This means, of course, that we must have a large number of stars in a
given cluster to see enough stars along the evolutionary track. More
accurately, what we see in an HR diagram is an isochrone showing stars at
a given time, i.e. at a given age, if they were all 'born' at the same time.
These isochrones are almost identical with an evolutionary track for a
given stellar mass.
How well do these isochrones agree with stellar evolution theory? In
Fig. 17.2 we compare isochrones calculated by VandenBerg and Bell
(1985) with the observed color magnitude diagrams (isochrones) for 47
Tuc, M5 and the cluster Pal 12 (Pal stands for Palomar) as given by Stetson
et al. (1989). For 47 Tuc and M5 the isochrones for an age of 16 X 109 years
agree rather well with the observed positions of the stars. For the cluster
Pal 12 the agreement for this age is rather poor; however, in Fig. 17.3 we
see that for this cluster the isochrone for an age of 12 x 109 years give very
good agreement. We can conclude that present theoretical model calcu-
lations can represent the observations quite well. Of course, we have some
parameters to adjust, like age and the chemical abundances of heavy

(B-V)o

Fig. 17.1. Evolutionary tracks for stars with masses of 1 M o , 1.004 MQ and 1.008 M©
are shown schematically. After 1010 years the star with a mass of 1.008 M o may have just
reached the tip of the red giant branch while the star with 1.004 M Q just arrives at the
bottom of the red giant branch. The star with 1 M o is just leaving the main sequence.
 Color magnitude diagrams: globular clusters 215
elements which we only know from colors or spectral analysis to within a
factor of 2 or 3. The helium abundance is also uncertain.
Theoretical model calculations yield L and T eff. The observations give
rav and B — V. We therefore have to establish the relation between
B — V, reff and the bolometric corrections which all depend on metal
abundances on interstellar reddening, on distances and on the theory of
stellar atmospheres.
Considering all the steps necessary before a comparison can be made we
can be quite satisfied with the agreement between observed and calculated
isochrones. The main sequence and giant branches can now be well
represented. We therefore feel confident that basically our understanding
of stellar evolution is correct.

1 1 1 1 1 1 . 1 m
. . . . . . . ^

1 - - 1
A • #
A
A •
2 _- 1 ^ m 16 A
A
•
_ - 2

3 - - 3
My

4 - - 4
I A\MT 47 Tuc •
\ti ( Pal 12 # -
5 - - 5

6 - - 6

0.5 0.5
(B-V). (B-V).
Fig. 17.2. Color magnitude diagrams of the globular clusters 47 Tuc and M5 are shown
as measured by Hesser et al. (1987). Superimposed are theoretical isochrones for stars
with ages of 16 x 109 years as calculated by VandenBerg and Bell (1985), assuming a
helium abundance by mass Y = 0.20 and heavy element abundances log ZIZQ = -0.49,
—0.79 and —1.27. For the convection a characteristic length / = 1.5// was assumed. A
pseudo-distance modulus rav — M v = 13.15 was adopted for 47 Tuc and
E(B — V) = 0.04. For M5 a pseudo-distance modulus of my — Mv = 14.15 and
E(B — V) = 0.03 was used. For M5 and 47 Tuc a good fit is found for an age of 16 billion
years with log Z/ZQ = - 1 for M5 and log Z/ZQ = -0.65 for 47 Tuc. For the cluster
Pal 12, for which my - Mv = 16.3 and E(B - V) = 0.02 was adopted, no good fit is
found for this age. From Stetson et al. (1989).
216 Tests of stellar evolution theory

Generally ages between 12 and 17 billion years are obtained in this way
for globular cluster stars. These are larger than the age of the universe as
presently derived from the Hubble expansion. We do not yet understand
the origin of this discrepancy.

17.2 Color magnitude diagrams of young clusters

As pointed out above we need clusters with a large number of stars
in order to find enough stars in a very small mass range to outline the
evolutionary track for a given stellar mass. The young galactic clusters do
not have enough stars. In most young galactic clusters we find the main
sequence and perhaps one or at most a handful of supergiants or giants.
Galactic clusters are therefore not well suited for the study of evolutionary
tracks.
Our best chances of studying evolutionary tracks of massive stars are
provided by the populous young clusters in the Magellanic Clouds, though
in these dense distant clusters the contamination by background stars
causes a large scatter in the photometric data. In Fig. 17.4 we show a color

-I I I I - I I

12 • -

(B-V)o (B-V)o
Fig. 17.3. For the cluster Pal 12 an age of 12 billion years and a heavy element
abundance of log Z/ZQ = -0.8 gives a good match for observed and theoretical
isochrones in the color magnitude diagram. The metal abundances for the isochrones
plotted are the same as those in Fig. 17.2. From Stetson et al. (1989).
 Observed masses of white dwarfs 211
magnitude diagram for the LMC cluster NGC 2010 as measured by Mateo
(1987). Evolutionary tracks are also shown. The scatter of the data is large,
but there is a fair overall agreement between theoretical and observed
isochrones. In Fig. 17.5 we show a comparison of theoretical tracks with
the color magnitude diagram of NGC 330 in the Small Magellanic Cloud.
Fig. 17.6 shows a photograph of this young populous cluster. Generally
there is reasonable agreement between the observed color magnitude
diagram and the theoretical isochrones except for a shift in B — V. The
color excess for this cluster may be larger than the assumed value of
E(B — V) = 0.06, generally adopted for the Small Magellanic Cloud
galaxy.

17.3 Observed masses of white dwarfs

Our theoretical discussions have shown that white dwarfs must
have masses M < 1.4 M o . The mass of a white dwarf must be determined

23 -r

-.4 .4 .8 1.2 1.6

(B-V)
Fig. 17.4. The color magnitude diagram for the cluster NGC 2010 in the Large
Magellanic Cloud is shown as measured by Mateo (1987). Superimposed are isochrones
as calculated by Brunish and Truran (1982) for an age of 63 million years (solid line) and
by Bertelli, Bressan and Chiosi (1984) for 172 million years with convective overshoot
(dashed line). A helium abundance Y = 0.28 and solar metal abundances were assumed.
A color excess correction of E(B — V) = 0.09 was applied. A distance modulus of
m vo ~ My = 18.20 was adopted. From Mateo (1987).
218 Tests of stellar evolution theory
by the history of its formation. It depends on the mass of the carbon-
oxygen core in its progenitor red giant and on the mass of the helium
envelope still remaining after the mass-losing process.
For some white dwarfs in binaries masses can be determined as, for
instance, for Sirius B. Masses ^ 1 M o are generally found (see Fig. 16.1),
though Sirius B has a mass of 1.05 M o .
Some of the white dwarfs are close enough for us to measure parallaxes,
such that their luminosities can be determined. If a white dwarf has a main
sequence companion the photometric parallax of the companion can be
derived. The effective temperatures of the white dwarfs are obtained from
the energy distributions. The stars can thus be placed in the log L, log Teff
diagram, and their positions can be compared with theoretical cooling
tracks for different masses.
In Fig. 16.1 we compare the positions of the white dwarfs in the log L,
log Teff diagram with theoretical cooling sequences for different masses.
The white dwarfs cluster along a sequence with M = 0.6 ± 0.2 M o with a
few exceptions, like Sirius B. In dwarf novae (which are binaries believed

1O i i i i i i i i i i i i 1 i i i 1 i i _

14 % —

15
. * NGC 3 3 0 -
• • • ~~
16
t #" •
: I
17

18
•
>V . . •~-
I. •
19 •
—«
20 \ f.\:'*r, • • • . -i
21 — • y • • • * • " * ." ""
1 1 l\l 1 1 I I I 11 1 1 11 1 1l~
-.4 0 .4 .8 1.2 1.6
(B-V)
Fig. 17.5. The color magnitude diagram of the populous young cluster NGC 330 in the
Small Magellanic Cloud (SMC) is shown. Superimposed is an isochrone for the age of 1
million years as calculated by Brunish and Truran (1982). Y = 0.28 log Z/ZQ = -1.3
were assumed. A distance modulus of rav - Mw = 18.8 was adopted for the SMC, and
E(B - V) = 0.06. All stars appear to be too red. We suspect that the £(B - V) for this
cluster may be larger by 0.12 than assumed. From Mateo (1987).
 Observed masses of white dwarfs 219
to have a white dwarf that accretes mass from its companion) the masses of
the white dwarfs appear to be frequently larger than 0.6 A/ o probably due
to the mass accretion. In the past perhaps Sirius B also accreted mass from
Sirius A?
The masses around 0.6 M o are consistent with the picture that white
dwarfs are the burnt-out cores of asymptotic branch giants. By the time the
star reaches the termination point of the asymptotic giant branch the core
reaches a mass around 0.6 M o . The masses of the central stars of planetary
nebulae also appear to cluster around M = 0.6 MQ. as expected for
remnant cores of low mass stars.
While generally the white dwarf observations agree with our theoretical
expectations there are still some problems. In a young galactic cluster, the
Pleiades, we see stars with masses up to 6 M o still on the main sequence,
yet there is at least one white dwarf in that cluster. Since only stars with
masses larger than 6 M o have evolved off the main sequence the progeni-
tor star for this white dwarf, which has certainly less than the limiting mass
(namely 1.4 solar masses), must have expelled about 5 M o to become a

K, •^••••••MP-KiSf

F/g. 77.6. A (negative) photograph of the young, populous cluster NGC 330 in the
Small Magellanic Cloud galaxy. Courtesy: P. Hodge.
220 Tests of stellar evolution theory
white dwarf. How did this happen? By the formation of a massive
planetary nebula, perhaps?

17.4 Supernovae, neutron stars and black holes

17.4.1 Supernovae and neutron stars
Supernovae have always been of special interest to the astro-
nomers because of the enormous amount of energy involved. The final
decline of the light curves with a half-life of 56 days suggests that a large
amount of Co56 is formed in the explosion, which decays radioactively with
a half-life of 56 days and which probably supplies the energy during the
slow decrease in light output. This in itself is not very strong evidence that
we understand what is happening in such a gigantic explosion. Fortunately
a supernova explosion took place in 1987 in the Large Magellanic Cloud,
the nearest neighbor galaxy, and indeed a small number of high energy
neutrinos were detected at several neutrino observing stations. These
were detected a few hours before the light outburst, consistent with the
picture that the core collapse produces many energetic neutrinos which
escape with the velocity of light. The shock front leading to the explosion
develops about 30 seconds later and travels outward with supersonic but
much lower velocity than the speed of light. It reaches the surface a few
hours later with high temperatures (~10 5 K) when it causes the sudden
brightening of the star. A very large neutrino flux must have occurred to
lead to a detection of even a handful of neutrinos. This and the time delay
between the neutrino burst and the optical brightening of the supernova
give us confidence that our theoretical studies may be close to the truth.
Are neutron stars remnants of supernova explosions? Very rapidly
rotating pulsars appear to be neutron stars for reasons discussed in
Volume 1. Their pulse period is their rotation period, which makes a beam
of light pass by us once or twice during one revolution.
A pulsar with a period of one-thirtieth of a second is seen in the Crab
nebula, the remnant of a supernova recorded by Chinese astronomers in
the year 1054. Another pulsar is seen in the Vela supernova remnant.
There may be neutron stars in other supernova remnants which we cannot
recognize as such because their light beams may be directed away from us.
We do not know yet whether there are neutron stars in all remnants of type
II supernovae.
The origin of type I supernovae is unknown at present, though it is
speculated that mergers of white dwarfs or neutron stars are responsible.
 Supernovae, neutron stars and black holes 221
77.4.2 Black holes
Are there black holes? The first question is: How could we
recognize them? Large gravitational fields may be expected to draw
nearby material into the black hole, especially in binaries. Such material
would be accelerated to very high velocities. High velocity particles are
expected to emit X-rays. Of course, all this has to happen outside the black
hole, otherwise we could not see it. We are therefore looking for X-ray
sources which are not neutron stars (X-ray generation can also be expected
for mass accreting neutron stars). If the mass of the X-ray source is larger
than about 5 M Q , the limiting mass for a neutron star, we can be sure it is
not a neutron star. Mass determinations can only be done in binaries. For a
black hole binary we can, of course, only see one star, the companion of
the black hole. For one star we can only determine the (Mi + M2) sin3 i
(see Volume 1), where i is the (unknown) inclination between the line of
sight and the normal to the orbital plane.
It is the uncertainty of the factor sin / which has prevented us from
drawing any firm conclusion about the existence of a black hole in a binary
system. There are, however, a few systems in our galaxy and in the Large
Magellanic Cloud which are highly probable candidates. Massive black
holes may be in the centers of quasars and other active nuclei of galaxies.
While this is an attractive hypothesis to explain observations, there is at
present no firm proof that a massive black hole exists in any of these
galaxies or in any binary.
 18
Pulsating stars

18.1 Period-density relation

In Volume 1 we saw that there is a group of stars which periodically

change their size and luminosities. They are actually pulsating (the pulsars
are not). When Leavitt (1912) studied such pulsating stars, also called
Cepheids, in the Large Magellanic Cloud she discovered that the brighter
the stars, the lpnger their periods, independently of their amplitude of
pulsation. In Volume 1 we discussed briefly how this can be understood.
The pulsation frequencies are eigenfrequencies of the stars. They are
similar to the eigenfrequencies of a rope of length 2/, which is fastened at
both ends but free to oscillate in the center (see Fig. 18. la). If you pull the
rope periodically down in the center, first slowly and then more rapidly,
you find that for a given frequency v0 a standing wave is generated in the
rope. For this frequency you need to put in only a very small amount of
energy, much less than for the other frequencies, for which running waves
are generated which interfere with each other and are therefore damped
rapidly. The frequency r 0 , which generates the standing wave, is an
eigenfrequency of the rope. If you increase the amplitude of the wave you
still find the same eigenfrequency v0. If you increase the frequency further
you again find running waves until you reach another frequency v2, three
times as large as v0, for which another standing wave is generated. This
wave has two nodes and a wavelength which is a third of the wavelength for
the eigenfrequency v0 (Fig. 18.1c). There also exists an eigenfrequency vx
which is twice as large as v0. For this frequency the wave has a node in the
center (Fig. 18.1b). You would have to pull at a distance of \l from the end
of the rope in order to excite this wave. The only possible standing waves
are those which satisfy the boundary conditions at both ends of the rope,
namely that the amplitude has to be zero at these points. Because of this
boundary condition a wave traveling along the rope is reflected at the end
and travels back. If the incoming wave and the reflected wave always have
222
 Period-density relation 223

the same phase at any given point x they enhance each other and we obtain
a standing wave. If they do not have the same phase they interfere with
each other and partially cancel each other. Such waves are strongly
damped and new energy has to be fed in all the time.
The frequency v0 is called the fundamental eigenfrequency and
Po = 1/VQ the fundamental period. v1 is the first overtone or first harmonic
frequency and v2 the second overtone or second harmonic, etc. The
corresponding wavefunctions £(*), shown for the rope in Fig. 18.1,
describe the amplitude at any given point JC, and are called the eigenfunc-
tions for the different modes of pulsation.

(a)
2/

0 x—• 2/

Fig. 18.1. (a) A rope of length 2/ is fastened at both ends. It is free to oscillate in the
center. It has a fundamental frequency v0 for a standing wave with nodes only on both
ends, (b) The first overtone with frequency vx for standing waves has a node in the
center of the rope and the maximum amplitude at distance d — \l from the walls, (c) The
second overtone mode for standing waves has two nodes at distance d = }l from the
walls and maximum amplitude in the center and at distance d — \l from the walls.
224 Pulsating stars

The period length is given by the travel time of the wave along the rope
back and forth, namely P = All'c where c is the phase speed of the traveling
wave.
A star acts like the rope, in a way. While for the rope the stresses in the
rope are the restoring forces, trying to bring it back to its equilibrium
position and hence causing it to oscillate, the restoring forces for the star
are the pressure forces and the gravitational forces. In the rope the stresses
determine the phase speed of the wave; in the star the pressure forces
determine the phase velocity of the wave, which is therefore the sound
velocity. (Remember that a sound wave is also a traveling pressure
disturbance.) For a spherically symmetric pulsation of a star the waves
from all directions converge in the center and are reflected. Because of the
convergence in the center the displacement amplitude in the center £(0)
must be zero, just as it is for the ends of the rope. At the surface of the star
the amplitude can be large, just as for the center of the rope. The surface of
the star corresponds to the point x = I for the rope. The length of the
period P is therefore ARI~c~s, where Q is the average sound velocity.
cs = \/y(Pg/p) for adiabatic sound waves and y = Cp/Cv = § for mon-
atomic gas. As in Volume 1 we find

, with r fgtf
p K K
With this we find for the period P
4R
P _ 4 1_ 1(3]
V
V(y(GM/R)) V(yG)VpV\4jr/ ' '

or
P = const, x p~m or P = Q(p/pQy1/2 (18.3)
where Q is a constant (if y = const.) and p o is the average density of the
sun, po = 1.4gem" 3. Equation (18.5) generally holds for adiabatic pul-
sations; see Section 18.4.
The larger the luminosity of the pulsating star, the larger the radius and
the smaller the average density p and the longer the period. The larger the
radius of the star, the longer the wave traveling time to the stellar center
and back. From the theoretical point of view the observed period lumino-
sity relation is a period density relation.
In stars the phase velocity of the waves, i.e. the speed of sound, is
different at different places, because cs <* V r . The traveling time, as
 Period-density relation 225

measured by the length of the period, therefore depends on the tempera-

ture stratification in the star. This means that the value of Q in equation
(18.3) depends on the temperature stratification. The values of Q also
depend on non-adiabatic effects which are different for different stars. For
pulsating stars with different luminosities the values of Q vary between
0.01 and 0.09. For helium stars they may be quite different. As Q depends
on the temperature and density stratifications, the observed values can be
used to check our calculations.
In stars, temperature and density increase by orders of magnitude from
the outside towards the inside. The eigenfunctions £;(x), which describe
the wave amplitudes as a function of x = r/R, are therefore very different
from those of a rope. In Fig. 18.2 we reproduce the eigenfunctions £•(*) as
obtained for an (unrealistic) star of homogeneous density. More realistic
models are the polytropes for which P oc p(n+1)/nt (For n = § we find
Pg oc p5/3 as for the adiabat with y = §.) For different n, different degrees of
mass concentration towards the center are found, as is seen in Table 18.1.
In Fig. 18.3 we show the eigenfunctions £i(x)/x for the polytrope with n = 3
which comes close to a real star. For such a star with a large central density
the amplitudes in the inner regions are extremely small (too much mass has
to be moved). In all these models the nodes for the overtone pulsations
occur at different values of r/R than in the case of the rope, because the

Vx
1/4 \ 1/2|

V
. ) \

x=r/R*-
are
Fig. 18.2. The eigenfunctions £,-(*) shown as calculated for a (hypothetical)
homogeneous density star. The amplitudes must be zero at the center. From Rosseland
(1949).
226 Pulsating stars

Table 18.1. Central density concentrations for different

poly tropes. From Rosseland (1949)

Polytrope index 2 3 4
pjp 11.4 54.4 623

restoring forces in the star are different at different values of r/R, while for
the rope the stresses are the same everywhere.
The ratios of the frequencies iV^o a n d V2/VQ are also different from those
of the rope. They depend on the density stratifications in the stars. For
stars with homogeneous densities we calculate V\lv§ = 3.56 and
v2/vi = 1.56, corresponding to the period ratios of P\/Po = 0.281 and
P2/Pi = 0.639, while for the more realistic polytrope with n = 3 and
y = 1.54 we find P^PQ = 0.687 while P2/P1 = 0.749. The ratio P^PQ is
increased by more than a factor of 2 as compared to the homogeneous
density model, but the value of P2IP\ is changed only slightly. It appears
that the ratio of PJPQ is a very good measure for the central density
concentration. If we can measure this ratio it provides an excellent check
on the model pressure and temperature stratification.

0.2
/ i1f f

—- ^ /

y
0.1

0 • i

U
6.9

Fig. 18.3. The eigenfunctions £i(r)/r are shown for a star whose temperature and density
stratification follow a polytrope with index n = 3. For the larger central density, as
compared to the homogeneous star, the amplitudes in the center decrease strongly. The
index of the harmonics is given in roman numerals. I indicates the fundamental mode, II
the first harmonic etc. From Rosseland (1949).
 Evolutionary state of Cepheids 227
For some RR Lyrae stars, which pulsate with periods of about 0.5 day,
period ratios of P\IPQ ~ 0.744 are observed, confirming a high central
density concentration. Some so-called beat Cepheids also show period
ratios close to this value.
For realistic stellar models calculated using the Henyey method, we
compute values of / y P 0 = 0.74 and P2/P1 = 0.68 for a 5 M o star.

18.2 Evolutionary state of Cepheids

In Volume 1 we saw that pulsating stars occur in the HR diagram
along a narrow band which reaches from very luminous late G type
(r eff - 5800 K) supergiants to late A stars (Teff - 8000 K) near the main
sequence. The brightest stars in this band are the d Cephei stars. The band
is therefore called the Cepheid instability strip. In Fig. 15.2 we showed the
position of this instability strip in the HR diagram together with the
evolutionary tracks for stars with masses between 3 and 9 solar masses,
according to calculations by Becker, Iben and Tuggle (1977). The
d Cephei stars occur in a region of the HR diagram for which the first
evolution of stars from left to right is very fast, as we have seen in Chapters
14 and 15. There is little chance of seeing such stars on their first crossing
through the instability strip. The massive stars, however, have another
chance to cross the instability strip, during their 'blue loop' excursions.
The evolution in the direction towards the blue, after starting helium
burning in the center, is much slower than that from the blue to the red. On
their second crossing of the instability strip the stars therefore stay much
longer. During their blue loop phase they generally spend the longest time
at the tip of the loops, as seen in Fig. 15.2. If for a given mass the tip of the
blue loop falls into the instability strip we should find a relatively large
number of Cepheids with this particular mass and period. For slightly
lower masses the blue loops become shorter and no longer reach the
instability strip, as seen in Fig. 15.1 for M = 3 MQ . For such low masses we
should not find any Cepheids. Cepheids with the tips of their blue loops in
the instability strip with masses just before the cut-off mass should have the
shortest fundamental periods. These then should be relatively abundant,
at least if we only look at Cepheids pulsating in the fundamental mode.
The blue loops extend further to the blue for stars with lower abun-
dances of heavy elements. For these we expect to see lower mass Cepheids
than for the high metal abundance population. In the Large and in the
Small Magellanic Clouds with lower than solar metal abundances we
therefore expect to see Cepheids of lower mass than in our galaxy.
228 Pulsating stars

Cepheids cross the instability strip only in a very advanced state of

evolution, most of them having started helium burning in the center; this
means they have a helium core which has contracted to very high densities
and temperatures. The strong mass concentration in the center of the
Cepheids is very important for the identification of the excitation mechan-
ism for the pulsations.

18.3 Analysis of pendulum oscillations

In order to understand better why the Cepheids start pulsating let
us look at the simple example of an oscillating pendulum. The equilibrium
position of the pendulum is the lowest one, where the gravitational force is
balanced by the tension in the string. If we lift the pendulum up it will fall
back towards its equilibrium position. Down to this point it is accelerated
by gravity. At the lowest point it is no longer accelerated but because it has
a high velocity it overshoots the equilibrium position due to its inertia and
moves upwards. During its climb gravity accelerates it downward and
finally makes it stop at a height equal to its original height on the other side
(see Fig. 18.4). Gravity then reverses the velocity of the pendulum and it
falls down again towards its equilibrium position where it overshoots, etc.
The process would continue forever if there were no damping due to
friction in the hanging point and due to the resistance of the air.
The pendulum, of course, will never start by itself to swing; it needs a
starting push. When stars evolve into the instability strip they do not

Push

Fig. 18.4. If a pendulum is lifted to position Ax it falls down to its equilibrium position
Ao. It arrives there with a velocity v and due to its inertia overshoots to position A 2.
At this point is has used all its kinetic energy to work against the gravitational pull
downwards. It falls back and overshoots again, etc. The amplitude can be increased by a
small downward push while the pendulum is falling. A small downward push while it is
climbing decreases the amplitude.
 Adiabatic pulsations 229
pulsate while they are on the cool side of the strip. When they reach the red
boundary of the strip they suddenly start pulsating all by themselves. How
can this happen? Let us look again at how we could excite the pendulum to
swing. Suppose we give it a very small push to begin with and then each
time when it starts to fall we give it a little push downward. In this way the
amplitude will slowly increase. We have to be very careful, however, to
give the push at exactly the right phase of the oscillation. If we push
downwards while the pendulum is still moving upwards, the amplitude will
decrease and we will damp the oscillation. If we give completely symmetric
pushes, for instance downwards while the pendulum is moving upwards
and the same downward push while it is moving downward, nothing will
change. In other words, if we increase the restoring force all the time we
cannot excite the pendulum. An increase in gravity would not increase the
amplitude. We need to push harder downwards when it is moving down-
ward than we push down when the pendulum is moving upwards.
The stars in the Cepheid strip manage to give themselves a push at the
right phase to increase their amplitude. There are several ways in which
the star can do this. We discuss here the one which seems to be the most
important. It is called the K mechanism because it is due to changes in the
absorption coefficient. In order to understand how it works wefirsthave to
look at adiabatic pulsations, where no energy exchange takes place
between different layers in the star.

18.4 Adiabatic pulsations

Once a star is brought out of its equilibrium configuration the
interplay of pressure and gravitational forces causes periodic inward and
outward motions of the star similar to that of the pendulum, except that for
the pendulum it is always gravity which pulls it back to its equilibrium
position. For the star the pressure forces push it outwards when it is too
small and the pressure forces are too large to be balanced by the
gravitational forces. The gravitational forces pull it back when it is too
large and the pressure forces are too small to balance gravity. The star will
overshoot the equilibrium position like the pendulum. If there is no energy
exchange between the different layers during the pulsation, we would have
adiabatic contractions and expansions which could go on forever. The
temperature would be highest when the star has its smallest radius and
lowest when it has its largest radius (see Fig. 18.5). In Volume 1 (see Fig.
18.6) we saw that the observed light and radial velocity variations of a
230 Pulsating stars

Cepheid do not correspond to such adiabatic pulsations. The highest

temperature is observed when the star is expanding and has nearly reached
its equilibrium radius. The lowest temperature occurs when the star is
moving inwards and has again nearly reached the equilibrium value of the
radius. Clearly the pulsations are not adiabatic. We know that there must
be some damping, because the radiative energy losses are proportional to
T4. The star loses more energy during high temperature phases when the
excess gas pressure expands it. This energy loss decreases the temperature
and thereby reduces the pressure forces which push the star out again. The
restoring force is thus reduced and the star does not expand to the same
large radius it did one period earlier. The pulsation is damped unless there
is also an extra push outwards at each period. This is the case for most
stars, and is the reason why most stars are not pulsating.
If the pulsations are to be excited, heat energy has to be added mainly at
phases shortly after maximum compression so that the restoring force, the
pressure, is increased during the outward acceleration.

0.5 1 1.5
Period

Fig. 18.5. The velocity, radius, pressure and temperature variations for adiabatic
pulsations are shown schematically. Pressure and temperature are highest for the
smallest radius. For excess pressure, the layers are accelerated outwards. For decreased
pressure, gravity pulls inwards. Arbitrary units.
 Excitation by the K mechanism 231
18.5 Excitation of pulsations by the K mechanism
In Chapter 7 we discussed that we expect a rather sharp dividing
line in the HR diagram between stars with a hydrogen convection zone and
those without. Calculations show that this theoretical dividing line agrees
with the observed position of the Cepheid instability strip.
As was discovered by Zhevakin (1959) the temperature and pressure
dependence of the absorption coefficient can for these stars feed energy
into the pulsations. The energy is taken out of the radiative flux. The
mechanism was explained by Baker and Kippenhahn (1962). In Fig. 18.7
their picture of the K 'mountain' is reproduced. This is a three-dimensional
display of the dependence of the absorption coefficient on temperature
and pressure. During adiabatic contraction, temperature and pressure
both increase; K may increase or decrease depending on whether we go

-02 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2

Phase

Fig. 18.6. The observed variations of the apparent visual magnitudes, the effective
temperatures, the spectral types and the radial velocities for d Cephei are shown as a
function of phase. At the bottom the changes in radius are shown as obtained by
integrating over the pulsational velocities. The radius is nearly the same for maximum
and minimum brightness. (Adapted from Becker, 1950. See also Volume 1.)
232 Pulsating stars

uphill or downhill on this mountain. From our discussion in Chapter 3 we

know that the radiative flux Fr is given by
4^dB
3 K dz
If K increases during compression, FT decreases. If a certain amount of flux
comes from the deeper layers it cannot propagate easily through the layer
with an increased K. The energy flux gets stuck in the high K region. The
energy accumulates and the region increases its temperature. As soon as K
starts to increase the layer heats up. It is important to note that heating
continues as long as K is larger than in the equilibrium configuration. A
higher temperature means a higher pressure, or a pressure excess above
the pressure which would be present for adiabatic contraction (see Fig.
18.8). Since heating continues throughout the compression phase, the
highest excess temperature and pressure is reached when the star reaches
the equilibrium radius. Then the star expands and during expansion
temperature and pressure decrease and K decreases. This means the
radiative flux F r now increases above its equilibrium value, excess energy
is taken out and the layer cools finally below its equilibrium value. This
reduces temperature and gas pressure during the expansion phases. The

Fig. 18.7. The K mountain as constructed by Baker and Kippenhahn (1962).

 Excitation by the K mechanism 233

pressure reduction continues throughout the expansion time. The gravi-

tational pull-back is therefore more efficient due to the reduction of the
opposing force. In Fig. 18.8(a) the sinusoidal pressure variation expected
for adiabatic pulsation is plotted schematically. Fig. 18.8(c) shows a
schematic plot of the excess temperature AAT leading to an excess
pressure A APg generated by the heating or cooling due to the changing K in
a layer where K increases during adiabatic contraction and decreases
during adiabatic expansion. It is important to realize that AAPg has a

1 1 1
s^ Inward motion ARy

/
•^Outward motion

(b)

* ^v A7~

^ \
y
(c)

• — - ^
N
/
/ \

I i i 1 | I i I 1 1 1
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4
Phase

Fig. 18.8. (a) Adiabatic radius and velocity variations as a function of phase for a
Cepheid (arbitrary scale). Negative velocities mean outward motion, positive velocities
falling motion, (b) The adiabatic temperature variations ATad (solid line). Maximum
A7ad occurs for minimum radius, and vice versa. In those layers where K is increasing
with increasing T and Pg, excess heating occurs during phases of positive AT and APg.
(Excess cooling occurs for negative AT and APg.) (c) The excess temperature increase,
AATis shown schematically. It increases throughout the phase of positive AT and APg.
Only after expansion has proceeded beyond the equilibrium radius does A AT actually
decrease. In (b) the final AT = ATad + AAT is shown schematically as a function of time
(dashed line). APg <* AT is larger during expansion phases than during contraction
phases, leading to excitation of the pulsation.
234 Pulsating stars

phase shift of ~\n in comparison with the adiabatic pressure changes. Fig.
18.8(b) shows a schematic plot of the final temperature (and pressure)
variations as a function of phase. The final gas pressure change has a phase
shift with respect to the adiabatic case as seen by comparison with Fig.
18.5. During the early expansion phase after the star has just had its
smallest radius, the excess gas pressure gives an excess push outwards
while the gas is already moving out. The excess pressure is zero or very
small when the star is still moving inwards. This corresponds to giving the
pendulum an extra push just after it has reached its maximum height and is
moving down already, exactly as we need it for the excitation of the
oscillation. During the phases of increased radius the pressure deficit
increases and reaches its maximum when the star is already shrinking. This
corresponds to giving the pendulum another push downwards when it is
falling down already. The restoring force, in this case gravity, becomes
more effective when the star is shrinking than when it is expanding. We
find exactly the phase relations we need for the enhancement or excitation
of the pulsation. This, of course, only works in the regions where K
increases during contraction. If K decreases during contraction the
opposite will be true and the pulsation is damped. In Fig. 18.7 we see that
next to a region where K increases during contraction there is also always a
region where K decreases during contraction, i.e. a damping region. Some
layers contribute to excitation, some to damping.
We know that for temperatures above —6000 K K increases because of
the beginning hydrogen ionization and the excitation of higher energy
levels in the hydrogen atom. We also know that this increase in K leads to
convective instability in the hydrogen ionization zone. Another increase in
K for adiabatic contraction occurs in a temperature range around 40 000 K
where the Lyman continuum absorption of hydrogen becomes very
important and where the helium ground level absorption contributes to
the opacity. This is also the region where He + ionizes to He 2 + . Both
regions are convectively unstable. Between these two K ridges we find a
valley which contributes to the damping of the pulsations. The question
then is which is more efficient: the excitation due to the increasing K during
contraction or the damping due to the regions of decreasing K during
contraction? The answer depends strongly on the amplitude of the
pulsation in the different layers, which is determined by the eigenfunctions
£(r). If the amplitudes are large in the excitation regions and much smaller
in the damping regions, then wefinda net excitation. If the amplitudes are
larger in the damping regions then the star is stable at least for that
particular mode of pulsation. The amplitude of the fundamental mode
 Excitation by nuclear energy generation? 235

may be large in an excitation region and small in a damping region. If so,

the star is unstable for pulsations in the fundamental mode. For the same
star the amplitude for the first harmonic mode may be small in the
excitation region and larger in the damping region. The same star would
then be stable for pulsations in the first harmonic mode. The opposite may
be true for another star. It is indeed found that the instability strips for the
different modes do not completely overlap, as seen in Fig. 18.9 where we
show the blue boundaries for the instability strip for a star with
M = 0.6 Afo. The boundary lines for the fundamental mode and for the
first harmonic mode do not agree. For the lowest luminosities the bluest
variables can only pulsate in the first harmonic mode, while for the more
luminous stars the bluest variables are unstable only to the fundamental
mode.

18.6 Excitation by nuclear energy generation?

In the early discussions of pulsational instability nuclear reactions
were considered to be a likely excitation mechanism. During contraction
temperature and pressure in the burning regions are higher leading to an

:
fry* ' —
2.8
M«0.6MQ
2.6 Y « 0.3
Z « 0.001 /
2.4
/ C
2.2

g> 2.0
1.8
1.6

1.4

1.2
•
: //
/f --
3.90 3.85 3.80 3.75 3.70
'09 Teff
Fig. 18.9. In the luminosity, 7eff diagram the blue edges of the instability strip for the
fundamental mode and for the first harmonic mode are shown for stars with M = 0.6 M Q
and different luminosities. For higher luminosities the instability in the fundamental
mode extends to higher 7eff than that for the first harmonic mode. For lower
luminosities the inverse is true. On the horizontal branch the bluest RR Lyrae stars,
Bailey's type c (see Volume 1), pulsate in the first harmonic mode. The cooler, type a
RR Lyrae stars pulsate in the fundamental mode. Adapted from Iben (1971).
236 Pulsating stars

increased energy generation and to heating of this region, which leads to

an increase in the gas pressure which also has its maximum during the early
expansion phases. Heating continues until the star has reached the
equilibrium radius. For larger radii the energy generation decreases and
the interior cools. The effect is very similar to that of an increase in K in the
outer regions. The phase relations are also the same. This indeed makes
the nuclear burning region an excitation region. In this context it is,
however, important that the Cepheids are in an advanced state of evol-
ution with a very high density concentration in the interior. The pulsation
amplitudes, the eigenfunctions £(>), are therefore extremely small in the
region of nuclear energy generation; see Fig. 18.3 for this effect. Because
of this extremely small amplitude the excitation by the nuclear energy
generation is so minute that it could never overcome the damping in the
surface regions where we find large amplitudes. If the nuclear burning
region were further out in the star where the amplitudes are larger this
excitation mechanism would be more efficient. Also were the temperature
dependence of the energy generation much stronger this excitation mech-
anism could be much more efficient. J. P. Cox (1956) calculated that
nuclear burning excitation could overcome the damping if the burning
region was further out than about 50 per cent of the stellar radius or if the
temperature dependence of the energy generation was proportional to
T90. The latter can never be the case. The former could possibly happen
for very large stages of stellar evolution when a star has lost most of its
envelope.

18.7 Limits of pulsation amplitudes

We now ask how the pulsations start and what limits the ampli-
tudes. What stops the amplitude from growing indefinitely? The latter
question is easy to answer if we look at the K mountain in Fig. 18.7. If
during contraction the change in temperature and pressure becomes so
large that we climb over the top of the mountain ridge then a further
increase in amplitude causes a decrease in K and therefore damping. The
pulsational amplitude is limited by the height of the ridges in the K
mountain. Other effects, such as the increasing energy loss at the surface
for very large temperature variations, also limit the amplitude.
In order to start the pulsation we only need a very small accidental
increase in pressure at some point. This will then increase in time and lead
to pulsations. The original perturbation needs to be only infinitesimally
small. It will inevitably grow.
 Edges of the instability strip 237
Such small disturbances may occur easily in a convectively unstable
region even if the velocities and the convective energy transport are very
small.

18.8 The edges of the instability strip

18.8.1 The blue edge
Regions of larger optical depth are more efficient in generating
excitation or damping. For low optical depth the radiation can escape
more easily and any temperature differences are most easily smoothed
out. If the excitation region moves closer to the surface for stars with
increasing effective temperatures the pulsational instability ceases. This
determines the blue edge of the instability strip. Since the excitation
regions are at different depths for the fundamental mode and for the first
harmonic the blue edges for the two modes are at different positions in the
HR diagram. Stars close to the blue edge may be unstable only to the
fundamental mode or only to the first overtone depending on their L and
Teff (see Fig. 18.9).

18.8.2 The red edge

We saw that the excitation by the K mechanism is due to the
increase in K in the convectively unstable zone which leads to a trapping of
the radiative flux, which in turn leads to an increase in the temperature.
This can only work if there is a radiative flux which can be trapped by an
increase in K. If most of the energy is transported by convection then an
increase in K cannot trap this energy. The remaining small amount of
radiative flux cannot contribute much to excess heating. If we have
efficient convective energy transport the excitation mechanism cannot
work. Pulsations can only be excited in stars in which the convective
energy transport is inefficient in the regions of increasing K. This occurs
just at the boundary line for the onset of efficient convection, exactly
where we observe the pulsating stars in the HR diagram, namely in the
Cepheid instability strip. If the Cepheids are close to the red boundary line
they may perhaps develop efficient convection for a small fraction of their
pulsational cycle. Whether this actually happens is at the moment not
clear.
It might be mentioned that several of the discussions in this chapter have
to be modified when discussing pulsations of massive, hot stars, for which
radiation pressure becomes very important.
 19
The Cepheid mass problem

19.1 Importance of Cepheid mass determinations

We know that Cepheids must be in an advanced state of evolution
because the blue loops are the only way they can stay in the instability strip
for any length of time. If we can determine mass and luminosity for a
Cepheid we can check whether its luminosity agrees with what we expect
without overshoot or additional mixing. A larger L might indicate addi-
tional mixing (see Fig. 15.3). In fact we could calibrate the amount of
mixing for the Cepheid progenitor on the main sequence by determining
mass and luminosity for a given Cepheid. Of course, we also have to know
the chemical abundances and the correct K. For a given L the derived
masses of the Cepheid may differ by 50 per cent if for instance the assumed
helium abundance is changed by a factor of 2.
We can also check the consistency of the stellar evolution and pulsation
theories by determining masses of Cepheids in different ways, making use
of either evolution or pulsation theory or of different aspects of those
theories. If the theories are correct we should, of course, find the same
mass, no matter how we determine it.

19.2 The period-luminosity relation

A number of Cepheids are found in galactic clusters. Their periods
can be measured and their distances can be determined, for instance, by
main sequence fitting or equivalent methods. We can thus find their
absolute magnitudes averaged over one period. The first extensive study
of distances for clusters with Cepheids was done by Sandage and Tam-
mann (1968), and a more recent one was done by Schmidt (1984). A
period-luminosity relation can then be derived. Sandage and Tammann
determined cluster distances by fitting the cluster main sequence with
the main sequence of the Hyades cluster for which they adopted
238
 Pulsational masses 239
mVo — Mv = 3.0. The recently determined value is raVo — My = 3.30.
Using this new distance modulus Sandage and Tammann (1968) find a
period-luminosity relation
MY = -3.42 log P + 2.52(B 0 - V o ) - 2.16 (19.1)
The more recent determination of the period-luminosity relation by
Schmidt (1984) yields
My = - 3 . 8 log P + 2.70(B 0 - V o ) - 2.21 (19.2)
which gives somewhat fainter magnitudes for a given period and therefore
smaller distances to the Cepheids. B o and V o are the average blue and
visual magnitudes of the Cepheid, corrected for interstellar absorption.

19.3 Evolutionary masses

With the period-luminosity relations (19.1) or (19.2) we can also
derive distances and absolute magnitudes for single Cepheids for which
periods and colors have been measured. Determining Teff from the
average B — V, the luminosity from My and the bolometric corrections
BC the position of the Cepheid in the r eff luminosity diagram can be fitted
on an evolutionary track for a given mass which should give us the mass of
the Cepheid. These masses are called evolutionary masses. With L °c M4-5
an error in the distance modulus by AMV = 0.3 or A log L = 0.12 gives an
error in the mass by A log M = 0.026 or by 6 per cent. The derived
evolutionary masses are rather insensitive to small errors in the distance
determination. Fig. 16.1 shows that for a given luminosity smaller evol-
utionary masses are found for higher helium abundances and smaller
abundances of heavy elements. For instance for the Cepheid S Muscae
which has a luminosity of log L ~ 3.5, a mass of M/Mo = 5.5 is derived if
Y = 0.36 and Z = 0.02 while a mass of M/MQ = 7.5 is found for Y = 0.20
and the same Z. For Y = 0.28, the currently adopted value, M/MQ — 7.5
would be found for Z = 0.03 and M/Mo = 5.5 for Z = 0.01.

19.4 Pulsational masses

We saw in Chapter 18 that the observed period-luminosity relation
can theoretically be traced back to a period-density relation
\i/2
(19.3)
plpol
240 Cepheid mass problem
The 'constants' Q are dependent on the mass and on the temperature and
density stratifications in the star. For a given stellar model Q can be
calculated. From the observed pulsation period P of a given Cepheid and
from the calculated Q the average density
. M

can be determined using equation (19.3). Knowing Teff of the Cepheid

from its B — V color and L = 4jtR2aT^ff (from M v and BC) the radius can
be found and M <* R3p is obtained. If the observed luminosities (i.e., the
distance determinations), Te{{ (which has only minor influence) and our
theoretical models are correct, we should find the same values for these
masses as those derived for the evolutionary masses. Unfortunately the
pulsational masses Mp depend sensitively on the adopted distances d of the
stars because R2 <* L and therefore Mp oc L3/2. With L oc D2 we find
Mp oc d3. For distances as determined according to equation (19.1) the
derived pulsational masses nearly agree with the evolutionary masses M 6v.
For the smaller distances determined from equation (19.2) pulsational
masses smaller by about 40 per cent are found. An error of AMV = 0.3
leads to A log M = 0.18, or 50 per cent error in the derived mass.

19.5 Baade-Wesselink masses

In order to determine reliable masses of Cepheids we need
methods which are independent of the still uncertain distance determi-
nations. The Baade-Wesselink method is one we can use. The radii of the
stars can be determined from the observed radial velocities vr from which
the expansion velocities vQxp can be derived. We find for the difference in
Cepheid radii at phase 0X and 0 2 corresponding to time tx and t2

AR = R(<f>2) - Rfa) = p Vcxp(t) dt (19.4)

We can measure radial velocities, vr, from spectral lines. From Fig. 19.1
we see that the measured radial velocity is the average of the projected
lines of sight component of the expansion velocity averaged over the
visible surface of the star. The factor vexp/vT is uncertain (see Figs. 19.1 and
19.2) but probably close to vexp/vr ~ 1.3 ± 0.1 for the Cepheids discussed
here. In order to determine the radius itself the variations in bolometric
magnitudes are used:
 Baade-Wesselink masses 241

™bol(0l) - = 2.5 log = 2.5 log

(19.5)
The r eff for the two phases are determined from the measured B — V
colors or from infrared colors. With Teii known the ratio of the radii
X = R{(t)2)IR{(t>i) is obtained and i?(0i) = kR/(X - 1) can be calculated.
With /?(0i) determined for many phases, the average radius can be
calculated and used in equation (19.3) to estimate the mass from the
pulsation period. These masses are called the Baade-Wesselink masses,

Fig. 19.1. The absorption line being formed at the surface of the star shows the average
line of sight velocity component vr of the material expanding with the velocity vexp. The
vT is considerably smaller than the expansion velocity. For a lower limb brightness the
average vr is somewhat larger, and the ratio vQxp/vT becomes smaller.

Shell

Fig. 19.2. If line absorption takes place in an expanding shell around the star only the
material in front of the star can contribute to the absorption. For this material the line of
sight velocity component vr is nearly equal to the expansion velocity vexp.
242 Cepheid mass problem
M BW . The method is very nice in principle. Unfortunately at present
different radii are obtained depending on whether B - V colors or
infrared colors are used. Using B — V colors the M BW come out to be
much smaller than M ev . For infrared colors the M BW agree better with
Mev. There are apparently still problems with the Teff color calibrations
and with the determination of the correct ratio VQXp/vr to be used.

19.6 Bump masses and beat masses

19.6.1 Bump masses
There is another way to determine Cepheid masses independently
of the distance determinations. This method makes use of the shape of the
observed magnitude and velocity curves. For Cepheids with periods
around 10 days the light and velocity curves show bumps (see Fig. 19.3).
The phases of these bumps shift systematically with increasing period.
Such bumps occur also in calculated light and velocity curves. Theoreti-
cally the phase for which this bump occurs depends on the mass of the
Cepheid. The observed phase of the bump can therefore be used to
determine the so-called bump masses, M b. These turn out to be about half

->• Phase
Fig. 19.3. For Cepheids with periods around 10 days the light (and velocity) curves show
bumps. The phase of the bump shifts systematically for increasing periods. The Cepheid
periods in days are noted on the light curves. From Ledoux and Walraven (1958).
 Dynamical masses 243
as large as the standard evolutionary masses M e v but agree fairly well with
the pulsational masses for the smaller distances.

19.6.2 Beat masses

Some short period Cepheids show the so-called beat phenomenon.
Basically they pulsate with one period but the amplitude of the pulsation
changes periodically with a longer period. Such beat phenomena are
observed when the pulsation results from the superposition of two periods:
If, for instance, the ratio of the periods is 3:4 then after 3 of the longer
periods and 4 of the shorter ones the two pulsations are in phase and the
amplitudes add up, so the pulsation amplitude is large. Halfway in
between, the pulsations in the two periods are in antiphase, the amplitudes
are subtracted and the final pulsation amplitude is small. We saw in
Chapter 18 that the ratio of the period length for the first harmonic and the
fundamental period depend on the degree of mass concentration in the
center, which in turn depends on the mass. For smaller masses the density
concentration is somewhat larger. The period ratios can therefore also be
used to determine the masses of these Cepheids. Very small masses,
around one to two solar masses, are presently found in this way for the beat
Cepheids. For such small masses the theoretical blue loops never enter the
Cepheid instability strip, which does not agree with theoretical models.
The real stars may have a stronger mass concentration than we think.
Wrong values for the absorption coefficients could give wrong results or
maybe these stars pulsate in the first and second harmonic modes and not
in the fundamental and first overtone mode as assumed so far.

19.7 Dynamical masses

So-called dynamical masses of the second component of a binary
system can be determined if the mass of the first component is known from
other observations. For instance if star 1 is a main sequence star of spectral
type AO V we know that its mass M1 must be around M1 = 2.5 M o . In a
binary system the mass ratio of the stellar masses M2 to M1 can be obtained
from the ratio of the orbital velocities v2 and v1: at any given time we must
have v2/v1 = M1/M2. If we can measure v2/v1 the dynamical mass M2 can
be obtained.
In order for the stars to have radial velocities large enough to be
measured accurately the stars must be fairly close binaries with periods of a
few years at most, which means their orbital radii can only be a few
244 Cepheid mass problem
astronomical units. For Cepheid binaries they cannot then be visual
binaries because the Cepheids are too far away for binaries with orbits of a
few years to be resolved. We also must be able to measure radial velocities
for both binary components of a spectroscopic binary system. For
Cepheids this condition used to be difficult to meet, because they are
bright supergiants and any main sequence companions are much fainter in
the visual spectral region. The chances of finding a supergiant companion
are extremely small. Even giant companions are too faint in the optical
region. The availability of satellites, permitting observations in the ultra-
violet, has changed this situation dramatically. The Cepheids have rather
low temperatures (—5500 K) and emit very little light at short wave-
lengths. If a Cepheid has, for instance, a main sequence companion of
spectral type B9 then the B9 star fluxes are larger than those for the
Cepheid for wavelengths shorter than 2500 A. For longer wavelengths the
spectrum of the Cepheid dominates. The so-called 'long' wavelength
camera of the International Ultraviolet Explorer Satellite (IUE) is sensi-
tive for wavelengths 2000 A < X < 3200 A. On these spectra the radial
velocities of both stars can be measured. For the Cepheid we have of
course to correct for the pulsational velocities in order to determine the
orbital radial velocities. Current results for several systems have been
plagued by several observational problems and are still somewhat uncer-
tain but the indications are that the dynamical masses come out to be lower
than standard evolutionary masses and are close to the bump masses and
the pulsation masses for the smaller distances. If confirmed it means that
future stellar evolution calculations will have to be corrected to give
smaller evolutionary masses for Cepheids, probably by including addi-
tional mixing for massive main sequence stars, by adopting larger helium
or smaller heavy element abundances, or by re-evaluating the calculations
of K.
 20
Star formation

20.1 Introduction

The fact that we see massive, luminous stars which cannot be older
than about 106 years tells us that stars must have been formed within the
last million years. In association with these luminous young stars we often
see some peculiar stars with emission lines, called the T Tauri stars (see
Volume 1). These can therefore be assumed to be young stars also. They
have lower luminosities and are more red than the massive O and B stars
but are considerably more luminous than main sequence stars of the same
color. Because of their lower luminosities they must have lower masses
than the O and B stars. For the lower mass stars the contraction times are
longer, as we have seen in Chapter 2, because these stars cannot radiate
away the surplus gravitational energy as fast as the more luminous,
massive stars. If these lower mass T Tauri stars were formed at the same
time as their more massive associates they have not had enough time to
contract to the main sequence during the main sequence lifetime of the
massive stars. Lower mass stars must therefore still be in the contraction
phase. It is then reasonable to assume that these T Tauri stars are young
stars still in the contraction phase.
Both kinds of stars, the massive O main sequence stars and the less
massive young T Tauri stars, appear in association with large dust
complexes, i.e. regions of high density where many interstellar molecules
are formed. It thus appears that new stars may be born in regions of high
density interstellar material.
In such regions we now see hundreds of young stars. In the somewhat
older galactic star clusters in the galactic plane, we see comparable
numbers of stars (see Fig. 1.3). On the other hand, the very old so-called
globular star clusters have up to a million stars (see Fig. 1.5), which are all
metal poor and apparently very old. Why did such very massive star
clusters form in the early stages of our galaxy but no longer appear to do
245
246 Star formation
so? The observations of star clusters in the Magellanic Clouds, the nearest
extragalactic systems, may give us some clues. In these external galaxies
we see even now populous clusters with many massive young stars, like the
SMC cluster NGC 330 (see Fig. 17.6). The Magellanic Cloud galaxies are
much smaller than our own galaxy, and appear to have much less dust and
a somewhat lower abundance of heavy elements. These conditions may be
reminiscent of those of our own galaxy at an early stage and are apparently
more favorable to the formation of very massive star clusters.
In the following discussion of star formation we shall see under which
conditions we think that new stars and star clusters can be born, and we
shall see whether we can understand why massive star clusters may be born
no later than in the early stages of a galaxy.

20.2 Jeans' criterion for gravitational instability

Observations show that new stars can be formed in an environment
of dense interstellar clouds. We will study here the circumstances under
which a dense interstellar cloud can become gravitationally unstable to
contraction; in other words we ask under which conditions the gravi-
tational force, trying to contract the cloud, can overcome the gas pressure
forces that try to expand the cloud. This question was first studied by
Jeans, who considered a homogeneous gas volume in which he introduced
a sinusoidal density perturbation; he checked under which conditions such
a perturbation would grow, leading to a collapse of the higher density
regions. Our approach here will be less accurate and less mathematical
but, we think, physically more transparent. We consider an isothermal gas
cloud in low density surroundings and focus our attention on a small
volume of gas at its surface. We also assume a spherical cloud, which is a
very great simplification, but the result obtained will be correct by order of
magnitude. A volume element of 1 cm3 with mass p at the surface of this
sphere experiences two forces. One is the gravitational force
Fg = p(GM/R2), if M is the mass of the cloud and R its radius. Due to any
pressure gradient this volume element also experiences a force,
F p = dP/dr (see Chapter 2). The equation of motion for this volume
element is therefore
d 2r GMr dPg
p^2 = -p^s--r ( 2(U )
dr r dr
where t stands for time.
 Jeans' criterion for gravitational instability 247
For an element at the surface of the cloud Mr = M and r = R.
Dividing (20.1) by p gives

dt2 R2 p dr
where Pg = (pT/fi)Rg. The equation of motion can then be written as
#r=_GM_R£ldp
dt2 R2 ix pdr { 5)

With dpldr < 0 the pressure term becomes greater than 0 which means it
gives a positive, outward acceleration while the first term opposes this
force. We have d2rldt2 < 0, i.e., we find contraction, if
GMr>RgTl
(20.4)
R2> fi P dr
As a very crude approximation we now replace | dp/dr | by pIR. We also
make use of the relation
_IM 3 \1/3
\ p AJI)

and obtain

= M2/3p1/3j—) G (20.6)

Making use of this and of equation (20.4) we find instability for

contraction (i.e., inward acceleration) if
IR 7 A l2/ ty\
iRgT^ 3 \m _1L « lT! ! I1 / R
Vi\3/2
M^Mcrit = F H — -r~V-hk ( 20 - 7 )
cnt
\fiG) \4JT) V p p1/22\juG) K }

The mathematical instability analysis gives a factor n312 instead of our

factor (3/4JT) 1 / 2 . The main reason for the difference is that we have
considered an isolated cloud with a pressure gradient dPg/dr = PgIR, while
the instability analysis considers a sinusoidal density perturbation and in a
homogeneous surrounding medium which also exerts forces. In the
following numerical examples we use the factor JT 3/2 .
For small densities the gravitational forces are small and only large
masses become gravitationally unstable. The limiting mass is very large
and increases with increasing temperatures, because the opposing press-
ure forces increase with increasing temperature. For normal interstellar
248 Star formation
densities of the order of one particle per cm3 (i.e., for p ~ 10~24 gcm" 3
and ju = 1) we find if T = 10 K that a gas cloud will contract if
M ^ 3 x 103 M©, while for a cloud with a temperature of 100 K, which is
the average temper^ure of the cool interstellar medium in our galaxy, we
find M ^ 10 5 M o , close to the masses we find in globular clusters. For
lower densities, as wefindthem in the galactic halo and as may be expected
before the galaxy collapsed into a disk, we find that still larger masses are
needed for gravitational instability.
On the other hand, in dense dust clouds or dense molecular clouds we
have about 102 to 104 particles per cm3 and the temperature may be as low
as 10 K. For 102 particles per cm3 and ju = 1 we then find that
Mcrit ^ 3 x 102 M o . For larger ju, due to the formation of molecules and
dust grains, even smaller critical masses are obtained. We may then even
find masses of the order of the largest stellar masses to become gravita-
tionally unstable. For a cloud of one solar mass to become gravitationally
unstable we would need, however, a density of 104 particles per cm3 if
JU = 2. Such high densities are not observed in interstellar clouds. We will
discuss below how such low mass stars can possibly be formed. First we will
follow what happens when a large, gravitationally unstable gas cloud of
low density contracts.

20.3 Adiabatic contraction or expansion of a homogeneous cloud

In Fig. 20.1 we show in a temperature density diagram sche-
matically the equilibrium line where for a given mass gravitational and
pressure forces are in equilibrium, i.e., where
GM ldP
2 p dr
r
According to equation (20.7) this requires T3/2 <* p 1/2 . For points above
this line, i.e., for higher temperatures, the pressure forces are larger than
the gravitational forces, the gas cloud expands and cools adiabatically if
there is no energy exchange with the surroundings. For temperatures and
densities below the equilibrium line the gravitational forces are larger than
the pressure forces, the cloud contracts adiabatically if there is no energy
exchange with the surroundings, and the temperature increases. All the
gas clouds of the given mass whose T and p combinations fall below the
equilibrium line remain unstable against gravitational contraction as long
as they stay below the equilibrium line. We now follow the track of a
contracting cloud in this T, p diagram. In Fig. 20.1 we have plotted
 Adiabatic contraction or expansion 249
adiabats for a monatomic gas with the ratio of the specific heats y = §. For
such an adiabat we have T^ p 2/3 . If a cloud with T and p originally
corresponding to point A in Fig. 20.1 would contract adiabatically, it
would follow such a line, heating up, and soon reach the equilibrium line.
Were it to contract further adiabatically, its pressure forces would over-
come the gravitational forces and it would have to expand again. It would
ultimately reside on the equilibrium line and contract no further.
Generally we find for an adiabat
Tocpr-1 (20.8)
For a molecular gas with 5 degrees of freedom we find for adiabatic
contraction T <* p 2/5 . The temperature increases less steeply but the cloud
will still soon reach the equilibrium line and stop contracting. For equation
(20.4) to remain valid during contraction we must require that the
temperature increases more slowly than

Expansion

Contraction

-25 -24 -23 -22

logp
Fig. 20.1. In a temperature, density diagram we show schematically the line for which
gravitational and pressure forces are in equilibrium, i.e., the line for which T 3/2 <* p 1/2
(solid line). Above this line the pressure forces are larger than the gravitational forces,
leading to expansion. Below the line the inverse is true. Also shown are adiabats
T oc py~x for a monatomic gas with y = f (dashed lines). If a cloud at point A starts
contracting adiabatically, it will reach the equilibrium line at point C and stop
contracting. If a cloud at point B expands adiabatically it reaches the equilibrium line at
point D and stops expanding.
250 Star formation
l/2
H3/2
(20.9)
For adiabatic contraction of monatomic gas as well as two atomic
molecular gas the temperature increases too fast, the contraction would
come to a halt immediately, unless the cloud can cool off by radiating
enough to lose the excess energy. In Fig. 20.2 we have plotted again the
equilibrium line for which T <* p 1/3 . We have also plotted adiabats for
y = f, for which also T <* p 1/3 . This line is parallel to the equilibrium line.
For this y a cloud at point A being unstable to gravitational contraction,
and contracting adiabatically, would always remain below the equilibrium
line and would therefore remain unstable to further gravitational contrac-
tion. This would also be the case if y < f. Only for a polyatomic gas with
more than 5 degrees of freedom could y be less than f and adiabatic
contraction continue indefinitely. The formation of such molecules, how-
ever, requires heavy elements which are rare. Such polyatomic molecules,
while they are observed in the interstellar medium, can generally form
only in very small amounts. But we see that formation of molecules
enhances the chances of gravitational contraction because of the increase
in JU as seen in equation (20.7). y could also become less than f in clouds
with temperatures around 10 000 K when hydrogen ionizes, as we saw

Expansion

Contraction

1
-25 -24 -23 -22
logp
Fig. 20.2. Same as in Fig. 20.1, but adiabats for y = fare shown for which T <* p1/3. If a
contracting cloud at point A follows this adiabat it will remain unstable to contraction. A
cloud at point B will remain unstable to expansion.
 Non-adiabatic expansion and contraction 251
when discussing the hydrogen convection zone, y could also have values
close to 1 for temperatures around 4000 K when hydrogen molecules
dissociate, a process which requires a large amount of energy. A cloud
with y < I always remains unstable against contraction if it starts from
point A (Fig. 20.2) below the equilibrium line. However, it soon reaches
temperatures for which ionization or dissociation is completed so that y
returns to larger values. It then follows the adiabat for the larger y and
reaches the equilibrium line again (see Fig. 20.1).
Of course, a cloud starting from point B (see Fig. 20.1) in the expansion
region expands along an adiabat and would also reach the equilibrium line
unless it has temperatures in the range where hydrogen molecules dis-
sociate or where hydrogen ionizes.
In order to judge whether a gravitationally unstable interstellar cloud
can continue to collapse we must study the possibilities of the cloud to
radiate away the excess energy and to remain cool.

20.4 Non-adiabatic expansion and contraction of optically thin clouds

20.4.1 Evolution of expanding clouds
In reality the clouds do not expand or contract adiabatically;
rather, they are in energy exchange with their surroundings. In order to
see how their temperature actually changes we have to look at cooling
mechanisms as well as heating processes. We follow here a qualitative
discussion by Hayashi (1966).
In the interstellar gas, cooling is mainly due to atomic and molecular
radiation and to dust radiation, which can become very important,
especially for low gas temperatures and high densities. For high densities
an interstellar cloud may become optically thick for all except infrared
radiation, which is where the grains radiate. Then only this radiation can
escape. For such clouds the grains are the most important coolants and can
be expected to keep the cloud at a temperature around 10 K.
The interstellar gas and grains can also be heated by different mechan-
isms. Cosmic rays can penetrate the clouds and ionize the particles.
Electrons with high energies are liberated in this process and may in turn
ionize additional particles or transmit their kinetic energy to other par-
ticles by means of collisions. X-rays may also penetrate the clouds,
ionizing atoms and liberating high energy electrons. If the clouds are not
very dense the interstellar radiation field will penetrate the gas and may
ionize particles. It will also excite some particles but this energy will be lost
252 Star formation

again in the cloud when a photon is reemitted and escapes into interstellar
space.
We can describe the efficiency of cooling by the cooling times tc, which
are the times during which a cloud at given T and p would cool by a factor
of e, that is
d In T _ 1
(20.10)

if we only consider the cooling processes. Here t stands again for time.
Correspondingly we can describe the efficiency of heating by the heating
time th. Heating is most efficient for small th. If heating is more efficient
than cooling then
(20.11)
In this case the cloud becomes warmer. It cools if
(20.12)
In Fig. 20.3 we reproduce the results of calculations by Hayashi (1966).
We show the domains in the T, p diagram where different heating or
cooling mechanisms are dominating. Based on these estimates we can now
also plot a line in the T, p plane where cooling is equal to heating. Clouds

Cooling
(H 2 )

_ 2 - '
log T{

•—-L^L ^^^^ Cooling

(grain)

Heating ^^""^
(cosmic rays) /*
1
Heating
(grain)

i i i li i i i i .

-24 -22 -20 -18 -16 -14

log p(g cm" 3 )

Fig. 20.3. In the p, T plane the domains are indicated in which different heating and
cooling mechanisms dominate. Adapted from Hayashi (1966).
 Non-adiabatic expansion and contraction 253

whose T and p combinations lie below this line heat up, those above this
line cool. The temperatures and densities for which cooling equals heating
are the equilibrium values for the interstellar medium.
In Fig. 20.4 we try to show what actually happens to gas clouds, taking
into account these heating and cooling mechanisms, following Hayashi
(1966). In order to judge the importance of cooling and heating we have to
compare the heating and cooling times with the expansion or contraction
times. If the heating times for instance are much shorter than the
expansion times then any adiabatic cooling during expansion will be more
than compensated immediately by the heating processes. Also if the
cooling times are much shorter than the contraction times then the
adiabatic heating during contraction will be more than compensated by the
cooling processes. For a cloud which is considerably below the hydrostatic
equilibrium line the gravitational forces are essentially unimpeded by the
pressure forces and we can estimate the contraction time by equating it
with the free fall time, tf, which is given by

T= 1

logp
Fig. 20.4. In the p, Tplane the hydrostatic equilibrium line te = tfis shown (solid line).
Clouds with T above this line are unstable to expansion, for lower 7 they are unstable to
contraction. Also shown are the domains in which the heating mechanisms dominate the
cooling mechanisms, i.e., th < tc, and those where cooling dominates heating, i.e. tc< th.
Also shown are the lines where the cooling times tc equal the expansion times te and
where they equal the free fall times t{. Similarly the lines are shown where the heating
times th equal the expansion times te and where they equal the free fall times t{. Adapted
from Hayashi (1966).
254 Star formation
3p /dp (32jzGp\~1/2 , .
tf = — / — = (2U.13)

If the pressure forces are much larger than the gravitational forces the
cloud expands essentially with the velocity of sound. The expansion times,
tQ, can then be estimated to be

*e = - (20.14)

where cs is the velocity of sound. On the equilibrium line the expansion

time tQ = tf, the free fall time. These times are important if we want to
judge how fast heating or cooling work in comparison with contraction or
expansion.
In Fig. 20.4 we have also plotted schematically the lines where the
cooling time tc equals the expansion time te and where it equals the free fall
time tf. Also shown are the lines on which the heating times th equal the
expansion times and also where they equal the free fall times. With this
information we can now follow what happens to a cloud which starts out
way above the equilibrium line in the T, p plane of Fig. 20.4, say at point B.
This point is above the equilibrium line and therefore in a domain where
the cloud will expand. The cooling times are shorter than the heating
times, so it will cool. Point B is also in a domain where the cooling times are
shorter than the expansion times. This cloud therefore expands and cools
not only because of the expansion but even more so because of the
radiative energy losses. It cools very fast, essentially along a line of
constant density because the expansion is relatively slow. When it crosses
the line where tc = tQ the cooling by radiation becomes slower than the
cooling due to the expansion, and it follows nearly an adiabat until it
crosses the line where the heating times are equal to the expansion times.
Below this line heating is more efficient than the adiabatic cooling. The
cloud slowly increases its temperature while expanding. The cloud never
reaches the equilibrium line, but keeps expanding.
We will now study what happens to a cloud which starts out at point C in
the r, p diagram (Fig. 20.4). It has a higher density than the cloud at point
B, but it is still in a domain in which it is unstable to expansion and where
the cooling times are shorter than the expansion times. It also cools rapidly
almost along a line of constant density. Because of its higher density it
reaches the equilibrium while it is still in the domain of rapid cooling and it
therefore continues to cool and crosses the equilibrium line. It now gets
into a temperature, density range where the gravitational forces are larger
 Non-adiabatic expansion and contraction 255
than the pressure forces and starts to contract while still cooling. Were it to
cross the line where the cooling time equals the free fall time (tc = tf) it
would get into the domain of heating and would have to approach or even
cross again the line where tc = tf. If it were to cross this line it would cool
again. We see that this cloud will contract essentially along the line where
tc = tf. Fig. 20.4 tells that in fact all the clouds which start out with densities
larger than the one of cloud C will ultimately contract along the same line.
They all will keep contracting even though they started out in a tempera-
ture, density domain where they were not unstable to gravitational
contraction.

20.4.2 Evolution of contracting clouds

We shall now investigate what happens to clouds at positions A
and D in Fig. 20.4. These clouds start out in the temperature, density
domain where they are unstable to gravitational contraction. Let us first
consider the cloud at position A. It is in the contraction domain and also in
the heating domain. The heating time is much shorter than the free fall
time. It heats up essentially at constant p, though slowly (relative to the
heating) contracting until it crosses the equilibrium line, while still being in
the heating domain. It will now stop contracting and instead start expand-
ing while still increasing its temperature until it reaches the line where
th = te. We can easily see that it cannot diverge much from this line but has
to follow this line while expanding. This cloud started out in the gravita-
tionally unstable regime, but due to the heating by cosmic rays and X-rays
becomes too warm to continue its contraction.
We now follow a cloud starting out at position D in Fig. 20.4. It has a
higher density than the cloud at position A. This cloud is also in the
contracting and heating domain. It also follows a line of essentially, though
not exactly, constant density. It first crosses the line where the heating time
equals the free fall time. Beyond this line heating by cosmic rays or grain
absorption becomes inefficient. The cloud contracts nearly along an
adiabat until it reaches the line where tc = tf. If it were to cross this line it
would have to cool and approach or cross this line again. This cloud also
has to contract very close to the line where tc = tf. The same result is
obtained for all clouds in the contraction domain with higher densities than
the cloud at position D. All clouds which finally end up contracting will
continue to do so along the line tc = tf. They will continue to contract as
long as the cooling can keep up with the contractional heating.
256 Star formation
20.5 Optically thick clouds and protostars
In the heating and cooling calculations discussed so far and on
which Figs. 20.1 to 20.4 were based, it was assumed that the clouds are
optically thin, which means that the cooling radiation can freely escape
from the cloud. When the cloud contracts the optical depth along the
radius does, however, increase and the cooling is reduced.
Why does the radial optical depth of a homogeneous contracting cloud
increase? Suppose the absorption coefficient per gram of material Kg
remains constant during the contraction; then the radial optical depth r
through the cloud of radius R is given by (see Fig. 20.5)
M
r = Kgp2R and p = (20.15)
IJZR3

which means for a given mass

r= (20.16)
AnR2

Expressing this by means of the density rather than by means of the radius
yields with R = M1/3/[(f7r)1/3p1/3]
2
M 1/3
O2/3 (20.17)
M

For each mass the radial optical depth of the cloud thus increases as
t oc p115. For the decreasing radius there are more and more particles along
the radial direction even for a given mass. (Of course for a given density
the radial optical depths are larger for larger masses because the radius has
to be larger.)

2*1 2/?,

Observer

Fig. 20.5. For a cloud with given mass the number of particles along a column with
cross-section 1 cm2 and length 2R increases when the radius of the cloud decreases
because p ^ R~3 and therefore the optical depth of the cloud increases.
 Fragmentation 257
With the calculated /cg for the interstellar medium we can for each cloud
mass calculate the density for which the radial optical depth will become 1.
At this point the cooling becomes inefficient, the cloud becomes hotter
and /cg increases rapidly with increasing T. The cloud quickly becomes
optically thick. The line along which the contracting clouds are estimated
to have an optical depth of 1 is indicated in Fig. 20.4. At this line the clouds
start to contract nearly along an adiabat until they reach the hydrostatic
equilibrium line. Contraction then ceases. The interstellar cloud has
become a protostar in hydrostatic equilibrium contracting very slowly as
discussed in Sections 2.3 and 10.4. We then have to consider the radiative
transfer in the protostar. The timescale of contraction is determined by the
time it takes the star to get rid of the excess gravitational energy gained
during the contraction. For the star to remain in equilibrium half of the
gravitational energy gain has to be radiated away before the star can
continue to contract.

20.6 Fragmentation
In this section we shall discuss how low mass stars can possibly be
formed. In order to better understand this we have in Fig. 20.6 redrawn
part of Fig. 20.4 but have drawn boundary lines for gravitational instability
for different masses, that is the equilibrium lines for different masses. We
now follow the contraction line for a 1000 M o cloud, say, whose T and p
correspond to point C in Fig. 20.4. Following the contraction line it will at
point E cross the instability line for a 100 M o star. At this point it has a
temperature and density that would make a 100 Mo cloud unstable to
contraction. If there are some minor inhomogeneities in the 1000 M o
cloud, fractions of this cloud which have masses over 100 M o then may
contract by themselves as 'subclouds' (see Fig. 20.7). We now follow the
track of such a subcloud in Fig. 20.6. First, temperature and density are the
same as in the original cloud. We can thus follow the same track as before
in Fig. 20.6. When the subcloud contracts further it will at point F cross the
instability line for a 10 M o cloud. This means that now even submasses of
10 Mo become unstable to contraction. The subcloud may now itself break
up into smaller subclouds. Upon further contraction these new subclouds
will cross the instability lines for still smaller masses and then they may
again break up into still smaller masses and form still lower mass clouds.
Of course, this does not necessarily happen but it may happen. During the
process of contraction the densities become high enough such that low
mass subclouds become gravitationally unstable.
258 Star formation
Of course, all the time the original mass of 1000 M o still keeps contract-
ing - the whole cloud with all the subclouds could still collapse into one big
supermassive 'star' if there is nothing to prevent it, such as, for instance,
large-scale turbulence. Also, if the original big cloud has some small

Dust gram
f > 1 radius 0.2 a

0 2 4 6 8 10
log nH (cm"3)

Fig. 20.6. In the T, log nH plane (nH = number of hydrogen atoms per cm3) hydrostatic
equilibrium lines for different stellar masses are shown. Also shown is the contraction
line for interstellar clouds starting at point B. When a cloud of M = 1000 M o (point C) is
unstable to contraction and contracts along the contraction line it crosses the hydrostatic
equilibrium line for M = 100 Mo at point E. Beyond this line submasses of M = 100 MQ
become unstable to contraction. If they contract further they will cross the equilibrium
line for M = 10 M o at point F. Beyond this point masses with M = 10 MQ become
unstable to contraction, etc. Also shown is the relation between p and T for which clouds
of different masses become optically thick (shaded curve). From Low and Lynden-Bell
(1976).

Fig. 20.7. During the contraction of a large mass with sufficient cooling the densities
become high enough for subclouds to become gravitationally unstable. The large cloud
may split into smaller subclouds. During further contraction still smaller subclouds
become gravitationally unstable.
 Fragmentation 259

(or even very small) angular momentum around the central region this
angular momentum is conserved during contraction. With decreasing
radius the angular velocity a) must increase as a) <* R~2 and the centrifugal
forces Fc increase as Fc oc a)2r oc r~3\ at some point these will prevent
further contraction of the 1000 M o mass as a whole. This does, however,
not prevent the subclouds from further contraction if there is turbulent
motion in the cloud. The angular momentum around their contraction
center may be much smaller. Eventually the centrifugal forces within the
subcloud will also prevent the subclouds from further contraction and only
still smaller parts with smaller angular momenta can contract further. In
other words, the cluster as a whole cannot contract any further because of
the centrifugal forces but the cloudlets leading to protostars may still be
able to. Very massive stars are not expected to form if the subclouds with
large masses have too much angular momentum. They have to reduce
their angular momentum first, perhaps by turbulent viscosity, before they
can contract further, or they may break up into smaller mass protostars
before that happens. Rotation may perhaps enhance fragmentation.
There may be other mechanisms to prevent the massive cloud from
further contraction. If for instance a massive star forms first in the center it
may go through its evolution in 106 years, become a supernova and blow
the cloud apart leading to large density fluctuations. The question is
whether in such an event the high density regions can achieve a tempera-
ture low enough to lead to gravitational instability.
The fragmentation scenario would explain why young stars are prefer-
entially observed in clusters and associations. Is there a limit to this
fragmentation process or can planets be made like this? What is the
smallest mass for a star to be formed by fragmentation? This question has
been studied by several authors, first by Hoyle in 1953. If we could answer
this question, we would know how far down the lower main sequence
extends in the HR diagram. So far the smallest masses seen for stars are
about 0.06 M o (for the stars Ross 614 B and Wolf 424 A). We observe that
the number of stars increases steeply for smaller masses, down to masses of
about 0.2 MQ. It therefore seems possible that there may be a large
amount of mass in the low mass stars if there are many of them. So far
hardly any have been found. Since they are so faint it is very difficult to
observe them. It would therefore be nice if we could derive theoretically a
lower mass limit for stars. Since the cooling is mainly due to dust and
molecules it depends on the abundances of the heavy elements and we may
perhaps expect that the lower mass limit on the main sequence depends
somewhat on the element abundances. Studying the limiting magnitudes
260 Star formation
for the faint ends of the main sequences in globular clusters with different
chemical abundances may provide clues or tests of our hypotheses. This is
a very active field of research at the moment. It seems, however, that our
instruments are not yet sensitive enough to answer this question (see Fig.
1.7).

20.7 Fragmentation limits

We see from Fig. 20.6 that fragmentation must stop when the
fragments become optically thick and start contracting along the adiabats
for which the temperature increase with increasing p is steeper than for the
Jeans' mass, if y > f (see Fig. 20.1). For smaller masses the line r = 1 shifts
to higher densities because for a given density the radius of the cloud
becomes smaller for smaller mass. With r = KgpR we find for r = 1 that

pR = 1 = p 2/3 M WAV / 3 (20.18)

Kg \4JIJ

For Kg = const, we find that for r= 1 we need pocM~m. Knowing

/cg(p, T) we can then along each mass line for contractional instability
determine at which p and T(i.e., at which radius R) the radial optical depth
through the cloud becomes r = 1. In Fig. 20.6 these points are connected
by the shaded lines. For low Tand larger p, or larger number of hydrogen
atoms nH per cm3, the opacity is mainly due to dust grains with a radius
around 0.2 x 10~4 cm. Following the contraction line tc = tf it is obvious
from this figure that there is a lower mass limit M = MF which can still
become gravitationally unstable before becoming optically thick. This is
the fragmentation limit. How large is M F? According to Fig. 20.6, Low
and Lynden-Bell (1976) find that M F ^ 0.007 M o . From an analytical
discussion Rees (1976)findsa similar result. The uncertainty appears to be
about a factor of 2. There seems to be no doubt that planets cannot be
formed by fragmentation. They probably form by grains coalescing to
form larger and larger particles, then rocks and finally planets.
Does the lower mass limit for fragmentation depend on the chemical
composition? The instability boundary lines for the different masses
remain unchanged. For smaller fractions of heavy elements the fraction of
mass in grains must, however, be reduced. We therefore have less efficient
cooling and smaller values of Kg. The contraction line tc = t{ shifts to higher
temperatures. The r = 1 line shifts to higher densities. From Fig. 20.6 it
becomes clear that the two effects work against each other and that
 Influence of magnetic fields 261
because of the coupling of Kg and tc no major changes in M F may be
expected.
Do we observe stars with masses close to M F ?
For decreasing masses the central temperatures are decreasing and the
question is whether these low mass stars ever reach high enough tempera-
tures in their interiors to start hydrogen burning. In other words: will they
ever become main sequence stars or will they contract until they are
degenerate and then cool down?
Present calculations show that stars with masses less than about 0.08
solar masses probably never start hydrogen burning. Stars with lower
masses would be called brown dwarfs. The question is: do they exist?
According to Low and Lynden-BelPs estimates the fragmentation limit is
lower than this mass value, but so far no brown dwarfs have been detected.
Perhaps they do not exist; in the fragmentation process such small masses
may never become unstable for gravitational contraction because of some
external influences, or if cooling is less efficient than assumed in Fig. 20.6.

20.8 Influence of magnetic fields

The discussions in the last sections have ignored the fact that we
observe magnetic fields in the interstellar medium. These fields influence
the contraction of a gravitationally unstable cloud. If the cloud is partially
ionized (a very low degree of ionization is sufficient), then the gas becomes
a very good conductor and the magnetic lines of force cannot slip through
the gas (the magnetic field is 'frozen' in). The cloud can then only contract
by also contracting the magnetic lines of force. This means the field
strength is increased inversely proportional to the radius squared, i.e.,
B oc R~2, Will this prevent further contraction? In order to judge this we
have to compare the magnetic pressure, which opposes the gravitational
forces, with the gravitational forces, Fg = GMrIR2. These also increase
proportional to R~2. If in the beginning the gravitational forces are larger
than the magnetic forces, they will remain larger during contraction. If,
however, in the beginning the magnetic forces perpendicular to the
magnetic lines of force are larger than the gravitational forces, no contrac-
tion can take place in this direction. The material can then only contract
along the magnetic lines of force since in this direction there are no
opposing forces from the magnetic field. The cloud then contracts to form
a disk, which can fragment into smaller disks. With this different geometry
all the studies discussed above will have to be revised. Cooling is more
efficient for a thin disk than for a spherical cloud.
262 Star formation
If the contracting cloud is so cool that there are essentially no free
electrons and the gas is not a good conductor, then the magnetic field lines
can slip through the material and contraction can take place unimpeded.
For a 10 K cloud this is expected to be the case.

20.9 Position of protostars in the color magnitude diagram, Hayashi

theory
We saw in Section 11.2 that no stars in hydrostatic equilibrium can
appear to the right (i.e., on the cool side) of the Hayashi line in the color
magnitude diagram. We therefore expect newly formed stars to first
appear as stable stars somewhere on the Hayashi line. We also saw in the
previous discussion that as long as y < | the star cannot reach an equilib-
rium position. As long as abundant elements like hydrogen or helium are
in the process of ionizing over large fractions of the star we find y ^ f and
the star cannot be stable. The star can therefore reach an equilibrium
configuration only if it has become hot enough for most of its material to be
ionized. The gravitational energy liberated in the collapse must have
provided the ionization energy. Hayashi therefore estimated the radius of
a star just reaching hydrostatic equilibrium by equating the liberated
gravitational energy with the energy needed for ionization. This gives an
estimate for the gravitational energy release at this point and thereby for
the radius of a newly born star with a given mass. On the Hayashi line for
this mass we can then find the star with the required radius. This
determines the birth position of the star on its Hayashi line. For a star of
one solar mass and homogeneous density and temperature Hayashi
estimated that it would appear on the Hayashi line at a luminosity about
200 times the present solar luminosity but with a much lower temperature,
of course, than the present sun. For smaller masses smaller luminosities
are obtained. A group of newly born stars should fall along a given line in
the HR diagram as shown in Fig. 20.8. We could call this the birth line of
stars.
In Fig. 20.9 we show the positions of young T Tauri stars in the HR
diagram. The coolest stars fall along a line not very different from that
found by Hayashi, but we do not know which mass belongs to each
observed point.

20.10 The initial mass function

What determines the initial mass function; that is, what determines
the number of stars with a given mass to be born in a given molecular
 Initial mass function 263
cloud? We do not know. We do know, however, that low mass stars
contract slowly to the main sequence because they do not lose so much
energy per unit of time. We saw in Chapter 2 that the contraction time goes
as EGIL where EG is the gravitational energy release. With EG oc GM2/R
and L <* M + 3 5 we find for the gravitational contraction time (see Section
2.3) t oc 1/M15R.
Massive stars contract much more rapidly than lower mass stars, so they
reach high surface temperatures rather quickly. Because of their strong
radiation field they will probably blow off the surrounding dust cloud from
which they formed by means of their radiation pressure and prevent more
material from falling in. This may set an upper limit to the masses of stars
which can be formed, even for very low rotation rates.
Once massive, hot stars are formed, their high radiation may well heat
up the interstellar material in their surroundings, leading to temperatures
too high to permit the formation of more low mass stars. It appears that
low mass stars possibly form first. When the temperature in the cloud
slowly increases because of these low mass stars, the fragmentation
instability may stop at increasingly higher masses. Massive stars would
then form last, but this is at present only speculation. We are far from
understanding the mass distribution for newly formed stars.

iogT.ff

Fig. 20.8. In the log L, log Teif diagram the contraction lines for different masses are
shown, which first follow the Hayashi lines. The dots indicate the positions of
homogeneous stars when they first arrive on the Hayashi line. From Hayashi (1966).
264 Star formation

20.11 Inhomogeneous collapse of protostars

So far we have assumed that the collapsing cloud is a homogeneous
entity with the same temperature and density everywhere. Actually, when
a cloud contracts into a protostar we expect that close to the center higher
densities are reached much faster than in the outer regions, because all the
material is moving towards the center where it accumulates. Detailed
calculations show that indeed the center reaches a quasi-equilibrium state
much faster than the outer regions. When the next 'shells' of infailing
material hit this quasi-equilibrium core shocks are generated which
propagate back outwards, leading to higher temperatures in the outer
layers for a short time. The paths of the different mass shells in the T9 p
diagram are rather complicated. They are even more complicated if
rotation is included. We will not go into details here. A discussion may be
found in the book Protostars and Planets (ed. Gehrels, 1978). Calculations
show that while complicated phenomena occur in the center of the
protostar we cannot see them because the interior is hidden from view by

3.8 3.6
lo
9,o T eff

Fig. 20.9. The observed positions of young T Tauri stars in the Orion region and in the
Taurus Auriga Association are shown in the L, Teff diagram. Also shown are the
Hayashi tracks for stars of different masses as given in the figure. A birth line for stars
seems to be indicated. It is marked by a thick line. Hardly any stars are found on the
cool side of this line. For a 1 MQ star a birth luminosity of log L/LQ = 0.9 ± 0.1 seems to
be indicated as compared to log L/Lo = 2.3 estimated on Fig. 20.8. Of course, we do not
know the masses of the observed T Tauri stars, which we would need to know for a
quantitative comparison. The overall shape of the birth line resembles Hayashi's simple
and rough estimate. From Stahler (1983).
 Conclusion 265
the dust clouds in the outer layers of the protostar. These dust layers will
ultimately be blown away, when the star has become hot enough to blow
away the dust cocoon by radiation pressure on the grains. Calculations by
Stahler (1983) indicate that the star should become visible on the Hayashi
track with luminosities about a factor of 10 lower than estimated by
Hayashi. This is mainly because the stars remain invisible longer, still
embedded in the surrounding dust from which they accrete more mass.

20.12 Conclusion
While the comparison of observed HR diagrams and calculated
evolutionary tracks tell us that we basically understand stellar structure
and evolution, there are still many unsolved problems.
The prediction of the initial mass function for newly born stars is, of
course, very important for the understanding of the history of globular
clusters. This in turn is fundamental for the understanding of the enrich-
ment of heavy element abundances in galaxies. For this, of course, we also
have to know the details of stellar evolution, especially of massive stars,
and the origin of the chemical elements. We have to know which stars
become supernovae and how many heavy elements are generated in their
interiors and which fraction of these elements is expelled into the interstel-
lar medium.
All studies of the evolution of our own and other galaxies rely heavily on
a good understanding of star formation and stellar evolution. Much has
still to be learned.
 Appendix
Radiative energy transport in stars

A.I The transfer equation

We define the intensity lx as the amount of energy going per second and per
wavelength interval AX = 1 cm perpendicularly through 1 cm2 into the solid angle Aw = 1
(see Fig. A.I). We follow the changes of this intensity lx along its path s through the gas.
The intensity change due to absorption and emission is

(A.I)

Here ek is the radiative energy emitted per unit volume per second per AX = 1 cm into the
solid angle Aa> = 1. (This EX has nothing to do with the energy generation E about which we
talked in Chapter 8. ek describes the emission of photons, following previous absorption
processes.)
KX is the absorption coefficient per cm at wavelength A. It describes the fractional change
of intensity after the beam has passed through 1 cm of gas.
Equation (A.I) is called the radiative transfer equation. The firstterm on the right-hand
side describes the absorption, the second the emission from a column of 1 cm2 cross-section
per unit length As = 1 into a solid angle Aw = 1.
A black body is defined as a well-insulated box left without any energy exchange for a
long time, such that everything is in complete thermodynamic equilibrium. For such a black
body the emission Ek is given by
(A.2)
where the Planck function B} is
2hc2
(A.3)

Fig. A.I. The intensity Ik is defined as the amount of energy going per second
perpendicularly through an area A = 1 cm2 into a solid angle Aw = 1 in a wavelength
band AX = 1.

266
 Radiative energy transport in stars 267
and

B= o, (A.4)
71

Using relation (A.2) for the stellar interiors we find for the transfer equation

(A.5)
ds

The interior of a star almost resembles a black body. It is well insulated by all the mass
around it and it has had a long time to establish equilibrium. We do not have complete
thermodynamic equilibrium, though, because of the small energy flux F going through the
star from the inside out; the insulation is not perfect. We can, however, easily estimate that
this disturbance is minimal by comparing the energy flux F with the average intensity / of
the radiation field.

A.2 The radiative flux

In order to determine the radiative flux FT we have to calculate the net amount of
energy going through an area A each second into a given direction. In our case only the
radial flux is of interest. Because of the spherical symmetry there is no net energy flux
flowing in the horizontal directions. The amount of energy dEk flowing through A per
second into a direction making an angle 6 with the normal n on A (see Fig. A.2) and going
into the solid angle dco is given by

dE} = AL cos 0 dco (A.6)

The total amount of energy going through A per second into the half sphere, nFk,
obtained by integrating over all solid angles dco. This means

AnFk = dEk = A\ Ik(cp, 6) cos 6 da) (A.7)

Here we have indicated that in principle Ik can depend on cp as well as on 0 (see Fig. A.2).
In the case of spherical symmetry there is, however, no reason why Ik should depend on cp;
it only depends on 0. In order to calculate the integral over dco it is best to represent dco by
the area which this solid angle cuts out of the surface of a sphere with radius R = 1. For dco

Fig. A.2. The amount of energy going through an area A under the angle 6 with respect
to the normal nonA into Aco = 1 is given by AIk cos 6.
268 Appendix
corresponding to a change in cp by dcp and to a change in 6 by dO (see Fig. A.3), we find that
the surface area do is given by do = sin 0 dO dcp = do. With this description of dco we find
that the whole solid angle covering all directions is given by the surface area of the unit
sphere, namely co = 4jt. We can easily verify this by integrating dco over all angles
0 ^ cp ^ 2JZ and 0 ^ 6 ^ jt, which will cover the whole surface of the sphere, i.e.,

co = I dco = sin 0 dO dcp

I whole surface J y=Q I (9=0

= In sin 6 dd = An \ cos 0 dO = 4JI (A.8)

10=0 Jo
With this description of dco we can now also calculate JiFk according to equation (A.7),
namely

jiFk = Ik(cp, 6) cos 0 dco = Ix(<p, 0) cos 0 sin 0 dO dcp (A.9)

J to J (p=0 i(9=0

Since Ik does not depend on cp in our spherically symmetric case the integral does not
depend on cp and we can integrate over cp which gives a factor 2JI.

JIFX = In Ix(6) cos 0 sin 0 dO (A. 10)

J<9=0
In order to evaluate this integral we have to know 1^(0). In the case that 1^(6) does not
depend on 6 at all, i.e., if we have completely isotropic radiation with Ik (6) = const., we
can take lx out of the integral and find
CTC |cos 0 = 1
7t¥x = 2nlk cos 6 sin 6 dd = 2JIIX COS 6 d(cos 6) = 0 (A. 11)
J6=0 Jcos6>=-1

A.3 Anisotropy of the radiation field in stellar interiors

The ratio of the flux

pd0 = R sin 6

R66

View from equatorial plane View from direction of pole

Fig. A3. The solid angle dco is described by the area da which the cone with opening dco
cuts out of the sphere with radius 1. For a cone with open d# and dcp, dco is given by
dco = sin 6 dd dcp.
 Radiative energy transport in stars 269

to the average intensity, given by the Planck function B, is a measure for the anisotropy of
the radiation field.
In layers with no energy generation we have L(r) = jtF^jtr2 = const. At the surface
where r = R we find 7iFr = oTAeif = 7iFr(R). In deeper layers it must therefore be
R2 R2
7iFT = JiFr(R) — = (A. 12)
—

Assuming a temperature of 106 K at a radius r = O.SR, and reff = 8000 K we find for
instance

FT_TtfiR2
•6 x 10"
B

The degree of anisotropy of the radiationfieldis extremely small as soon as the temperature
Tis much greater than Teff. We can generally assume that the radiation field is isotropic,
except in those cases for which the flux itself is important, as for instance for the energy
transport.
This is very important when we now consider the radiative transfer in the spherically
symmetric case.

A.4 The radiative transfer equation in stellar interiors

Let us go back to equation (A.I). In the plane parallel case of the stellar
atmosphere (see Fig. A.4) we can replace the coordinate s along the path by the depth
coordinate z. We find in this case

ds = — dz/cos 6 (A. 13)

and

ds
£ (A. 14)

dz

Fig. A.4. In the plane parallel atmosphere the coordinate s along the beam of light can
be replaced by s = -z/cos 6.
270 Appendix
where the minus sign indicates that dz points inwards, while ds points outwards. In the
spherical case (see Fig. A.5) we find that the angle 0, which the light beam forms with the
radius vector, changes along the path s; this means
( m .61 d/dr d/d<9
s = sir, 6) and —= h (A.15)
y }
' ds drds 66 ds
From Fig. A.6 we see that for small angles cp, i.e., small ds
(A. 16)
j/i n dr . x rdd
x = rdd, cosO = — and sin 6 = —=
ds ds ds
With these equalities we obtain from equations (A. 13) and (A.I) (A. 17)
61 dl dl sin 6
= COS0 + -— = -Kjk+
ds dr d6 r

Fig. A.5. In the spherical case the angle 0 which the beam of radiation forms with the
normal H = ? on the 'horizontal' layer changes along the beam of light.

Fig. A.6. The geometry is shown for the spherical case. Along the path s of the light
beam the angle 6 between the light beam and the radius vector changes from 6 to 6'. For
small values of ds and d0 the relations (A. 16) hold.
 Radiative energy transport in stars 271

For isotropic radiation dl/dO = 0 and we obtain

cos6^±=-KXIk + KXBx (A. 18)

which is the same as equation (A. 14) when we replace dzby —dr. Of course, this is only true
for an isotropic radiation field. In this case the spherical transfer equation is the same as that
for the plane parallel case. For the stellar interior this is a very good approximation, as we
saw.
In Chapter 2 we calculated that in stellar interiors the mean free path for photons is about
1 cm. This is much smaller than the radius R. This is, of course, the reason why spherical
symmetry is unimportant for radiative transfer in stellar interiors. Because of this the
radiation field is very nearly isotropic.

A.5 Relation between temperature stratification and radiative flux

We now multiply equation (A. 18) by cos 0 and integrate over the whole sphere,
which means we integrate over the solid angle co. In order to integrate at a given r over the
whole solid angle we have to integrate over cp from 0 to 2n and over 6 from 0 to n.
Integration of equation (A. 18) over the whole solid angle after multiplication with cos 6
leads to

dr
Jo Jo

Jo Jo
lx(r, 0, cp) cos 0 sin 6 dO dcp +

+0
•17'
KX \

Jo Jo
\ Bx(r) cos 6 sin 6 dd dcp

(A. 19)
Here we have made use of the fact that Bx (r) is isotropic and can therefore be taken out of
the second integral on the right-hand side. We are then left with

Bk(r) cos 0 sin 0 dO dcp = 0 (A 20)

Jo Jo
For the left-hand integral we have again made use of the fact that 4 (r, 6, q)) is essentially
isotropic and therefore dlkldr is independent of the angle 0. We find then from equation
(A. 19) that

^ cos2 6 sin 0d0 dcp = ^-^^=-Ki7tFx(r) (A.21)

d r j o Jo 3 dr
Since the stellar interior is almost a black body, we have Ik ~ Bx. We now divide equation
(A.21) by KX and integrate over all wavelengths A. This yields
A
F L<^Ak
K a r
= -[ F,(r)dX=-Ft(r) (A.22)
3 }Q X Jo

where Fx{r) is the radiative energy flux.

If we further assume Kk to be independent of the wavelength A, i.e., if we make the
so-called grey approximation, we can write

3 Jo KX dr 3 K dr
272 Appendix
If KX is not independent of A, as we assumed deriving equation (A.23), we can still derive
the same relation with a properly determined mean value of Kk, which turns out to be the
Rosseland mean absorption coefficient KR (see also Volume 2).

A.6 The Rosseland mean absorption coefficient

In deriving equation (A.23) we should have calculated

_ Kk dr

which we want to replace by

^
0 Kk dr K dr

For equation (A.23) to hold we must therefore require that

Jo KA dr KJ 0 dr
With

dr d r dr
and with d77dr being independent of X we derive
1 dB..
—dA
dT
or lJo"* ( A . 26 )
K
dT
as the prescription to determine the proper mean value of Kk. This K is a harmonic average
and is called the Rosseland mean absorption coefficient KR . Equation (A.24) tells us that
the appropriate mean of KX must weigh most heavily those parts of the spectrum where the
flux

is large, which are those wavelengths for which Kk is small and Bx is not small.
 Problems

Chapter 1
1. For a star whose spectrum indicates that it is an AO V star (strong H lines) the
measured color is B — V = 0.20, and the apparent magnitude rav = 9.6. How large is mB ?
How large is £(B - V)? What is (B - V) o , (U - B) o , mVo and raBo? How large is U - B?
What is the distance modulus mVo — M v ? How far away is the star?
2. After correction for the interstellar extinction stars with (B — V)o = 0.6 in the
Praesepe star cluster have an apparent visual magnitude of mVo = 10.7. Determine the
distance to the star cluster.

Chapter 2
1. Determine the isothermal scale height for the earth's atmosphere assuming
T = 300 K. M(earth) = 5.98 x 1027 g, 2jr/?(earth) = 40000 km. G = 6.68 x 10"8 [cgs].
Compare this with the isothermal scale height for the solar atmosphere. Use 7^ = 5800 K,
MQ = 2 x 1033 g, RQ = 6.98 x 1010 cm. Do the same for the solar interior. For a rough
estimate you can use the atmospheric gQ and T ~ 107 K for an interior layer.
2. At the bottom of an isothermal atmosphere the gas pressure is Pg = Pg0 and the
density p = p 0 . Calculate how much mass is above this layer.
You now replace in your mind the atmosphere with a layer of gas with constant density
p0. What is the height of this hypothetical atmosphere if it has the same mass as the real
atmosphere?
3. Estimate the diffusion time for photons to get to the surface from a layer in the
sun which is 0.1 RQ below the surface, and has a density of p = 2 x 10~2 g cm"3 and a K per
particle which is 2 x 10~22 cm2.
4. Estimate the central pressure and temperature in an O star with M = 40 MQ
andR = 30RQ.
5. In a supergiant of solar temperature the gas pressure Pg in the atmosphere is
Pg(r = |) ~ 3 x 103 dyn cm"2. How thick is the atmosphere? Assume Kg = 1 (not quite
true). How large is the mean free path of the photons?
6. For most stars (all main sequence stars) the ratio of mass M to radius R changes
very little (at most about 50 per cent for Teff > 4000 K). This means M/R ~ constant.
Assume that for all stars the average cross-section for photon absorption is the same.
Calculate p for a star with R = 10 RQ and calculate the time which the photon needs to get
from the interior to the surface for such a star. Compare this with the time needed for the
photons in the sun. M o = 2 x 1033 g, RQ ~ 1 x 1010 cm.

273
274 Problems
7. For which equatorial rotational velocities do the centrifugal forces become 10
per cent of the gravitational forces? Consider main sequence stars for which the gravi-
tational acceleration g ~ 10 4 cms" 2 . Make calculations for R = RQ =700000km and
R = 10RQ.
8. For a homogeneous magneticfieldthe magnetic forces can be described by the
magnetic pressure Pm = H2/8JI. (H = magnetic field strength in Gauss.) Estimate for
which magnetic field strengths magnetic forces may become more important than gas
pressure forces. In the sun Pg ~ 105 dyn cm"2, in hot stars Pg ~ 104 dyn cm"2 in the
atmospheres. Could magnetic forces become more important in stellar interiors?
9. Calculate the energy needed to completely ionize the stellar material consist-
ing of 91 per cent hydrogen and 9 per cent helium. Compare with the kinetic energy for
r ~ 1 0 7 K . xion(H) = 13.6eV, Xion(He) = 24.5 eV, x ion (He + ) = 54.4 eV. l e V = 1 . 6 6 x
10"12 erg.

Chapter 3
1. Most stars apparently do not change their radii. We concluded they must be in
hydrostatic equilibrium. Suppose hydrostatic equilibrium were violated by 0.01 per cent,
which means a fraction of 10~4 of the gravity would be imbalanced by the pressure gradient.
How long would it take for the sun to change its radius by 10 per cent? RQ =1 x 1010 cm,
4 2
g o = 2.74x 10 cms" .

2. If thermal equilibrium were violated by 0.01 per cent, which means the heat
transport coming into the atmosphere from the bottom would be (1 - 10~4) times the flux
going out at the surface, how long would it take for the sun to change its temperature by 10
per cent? The gas pressure in the solar atmosphere is Pg ~ 105 dyn cm"2. Tef{ = 5800 K.
3. Estimate the time span during which the O star atmosphere would cool off if no
heat were supplied from below. Assume a temperature of 45 000 K for the O star and
Pg = 103dyncm~2. The atmosphere has an extent of about 1 pressure scale height H.
Assume g = 104 cm s~2.
4. In the solar atmosphere K per particle is about 10~24 cm2. The gas pressure Pg
is roughly Pg ~ 105 dyn cm"2, the temperature T ~ Teff = 5800 K. The gas is mainly
hydrogen. Calculate the radiative flux JTFT. Estimate by how much r changes over one
pressure scale height H.
5. Compare the conductive heat flux for the solar atmosphere with the radiative
energy flux.

Chapter 4
1. Calculate the Rosseland mean opacity for a so-called picket fence model of the
absorption coefficient (see Fig. B.I). Assume that over 10 per cent of the wavelengths Kg is
100 cm"2, while over 90 per cent of the wavelengths Kg = 1 cm2, for all wavelength regions.
2. Calculate Amax for T = 3500 K, 6000 K, 10 000 K, 40 000 K.
3. Calculate the bound-free continuous absorption coefficient for hydrogen
including only the Balmer level with n = 2 and the Lyman level with n = 1. Plot log K^ = K
per atom as a function of log A or logv. The absorption coefficient per electron in the
quantum state n is given by
_ 64jz4meewZ'4gG
Qn
~ 3V3ch 6 n 5 v 3
 Problems 275
Take into account
= 2) gin = 2)

Use g G = 1- me = 9.105 x 10" 28 g, c = 3 x 1010 cm, /* = 6.624 x 10~27 ergs,

10
e = 4.8024 x 10" electrostatic units, gG = Gaunt factor.
Fig. B.2 shows the schematic energy level diagram of the hydrogen atom including only
the two lowest energy levels.

Chapter 5
1. Calculate the radiative gradient Vr for depth independent Kg. By which factor
must Cv increase in order to render such an atmosphere convectively unstable?
2. For two-atomic molecules there are two additional degrees of freedom
because of rotation. How large is Cvl How large is Vad in a stellar gas layer with two atomic
molecules? For a depth independent Kg would the gas layer be unstable to convection?
3. Assume y = § and /cg = K0Pg. How large must be the value of b in order to find
convective instability?
4. If half of the energy is transported by radiation, how large is the temperature
gradient V as compared to Vrad?

100

Fig. B.I. The wavelength dependence of K^ for a picket fence model is shown. This
distribution of small and large KA extends over the whole spectral region.

= X i o n /2 2

Fig. B.2. Shows the schematic energy level diagram of the hydrogen atom including
only the two lowest energy levels and the ionization limit.
276 Problems
Chapter 6
1. Calculate the convective energy flux in the solar photosphere where
AT- 300 K, Pg ~ 105 dyn cm"2, T^ 5800 K, v ~ 2 km s"1. Cv(mol) = f/*g. Compare this
with the radiative flux.
Do the same for an early F star where Pg ~ 10? dyn cm"2, Te{{ ~ 7500 K, AT ~ 500 K,
v ~ 3 km s~J. a = 5.6 x 10~5 [cgs].
2. Estimate the maximum convective velocity in an atmosphere of a K star.
3. Calculate the ratio of radiative to convective flux in a layer with adiabatic
temperature stratification at the top of the solar convection zone where Vr ~ 1000 and
Vad ~ 0.2, and close to the bottom of the solar convection zone where Vr ~ 0.5 and
Vad ~ 0.35.

Chapter 7
1. Calculate and plot Pg(T) for which in a pure hydrogen atmosphere the ratio
(n(H+))/(n(H)) = 10. Use the Saha equation
rc(H+)_ 1 u+ (2jcmekT)3/2 13.6eV/kT
n(U) ne u h3

Remember: n(H+) = ne in a pure hydrogen atmosphere, Pg = (n(H) + rc(H+) + ne)kT,

u+ = l,u = 2.
Suggested procedure: Choose nc 2* 1017, calculate T for which (H(H + ))/(W(H)) = 10,
then calculate Pg for this T and ne. Calculate five points with A log ne ~ 1.

Chapter 8
1. Calculate how long an A0 star can live on its gravitational energy. An A0 main
sequence star has M/Mo ~ 2.5 and R/RQ ~ 2.0. Its Teff is about 10 000 K.
2. Suppose the sun were made of the most favorable proportions of H and O such
that all the mass could burn to H 2 O. How long could the sun live on such energy supply?
Assume that for each H2O molecule an energy of about 10 eV is liberated.
3. Calculate how long an A0 main sequence star can live on the main sequence on
its nuclear energy source. Use the data given in problem 1.
4. Estimate the age of the globular cluster 47 Tuc from the colors and the
luminosities of the stars just evolving off the main sequence (see Fig. 1.7). Assume that the
47 Tuc main sequence fits exactly on the main sequence of the stars in our neighborhood.
(This is actually not true because 47 Tuc is metal poor. Its main sequence lies below the one
for stars with solar element abundances. In addition the stars are more blue than solar
neighborhood stars because less light is absorbed in the blue in the spectral lines of the
heavy elements. See Volume 2.)
Give another age estimate assuming that in the color absolute magnitude diagram the 47
Tuc main sequence lies 0.8 magnitude below the main sequence of the solar neighborhood
stars (see Fig. 14.14).

Chapter 9
1. Verify equations (9.15) to (9.19).
 Problems 277
Chapter 10
1. Assume that all main sequence stars have a helium abundance by mass of
Y = 0.28. How much helium enrichment does it take to increase L by a factor 1.5 and
thereby reduce the main sequence lifetime of the stars by a factor of 1.5? (a) for B stars, (b)
for G stars.
2. Derive the ju dependence of the luminosity if we had /cg = K^p05 T~2. Would a
mixed star evolve above or below the main sequence?
3. In F stars the energy generation is partly due to the proton-proton chain and
partly due to the CNO cycle. Assume that on average v ~ 10. Which way would a well
mixed star evolve?

Chapter 11
1. Show the change in the position of the Hayashi line for a change in mass by a
factor of 2 as compared to the Hayashi line for M — 1 M o . Calculate A log Teff for a given
luminosity L ^ L o .
2. Show the change in position of the Hayashi lines for log Z/ZQ = — 1 and
log ZIZO = — 2 as compared to log ZIZQ = 0. Calculate A log Tef{ for a given L ^ L o .

Chapter 12
1. Calculate the values of MJM for equal spacing of
Mr

in steps of 0.05, £ = 0 to 1. Use rj = 0.01 and rj = 0.001.

2. Calculate the Mr values for §/-_l_1/2 and compare with (Mr/ + Mrj+1 )/2 for £ = 0.1
and £ = 0.5. How important is it to center correctly at £7+i/2?
3. Suppose you had chosen In Mr as your independent variable. You then have to
determine the pressure etc. at (lnM r ) y+1/2 . How large an error do you make if you use
(Mr)j+i/2 instead? Estimate your errors by looking at Table 13.2 which gives the relation
between Mr, Pg and T(r) for a star with M = MQ.
4. Verify equations (12.9), (12.10) and (12.12).

Chapter 13
1. Determine Mbol and B — V for the zero age sun and for the present sun from
the data given in Tables 13.1, 13.2 and 1.1.
Do the same for the zero age star with 15 M o (Table 13.3) and the same star after it has
been on the main sequence for 8.6 X 106 years. Plot the data in the color magnitude
diagram.
2. Calculate the equilibrium abundance ratio for C13/C12 and N14/C12 in the
center of the present sun. Use the reaction times quoted in equations (8.9).
3. Plot temperature and pressure for the B0 star as a function of Mr for the zero
age main sequence star and for the evolved main sequence star. Discuss what happens to
the different mass shells and why. Use Tables 13.4 and 13.5.
278 Problems
4. Plot L/L* as a function of Mr/M* for the star with Tefi = 20 423 K star and for
the sun. Discuss and explain the differences. Use Tables 13.1 and 13.4.
5. Plot T(r), Pg(r) and the chemical abundances as a function of MrIM for the
stars with r e f f =10 800K stars. Use Tables 13.5 and 13.6. Discuss the evolutionary
changes.
6. Calculate Teff from L and R for the models in Tables 13.3 to 13.6.

Chapter 14
1. Estimate the neutron densities for which neutron degeneracy becomes import-
ant and also where relativistic neutron degeneracy occurs.

Chapter 15
1. Calculate the lifetime of a pure helium star with M = 3 MQ on the helium main
sequence if it burns 10 per cent of its helium to carbon by means of the triple-alpha reaction.
Use the luminosities given in Fig. 10.7.

Chapter 16
1. Calculate the cooling sequence for the star Sirius B which now has n% =8.68
and Tef{ = 25 500 K. Sirius has a trigonometric parallax of n = O'/377. Use the bolometric
correction given in Table 1.1 for main sequence stars. Calculate its apparent magnitudes n\
as a function of its 7 eff.
2. Estimate roughly the apparent magnitude of a neutron star at the distance of
Sirius if it also had Teff = 25 500 K, and if it had 7eff = 105 K.

Chapter 17
1. Assume that the pulsation constants Q are the same for all stars (not true but a
reasonable approximation for order of magnitude estimates). If main sequence stars were
radial pulsators, what would be the fundamental periods for the sun, for Vega, for the B0 V
star r Sco? What would be the period for a white dwarf of 0.6 MQ with a radius of roughly
6000 km? Assume Q = 0.04 days.

Chapter 18
1. Plot a luminosity, Tef{, diagram for the Praesepe cluster using the observed
color magnitude diagrams (Fig. 1.5) and Table 1.1. Assume E(B — V) = 0.0 and
mV() - My = 6.0.

Chapter 19
1. Calculate the Jeans mass for a gas with n — 10 cm and T = 100 K, and with
T = 1000 K. Do the same for n = 10 cm"3.
2. Verify equation (20.13).
3. Follow the evolution of a cloud at point F in Fig. 20.4. Will it end up
contracting or expanding?
 Problems 279
4. For a mass of 10 M o , at which radius does a spherically symmetric homogene-
ous hydrogen cloud reach a density of log nH = 6 and become optically thick if it has a
temperature of 50 K?
5. (a) Suppose an interstellar cloud is penetrated by a homogeneous magnetic
field H. If the cloud has n = 104 cm"3 and T = 10 K, for which field strength does the gas
pressure Pg become equal to the magnetic pressure PH = H2/8JI (H in Gauss)?
(b) If a cloud of the Jeans mass for this density and temperature and with half this field
strength H contracts to the main sequence with a frozen-in magnetic field, how large would
the field strength H* be for the main sequence star if it had homogeneous density?
 References

Arp, H. C. 1958, in Handbook of Physics, vol. 51, Springer Verlag, Berlin, p. 75.
Bahcall, J. and Ulrich, R. 1987. Preprint.
Baker, N. and Kippenhahn, R. 1962, Zeitschrift fiir Astrophysik, 54, 114.
Becker, S. A., Iben, I. and Tuggle, R. S. 1977, Astrophys. J., 218, 633.
Becker, W. 1950, Stern und Sternsystem, 2nd edn, Theodor Steinkopff, Dresden.
Bertelli, G., Bressan, A. G. and Chiosi, C. 1984, Astron. Astrophys., 130, 279.
Biermann, L. 1937, Astron. Nachrichten, 264, 359.
Boesgaard, A. M. and Tripicco, M. J. 1986, Astrophys. J., 308, L49.
Bohm-Vitense, E. 1953, Zeitschriftf. Astrophysik, 32, 135.
Bohm-Vitense, E. 1958, Zeitschrift f Astrophysik, 46, 108.
Brunish, W. M. 1989, private communication.
Brunish, W. M. and Truran, J. W. 1982, Astrophys. J. SuppL, 49, 447.
Burnham, R. 1978a, Burnham s Celestial Handbook, vol. Ill, Dover Publ., New York,
p. 1442.
Burnham, R. 1978b, Burnham's Celestial Handbook, vol. Ill, Dover Publ., New York,
p. 1446.
Burnham, R. 1978c, Burnham's Celestial Handbook, vol. Ill, Dover Publ., New York,
p. 1911.
Cohen, M. and Kuhi, L. V. 1979, Astrophys. J. SuppL, 41, 743.
Cox, J. P. 1956, Astrophys. J., 122, 286.
Cox, J. and Salpeter, E. E. 1964, Astrophys. J., 140, 485.
Cox, A. N. and Tabor, J. E. 1976, Astrophys. J. SuppL, 31, 271.
Eggleton, P. P. 1971, Monthly Notices Roy. Astr. Soc, 151, 351.
Faulkner, J., Griffiths, K. and Hoyle, F. 1965, Monthly Notices, 129, 363.
Finkelnburg, W. and Peters, Th. 1957, in Handbook of Physics, vol. 28, Springer
Verlag, Berlin, p. 79.
Gehrels, T. 1978, Protostars and Planets, University of Arizona Press, Tucson,
Arizona.
Hayashi, C. 1966, Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys., 4, 171.
Hayashi, E., Hoshi, R. and Sugimoto, D. 1962, Supplement of the Progress of
Theoretical Physics, no. 22.
Henyey, L. G., Wilets, L., Bohm, K. H., Le Levier, R. and Levee, R. D. 1959,
Astrophys. J., 129, 628.
Hesser, J. E., Harris, W. E., VandenBerg, D. A., Allwright, J. W. B., Shott, P. and
Stetson, P. B. 1987, Publ. Astr. Soc. Pacific, 99, 739.
Hoyle, F. 1953, Astrophys. J., 118, 512.
Iben, I. 1967, Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys., 12, 215.
Iben, I. 1971, Publ. Astr. Soc. Pacific, 83, 697.

280
 References 281
Iben, I. and Tuggle, S. 1972, Astrophys. J., 178, 441.
Johnson, H. L. and Morgan, W. W. 1953, Astrophys. J., 117, 313.
Kippenhahn, R., Weigert, A. and Hofmeister, E. 1967, in Methods of Computational
Physics, vol. 7, p. 129.
Kurucz, R. 1979, Astrophys. J. Suppl., 40, 1.
Lambert, D. L. and Ries, L. M. 1981. Astrophys. J., 248, 228.
Ledoux, P. and Walraven, Th. 1958, in Handbook of Physics, vol. 51, Springer Verlag,
Berlin, Gottingen, Heidelberg, p. 353.
Low, C , Lynden-Bell, D. 1976, Monthly Notices Roy. Astr. Soc, 176, 367.
Mateo, M. 1987, Ph.D. Thesis, University of Washington.
O'Dell, R. 1968, in Planetary Nebulae (IAU Symp. No. 34), D. E. Osterbrock and
C. R. O'Dell (eds), P- 361, Dordrecht: Reidel.
Popper, D. M. 1980, Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys., 18, 115.
Proffitt, C. 1988, Ph.D. Thesis, University of Washington.
Rees, M. 1976, Monthly Notices Roy. Astr. Soc, 176, 483.
Rosseland, S. 1949, The Pulsation Theory of Variable Stars, Clarendon Press, Oxford.
Sandage, A. R. 1986, Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys., 24, 450.
Sandage, A. R. and Tammann, G. 1968, Astrophys. J., 151, 531.
Schmidt, E. 1984, Astrophys. J., 285, 501.
Stahler, S. W. 1983, Astrophys. J., 274, 822.
Stetson, P. B., VandenBerg, D. A., Bolte, M., Hesser, J. E. and Smith, G. H. 1989,
Astron. J., 97, 1360.
Schwarzschild, M. 1958a, Stellar Structure and Evolution, p. 72.
Schwarzschild, M. 1958b, Stellar Structure and Evolution, p. 82.
Schwarzschild, M. 1958c, Stellar Structure and Evolution, p. 54.
Spite, F. and Spite, M. 1982, Astr. Astrophys., 115, 357.
Straizys, V. and Sviderskiene, Z. 1972, Vilniaus Astronomijos Observatorijos Biuletenis,
35, 1.
Ulrich, R. K. 1974, Zeitschrift fur Astrophys. J., 188, 369.
Unsold, A. 1931, Zeitschrift fur Astrophysik, 1, 138 and 2, 209.
Unsold, A. 1969, The New Cosmos, Springer Verlag, Berlin, p. 132.
Unsold, A. 1948, Astrophysik, 25, 11.
VandenBerg, D. A. and Bell, R. 1985, Astrophys. J. Suppl, 58, 561.
Weidemann, V. 1975, in Problems of Stellar Atmospheres and Envelopes, B. Baschek,
W. H. Kegel and G. Traving (eds.), p. 1973, Springer Verlag, New York, Heidelberg,
Berlin.
Zhevakin, S. A. 1959, Russ. Astrophys. J., 36, 996, translated in Soviet Astrophys. J., 3,
913 (1960).

Other books and textbooks on stellar structure and evolution

Aller, L. and McLaughlin, D. (eds.), Stellar Structure, vol. VIII of Stars and Stellar
Systems. Gen. ed. G. Kuiper and B. Middlehurst, University of Chicago Press,
Chicago, 1965.
Bower, R. and Deming, T., Astrophysics: I. Stars. Jones and Bartlett Publishers Inc.,
Boston 1984.
Chandrasekhar, S., An Introduction to the Study of Stellar Structure. University of
Chicago Press, Chicago, 1939. (Also Dover Publication.)
Chiu, H.-Y. and Muriel, A. (eds.), Stellar Evolution. MIT Press (1972).
Clayton, D., Principles of Stellar Evolution and Nucleosynthesis. McGraw-Hill, New
York, 1968, University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1983.
282 References
Cox, J. and Giuli, R., Stellar Structure, vol. I. Physical Principles, Vol. II, Applications
to Stars. Gordon and Breach, New York, 1968.
Eddington, A., The Internal Constitution of Stars, 1st edition 1926. Dover Publication
Inc., New York, 1959.
Kippenhahn, R., 100 Billion Suns. Basic Books Inc. Publishers, New York, 1983.
Kippenhahn, R. and Weigert, A., Stellar Structure and Evolution, Springer-Verlag,
Berlin, Heidelberg, New York, 1990.
Motz, L., Astrophysics and Stellar Structure. Ginn and Company, Waltham,
Massachusetts, 1970.
Novotny, E., Introduction to Stellar Atmospheres and Interiors. Oxford University Press,
New York, 1973.
Schwarzschild, M., Structure and Evolution of the Stars. Princeton University Press,
Princeton, New Jersey, 1958 (Dover Publications).
 Index

absorption coefficient contraction

definition 14 adiabatic 249
bound-free 42,45 non-adiabatic 251
free-free 43 gravitational 29
lines 49 contraction times 29
adiabats 55,56 convection 5 Iff
ages characteristic length 66ff
meteorites 86 energy exchange 69, 73,74
star clusters 102 energy transport 5 Iff
angular radius 14 influence on luminosity 131
asymptotic giant branch 9, 10, 189 influence on radius 131
instability 5 Iff
birth line 263 mixing length 66
black body 14 mixing length theory 64
black holes 221 overshoot 76ff
blue loops 198,199 reasons for instability 59
bolometric corrections 12, 13 temperature fluctuations 66
boundary conditions 108 velocities 66
buoyancy force 65 convection zone
depth 79ff
carbon flash 203 interior 74,75
Cepheid instability strip 199, 228, 237 Coulomb forces 89
Cepheid mass problem 238 Crab nebula 220
Cepheid masses
Baade-Wesselink masses 240
beat masses 243 degeneracy 182ff
bump masses 242 non-relativistic 177ff
dynamical 243 relativistic 185
evolutionary 239 diffusion of photons 30, 31
pulsational 239,240 diffusion, radiative 163
Cepheids 23 Iff diffusion times 31
adiabatic pulsations 229ff distance modulus 4
eigenfunctions of homogeneous stars 225 Doppler shift 15
eigenfunctions of polytropes 226
excitation of pulsations 232 effective temperature 13ff
excitation by kappa mechanism 232 eigenfrequencies
excitation by nuclear reactions 235 of Cepheids 225,226
interior structure 227 of rope 223
non-adiabatic pulsations 233 electron scattering 48
observations 231 element abundances
period-luminosity relation 238, 239 B0 IV star interior 159
pulsation amplitude 236 solar interior 159
restoring force 224 element production 97, 98
chemical composition of stars 20 energy distribution
centrifugal forces 23 M giant 12
clump stars 187 Sun 2, 11
colors 2 Vega 2

283
284 Index
energy generation 35, 86ff, 98ff interstellar clouds
carbon-nitrogen cycle 95 cooling 25 Iff
proton-proton chain 93ff equilibrium 249
triple-alpha reaction 96, 97 fragmentation 257ff
energy, gravitational 28ff fragmentation limits 260, 261
release 128, 153 gravitational contraction 253
energy level diagrams 42, 43 heating 25 Iff
energy, kinetic 26 interstellar reddening 3
energy, photon 44 ionization energy 44
energy source isochrones 215
chemical 87
gravitational 87 Jeans criterion for gravitational instability 246
nuclear 87ff Jeans mass 247
energy, thermal 26
energy transport kappa mountain 232
convective 6 Iff Kelvin-Helmholtz time 30
radiative 35ff, 266ff
equation of state lithium abundances 84
degenerate 185 lithium diffusion 85
ideal gas 25,26, 108 luminosities 11, 13ff
equilibrium abundances 100
excitation energy 44
evolution magnetic forces 23
dependence on heavy element magnitudes
abundances 199 absolute 3
dependence on mass 198,199 apparent 1
dependence on mixing 200, 201 bolometric 12
giant branch 197 main sequence
interstellar cloud 253ff helium stars 122
low mass stars 172ff hydrogen stars 5, 7, 9
massive stars 197ff population II stars 124, 125
planetary nebulae 195,196 masses of stars 14ff
population II 190 mass limit
red giant branch 176, 177 neutron stars 211
subgiant branch 172ff white dwarfs 210
expansion mass-luminosity relation
adiabatic and non-adiabatic 251 empirical 16, 17
planetary nebulae 192 theoretical 18, 19, 115, 118, 122
mass-radius relation, degenerate,
Fermi momentum 179 nonrelativistic 208
mean free path 31, 37
Gamow peak 94 model
B0 IV star 165
Hayashi line 132ff evolved main sequence A0 star 171
dependence on heavy element present sun 157
abundances 134,137 zero age A0 star 170
dependence on mass 134, 135 zero age B0 star 164
Hayashi track 262, 263 zero age sun 156
heat conduction 39, 40 model calculation 141ff
heat conduction coefficient 39 Henyey's method 142ff
heavy element generation 203ff Schwarzschild's method 141
helium flash 186
homologous stars 113ff neutrino problem, solar 158ff
contracting 126 neutron stars 211
dependence on atomic weight 117ff density 211
dependence on heavy element nuclear force 90
abundances 121
radiative equilibrium 113ff opacities 42ff
horizontal branch 9, 10 Cox Tabor 46
stellar evolution 189 Kramers' 48ff
hydrostatic equilibrium 21ff optical depth, definition 14
 Index 285

parsec, definition 4 globular clusters 8ff, 191, 213ff

Pauli principle 177 open clusters 5ff, 104
peculiar A stars 170 young populous 246
penetration probability 92 star formation 245ff
pendulum excitation 229 Stefan-Boltzmann law 14
pendulum oscillations 228 stellar evolution 15Iff
Planck function 14, 36, 44, 45 reason for 151
planetary nebulae 192ff structure equations 107, 108
polytropes 225,226 dimensionless 109
pressure, radiation 108 supergiants 7
pressure gradient 107 supernova 1987a 220
pressure scale height 56 supernovae
protostars 256,264 type I 220
pulsars 220 type II 203, 204
pulsating stars 222ff surface flux 14
radiative equilibrium 35 temperature
reaction probability 93 central 25
reaction times 95, 96 effective 13ff
red giants 9 temperature gradient
Rosseland mean absorption coefficient 44 adiabatic 53ff
Rosseland weighting function 14, 44, 271 radiative 37, 57, 58, 107
with convection 71
Saha equation 79 thermal equilibrium 32
semiconvection 168 tunnel effect 89ff
Schrodinger equation 90
Schwarzschild criterion for convective virial theorem 25
instability 51,52,53
Sirius B 218 white dwarfs 206ff
spectral classification 18, 19 cooling sequences 210
specific heat 54 cooling times 210
star clusters masses 210, 218, 219
ages 102 wave function 90